PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS VOL. I: ARCHITECTURAL & STRUCTURAL APRIL 25, 2011 BIRKS RESIDENCE AT BIRCH COVE COLCHESTER, VERMONT

Transcription

1 PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS VOL. I: ARCHITECTURAL & STRUCTURAL APRIL 25, 2011 COLCHESTER, VERMONT ARCHITECT CIVIL ENGINEER Brad Rabinowitz Architect 200 Main Street Burlington, VT (802) Krebs & Lansing Consulting Engineers 164 Main Street Colchester, VT (802) STRUCTURAL ENGINEER Servidio Engineering Consultants 135 College Street Burlington, VT (802) MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL & PLUMBING ENGINEER L.N. Consulting, Inc. P.O. Box Burlington, VT (802)

2 SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME I DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Document Title Page Document Table of Contents Document Invitation to Bid Document Bid Form Document Agreement Form Document General Conditions DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION General Requirements DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS Section Selective Site Demolition Section Structure Demolition DIVISION 03 CONCRETE (NOT USED) (SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS) DIVISION 04 MASONRY Section Unit Masonry Section Dry-Placed Stone Section Quarried Stone Veneer DIVISION 05 - METALS Section Metal Fabrications DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES Section Rough Carpentry Section Finish Carpentry Section Architectural Woodwork TABLE OF CONTENTS APR 2011

3 DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing Section Thermal Insulation Section Slate Roofing (Alternate No.1) Section Wood Shingles Section Synthetic Slate Roofing Section Thermoplastic-Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing Section Flashing and Sheet Metal Section Firestopping Section Joint Protection DIVISION 08 OPENINGS Section Wood French Doors Section Stile and Rail Wood Doors Section Sectional Doors Section Wood Windows Section Door Hardware Section Mirrors DIVISION 09 - FINISHES Section Gypsum Board Assemblies Section Tiling Section Wood Flooring Section Resilient Flooring Section Acoustic Wall Panels Section Painting and Coating DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES Section Toilet Accessories Section Fireplace Specialties DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT Section Residential Appliances DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS Section Roller Window Shades Section Countertops TABLE OF CONTENTS APR 2011

4 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT Section Residential Elevator VOLUME II DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL Section Mechanical General Provisions Section Hangers and Supports Section Mechanical Identification Section Duct Insulation Section Equipment Insulation Section Pipe Insulation Section Valves Section Meters and Gages Section Domestic Water Piping Section Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Section Hydronic Piping Section Hydronic Pumps Section Liquified Petroleum Gas Piping Section Plumbing Fixtures Section Plumbing Specialties Section Indirect Domestic Water Heaters Section Fire Suppression Sprinklers Section Condensing Boilers Section Heat Exchangers Section Water Source Heat Pumps Section Radiant Slab Piping Section Metal Ducts Section Duct Accessories Section Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles Section HVAC Instrumentation and Controls Section Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing TABLE OF CONTENTS APR 2011

5 DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL Section Electrical General Provisions Section Grounding and Bonding Section Seismic Controls for Electrical Work Section Electrical Identification Section Electrical Testing Section Conductors and Cables Section Tel/Data Systems Section Raceways and Boxes Section Wiring Devices Section Packaged Engine Generators Section Variable Frequency Controllers Section Transient Voltage Protection Section Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers Section Motor Starters & Wiring Section Panelboards Section Fuses Section Interior Lighting Section Exterior Lighting Section Central Dimming Controls Section Building Automation Network Control Systems Section Intrusion Detection Section Fire Alarm END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS APR 2011

6 AIA Document A101 TM 2007 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum AGREEMENT made as of the day of in the year (In words, indicate day, month and year.) BETWEEN the Owner: (Name, legal status, address and other information) «Thomas & Linda Birks»«, Individual» «1002 Sherbrooke St. West Suite 2520 Montreal, Quebec H3A 3L6 Canada» and the Contractor: (Name, legal status, address and other information) for the following Project: (Name, location and detailed description) «Birks Residence at Birch Cove» «Colchester, VT» «Demolition of an existing house and construction of a new house on Lake Champlain in Colchester, VT.» ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original AIA standard form. An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed. This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. AIA Document A , General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, is adopted in this document by reference. Do not use with other general conditions unless this document is modified. The Architect: (Name, legal status, address and other information) «Brad Rabinowitz Architect» «200 Main Street Burlington, VT 05401» «Telephone Number: » «Fax Number: » The Owner and Contractor agree as follows. ELECTRONIC COPYING of any portion of this AIA Document to another electronic file is prohibited and constitutes a violation of copyright laws as set forth in the footer of this document. AIA Document A Copyright 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:32:09 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 1

7 TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 4 CONTRACT SUM 5 PAYMENTS 6 DISPUTE RESOLUTION 7 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION 8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 10 INSURANCE AND BONDS ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement, other documents listed in this Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, all of which form the Contract, and are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. An enumeration of the Contract Documents, other than a Modification, appears in Article 9. ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT The Contractor shall fully execute the Work described in the Contract Documents, except as specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others. ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 3.1 The date of commencement of the Work shall be the date of this Agreement unless a different date is stated below or provision is made for the date to be fixed in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner. (Insert the date of commencement if it differs from the date of this Agreement or, if applicable, state that the date will be fixed in a notice to proceed.) If, prior to the commencement of the Work, the Owner requires time to file mortgages and other security interests, the Owner s time requirement shall be as follows: 3.2 The Contract Time shall be measured from the date of commencement. 3.3 The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than ( ) days from the date of commencement, or as follows: (Insert number of calendar days. Alternatively, a calendar date may be used when coordinated with the date of commencement. If appropriate, insert requirements for earlier Substantial Completion of certain portions of the Work.) AIA Document A Copyright 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:32:09 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 2

8 Portion of Work Substantial Completion Date, subject to adjustments of this Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents. (Insert provisions, if any, for liquidated damages relating to failure to achieve Substantial Completion on time or for bonus payments for early completion of the Work.) ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM 4.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum in current funds for the Contractor s performance of the Contract. The Contract Sum shall be ($ ), subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents. 4.2 The Contract Sum is based upon the following alternates, if any, which are described in the Contract Documents and are hereby accepted by the Owner: (State the numbers or other identification of accepted alternates. If the bidding or proposal documents permit the Owner to accept other alternates subsequent to the execution of this Agreement, attach a schedule of such other alternates showing the amount for each and the date when that amount expires.) 4.3 Unit prices, if any: (Identify and state the unit price; state quantity limitations, if any, to which the unit price will be applicable.) Item Units and Limitations Price Per Unit ($0.00) 4.4 Allowances included in the Contract Sum, if any: (Identify allowance and state exclusions, if any, from the allowance price.) Item Price ARTICLE 5 PAYMENTS 5.1 PROGRESS PAYMENTS Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month, or as follows: Provided that an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the day of a month, the Owner shall make payment of the certified amount to the Contractor not later than the day of the month. If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the application date fixed above, payment shall be made by the Owner not later than ( ) days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment. (Federal, state or local laws may require payment within a certain period of time.) Each Application for Payment shall be based on the most recent schedule of values submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The schedule of values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work. The schedule of values shall be prepared in such form and supported AIA Document A Copyright 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:32:09 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 3

9 by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor s Applications for Payment Applications for Payment shall show the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment Subject to other provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress payment shall be computed as follows:.1 Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work as determined by multiplying the percentage completion of each portion of the Work by the share of the Contract Sum allocated to that portion of the Work in the schedule of values, less retainage of percent ( %). Pending final determination of cost to the Owner of changes in the Work, amounts not in dispute shall be included as provided in Section of AIA Document A , General Conditions of the Contract for Construction;.2 Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed construction (or, if approved in advance by the Owner, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing), less retainage of «TEN» percent ( «10» %);.3 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner; and.4 Subtract amounts, if any, for which the Architect has withheld or nullified a Certificate for Payment as provided in Section 9.5 of AIA Document A The progress payment amount determined in accordance with Section shall be further modified under the following circumstances:.1 Add, upon Substantial Completion of the Work, a sum sufficient to increase the total payments to the full amount of the Contract Sum, less such amounts as the Architect shall determine for incomplete Work, retainage applicable to such work and unsettled claims; and (Section of AIA Document A requires release of applicable retainage upon Substantial Completion of Work with consent of surety, if any.).2 Add, if final completion of the Work is thereafter materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor, any additional amounts payable in accordance with Section of AIA Document A Reduction or limitation of retainage, if any, shall be as follows: (If it is intended, prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work, to reduce or limit the retainage resulting from the percentages inserted in Sections and above, and this is not explained elsewhere in the Contract Documents, insert here provisions for such reduction or limitation.) Except with the Owner s prior approval, the Contractor shall not make advance payments to suppliers for materials or equipment which have not been delivered and stored at the site. 5.2 FINAL PAYMENT Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be made by the Owner to the Contractor when.1 the Contractor has fully performed the Contract except for the Contractor s responsibility to correct Work as provided in Section of AIA Document A , and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which extend beyond final payment; and.2 a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect The Owner s final payment to the Contractor shall be made no later than 30 days after the issuance of the Architect s final Certificate for Payment, or as follows: AIA Document A Copyright 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:32:09 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 4

10 ARTICLE 6 DISPUTE RESOLUTION 6.1 INITIAL DECISION MAKER The Architect will serve as Initial Decision Maker pursuant to Section 15.2 of AIA Document A , unless the parties appoint below another individual, not a party to this Agreement, to serve as Initial Decision Maker. (If the parties mutually agree, insert the name, address and other contact information of the Initial Decision Maker, if other than the Architect.) 6.2 BINDING DISPUTE RESOLUTION For any Claim subject to, but not resolved by, mediation pursuant to Section 15.3 of AIA Document A , the method of binding dispute resolution shall be as follows: (Check the appropriate box. If the Owner and Contractor do not select a method of binding dispute resolution below, or do not subsequently agree in writing to a binding dispute resolution method other than litigation, Claims will be resolved by litigation in a court of competent jurisdiction.) [ «X» ] Arbitration pursuant to Section 15.4 of AIA Document A [ ] Litigation in a court of competent jurisdiction [ ] Other (Specify) ARTICLE 7 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION 7.1 The Contract may be terminated by the Owner or the Contractor as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A The Work may be suspended by the Owner as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A ARTICLE 8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 8.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of AIA Document A or another Contract Document, the reference refers to that provision as amended or supplemented by other provisions of the Contract Documents. 8.2 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate stated below, or in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. (Insert rate of interest agreed upon, if any.) % 8.3 The Owner s representative: (Name, address and other information) 8.4 The Contractor s representative: (Name, address and other information) AIA Document A Copyright 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:32:09 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 5

11 8.5 Neither the Owner s nor the Contractor s representative shall be changed without ten days written notice to the other party. 8.6 Other provisions: ARTICLE 9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.1 The Contract Documents, except for Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, are enumerated in the sections below The Agreement is this executed AIA Document A , Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor The General Conditions are AIA Document A , General Conditions of the Contract for Construction The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract: Document Title Date Pages The Specifications: (Either list the Specifications here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.) Section Title Date Pages The Drawings: (Either list the Drawings here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.) Number Title Date The Addenda, if any: Number Date Pages Portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements are not part of the Contract Documents unless the bidding requirements are also enumerated in this Article Additional documents, if any, forming part of the Contract Documents:.1 AIA Document E , Digital Data Protocol Exhibit, if completed by the parties, or the following: AIA Document A Copyright 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:32:09 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 6

12 .2 Other documents, if any, listed below: (List here any additional documents that are intended to form part of the Contract Documents. AIA Document A provides that bidding requirements such as advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms and the Contractor s bid are not part of the Contract Documents unless enumerated in this Agreement. They should be listed here only if intended to be part of the Contract Documents.) ARTICLE 10 INSURANCE AND BONDS The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance and provide bonds as set forth in Article 11 of AIA Document A (State bonding requirements, if any, and limits of liability for insurance required in Article 11 of AIA Document A ) Type of insurance or bond Limit of liability or bond amount ($0.00) This Agreement entered into as of the day and year first written above. OWNER (Signature) CONTRACTOR (Signature) (Printed name and title) (Printed name and title) AIA Document A Copyright 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:32:09 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 7

13 AIA Document A201 TM 2007 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or address) «Birks Residence at Birch Cove» «Colchester, VT» THE OWNER: (Name, legal status and address) «Thomas & Linda Birks»«, Individual» «1002 Sherbrooke St. West Suite 2520 Montreal, Quebec H3A 3L6 Canada» THE ARCHITECT: (Name, legal status and address) «Brad Rabinowitz Architect» «200 Main Street Burlington, VT 05401» TABLE OF ARTICLES ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original AIA standard form. An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed. This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 2 OWNER 3 CONTRACTOR 4 ARCHITECT 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 8 TIME 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES ELECTRONIC COPYING of any portion of this AIA Document to another electronic file is prohibited and constitutes a violation of copyright laws as set forth in the footer of this document. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 1

14 INDEX (Topics and numbers in bold are section headings.) Acceptance of Nonconforming Work 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 Acceptance of Work 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, , , 12.3 Access to Work 3.16, 6.2.1, 12.1 Accident Prevention 10 Acts and Omissions 3.2, 3.3.2, , 3.18, 4.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, , , , 13.7, 14.1, 15.2 Addenda 1.1.1, Additional Costs, Claims for 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 6.1.1, , 10.3, Additional Inspections and Testing 9.4.2, 9.8.3, , 13.5 Additional Insured Additional Time, Claims for 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, , 8.3.2, Administration of the Contract 3.1.3, 4.2, 9.4, 9.5 Advertisement or Invitation to Bid Aesthetic Effect Allowances 3.8, All-risk Insurance , Applications for Payment 4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.10, Approvals 2.1.1, 2.2.2, 2.4, 3.1.3, , , , , 4.2.7, 9.3.2, Arbitration 8.3.1, , , , 15.4 ARCHITECT 4 Architect, Definition of Architect, Extent of Authority 2.4.1, , 4.1, 4.2, 5.2, 6.3, 7.1.2, 7.3.7, 7.4, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.8, , , 12.1, , , , , , , Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility 2.1.1, , , , 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, , , , 5.2.1, 7.4, 9.4.2, 9.5.3, 9.6.4, , 15.2 Architect s Additional Services and Expenses 2.4.1, , , , , Architect s Administration of the Contract 3.1.3, 4.2, 3.7.4, 15.2, 9.4.1, 9.5 Architect s Approvals 2.4.1, 3.1.3, 3.5, , Architect s Authority to Reject Work 3.5, 4.2.6, , Architect s Copyright 1.1.7, 1.5 Architect s Decisions 3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, , , , , 6.3, 7.3.7, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, , 15.2, 15.3 Architect s Inspections 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, , 13.5 Architect s Instructions 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, Architect s Interpretations , Architect s Project Representative Architect s Relationship with Contractor 1.1.2, 1.5, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.9.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, , 10.3, , 12, , 13.5, 15.2 Architect s Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, Architect s Representations 9.4.2, 9.5.1, Architect s Site Visits 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, , 13.5 Asbestos Attorneys Fees , , Award of Separate Contracts 6.1.1, Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work 5.2 Basic Definitions 1.1 Bidding Requirements 1.1.1, 5.2.1, Binding Dispute Resolution 9.7, , , , , , , , Boiler and Machinery Insurance Bonds, Lien , , Bonds, Performance, and Payment , 9.6.7, , , 11.4 AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 3

15 Building Permit Capitalization 1.3 Certificate of Substantial Completion 9.8.3, 9.8.4, Certificates for Payment 4.2.1, 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, , , , , Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval Certificates of Insurance , Change Orders 1.1.1, 2.4.1, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, , , , 4.2.8, 5.2.3, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.2, 7.3.2, 7.3.6, 7.3.9, , 8.3.1, , , , , , , , Change Orders, Definition of CHANGES IN THE WORK 2.2.1, 3.11, 4.2.8, 7, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 7.4.1, 8.3.1, , Claims, Definition of CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 3.2.4, 6.1.1, 6.3, 7.3.9, 9.3.3, , , 15, 15.4 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims Claims for Additional Cost 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 6.1.1, 7.3.9, , Claims for Additional Time 3.2.4, , 8.3.2, , Concealed or Unknown Conditions, Claims for Claims for Damages 3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, , , , , , , Claims Subject to Arbitration , Cleaning Up 3.15, 6.3 Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to 2.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, , , 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 11.1, , , , Commencement of the Work, Definition of Communications Facilitating Contract Administration 3.9.1, Completion, Conditions Relating to 3.4.1, 3.11, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 8.2, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10, 12.2, 13.7, COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND 9 Completion, Substantial 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, , 12.2, 13.7 Compliance with Laws 1.6.1, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, , 3.13, 4.1.1, 9.6.4, , 11.1, 11.3, 13.1, 13.4, , , 13.6, , , , , Concealed or Unknown Conditions 3.7.4, 4.2.8, 8.3.1, 10.3 Conditions of the Contract 1.1.1, 6.1.1, Consent, Written 3.4.2, 3.7.4, , , 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, , , , 13.2, , Consolidation or Joinder CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 1.1.4, 6 Construction Change Directive, Definition of Construction Change Directives 1.1.1, 3.4.2, , 4.2.8, 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.3, Construction Schedules, Contractor s 3.10, , , 6.1.3, Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts 5.4, Continuing Contract Performance Contract, Definition of CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE , , 14 Contract Administration 3.1.3, 4, 9.4, 9.5 Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating to 3.7.1, 3.10, 5.2, 6.1, , , Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of 1.5.2, 2.2.5, 5.3 Contract Documents, Definition of Contract Sum 3.7.4, 3.8, 5.2.3, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 9.1, 9.4.2, , 9.6.7, 9.7, , , , , , Contract Sum, Definition of 9.1 Contract Time 3.7.4, 3.7.5, , 5.2.3, , 7.3.1, 7.3.5, 7.4, 8.1.1, 8.2.1, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, , , , , Contract Time, Definition of AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 4

16 CONTRACTOR 3 Contractor, Definition of 3.1, Contractor s Construction Schedules 3.10, , , 6.1.3, Contractor s Employees 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, , 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, , , 14.1, , Contractor s Liability Insurance 11.1 Contractor s Relationship with Separate Contractors and Owner s Forces , , 4.2.4, 6, , , Contractor s Relationship with Subcontractors 1.2.2, 3.3.2, , , 5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7, , , , Contractor s Relationship with the Architect 1.1.2, 1.5, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.3, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, , 10.3, , 12, 13.5, , Contractor s Representations 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.5, , 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, Contractor s Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3.3.2, 3.18, 5.3.1, 6.1.3, 6.2, 9.5.1, Contractor s Review of Contract Documents 3.2 Contractor s Right to Stop the Work 9.7 Contractor s Right to Terminate the Contract 14.1, Contractor s Submittals 3.10, 3.11, , 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, , , , Contractor s Superintendent 3.9, Contractor s Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, , 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.5, 7.3.7, 8.2, 10, 12, 14, Contractual Liability Insurance , 11.2 Coordination and Correlation 1.2, 3.2.1, 3.3.1, 3.10, , 6.1.3, Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications 1.5, 2.2.5, 3.11 Copyrights 1.5, 3.17 Correction of Work 2.3, 2.4, 3.7.3, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, , 12.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents 1.2 Cost, Definition of Costs 2.4.1, 3.2.4, 3.7.3, 3.8.2, , 5.4.2, 6.1.1, 6.2.3, , 7.3.7, 7.3.8, 7.3.9, , , , 11.3, , , , 13.5, 14 Cutting and Patching 3.14, Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractors , 6.2.4, , , 10.4, , 11.3, Damage to the Work , 9.9.1, , , , , Damages, Claims for 3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, , , , , , , Damages for Delay 6.1.1, 8.3.3, , 9.7, Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of Day, Definition of Decisions of the Architect 3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, , , , 15.2, 6.3, 7.3.7, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, , , , 15.1, 15.2 Decisions to Withhold Certification 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.7, Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance, Rejection and Correction of 2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.5, 9.5.1, 9.5.2, 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, , Definitions 1.1, 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.5, , , , 4.1.1, , 5.1, 6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.1, 9.1, Delays and Extensions of Time 3.2, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, , , , , Disputes 6.3, 7.3.9, 15.1, 15.2 Documents and Samples at the Site 3.11 Drawings, Definition of Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of 3.11 Effective Date of Insurance 8.2.2, Emergencies 10.4, , Employees, Contractor s 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, , 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, , , , 14.1, AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 5

17 Equipment, Labor, Materials or 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, , , 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, , , , , , Execution and Progress of the Work 1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 2.2.3, 2.2.5, 3.1, 3.3.1, 3.4.1, 3.5, 3.7.1, , 3.12, 3.14, 4.2, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.5, 8.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.2, 14.2, , Extensions of Time 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3, 7.4, 9.5.1, 9.7, , , 14.3, , Failure of Payment , 9.7, , 13.6, , Faulty Work (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Final Completion and Final Payment 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, , , , , , , Financial Arrangements, Owner s 2.2.1, , Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance GENERAL PROVISIONS 1 Governing Law 13.1 Guarantees (See Warranty) Hazardous Materials , 10.3 Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers Indemnification 3.17, 3.18, , , , , , Information and Services Required of the Owner 2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.2, , , 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, , , 11.2, 11.4, , , , , Initial Decision 15.2 Initial Decision Maker, Definition of Initial Decision Maker, Decisions , , , , , , Initial Decision Maker, Extent of Authority , , , , , , , Injury or Damage to Person or Property , Inspections 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, , , 13.5 Instructions to Bidders Instructions to the Contractor 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.8.1, 5.2.1, 7, 8.2.2, 12, Instruments of Service, Definition of Insurance , 6.1.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, , 11 Insurance, Boiler and Machinery Insurance, Contractor s Liability 11.1 Insurance, Effective Date of 8.2.2, Insurance, Loss of Use Insurance, Owner s Liability 11.2 Insurance, Property , 11.3 Insurance, Stored Materials INSURANCE AND BONDS 11 Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy Intent of the Contract Documents 1.2.1, 4.2.7, , , 7.4 Interest 13.6 Interpretation 1.2.3, 1.4, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, Interpretations, Written , , Judgment on Final Award Labor and Materials, Equipment 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, , 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, , , , , , Labor Disputes Laws and Regulations 1.5, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, , , 4.1.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, , , 11.3, , 13.4, , , , 14, , 15.4 Liens 2.1.2, 9.3.3, , , Limitations, Statutes of , 13.7, Limitations of Liability 2.3.1, 3.2.2, 3.5, , 3.17, , 4.2.6, 4.2.7, , 6.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, , , , 11.2, , , Limitations of Time 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, , , 4.2.7, 5.2, 5.3.1, 5.4.1, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, , , , , 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14, 15 Loss of Use Insurance AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 6

18 Material Suppliers 1.5, , 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 5.2.1, 9.3, 9.4.2, 9.6, Materials, Hazardous , 10.3 Materials, Labor, Equipment and 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 1.5.1, 3.4.1, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, , , 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, , , , , , Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Procedures of Construction 3.3.1, , 4.2.2, 4.2.7, Mechanic s Lien 2.1.2, Mediation 8.3.1, , , , , , 15.3, Minor Changes in the Work 1.1.1, , 4.2.8, 7.1, 7.4 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13 Modifications, Definition of Modifications to the Contract 1.1.1, 1.1.2, 3.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1, 9.7, , Mutual Responsibility 6.2 Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of 2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, , Notice 2.2.1, 2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.2, , 5.2.1, 9.7, 9.10, , , , 13.3, , , 14.1, 14.2, , Notice, Written 2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.3.1, 3.9.2, , , 5.2.1, 9.7, 9.10, , 10.3, , , , 13.3, 14, , Notice of Claims 3.7.4, , , 15.4 Notice of Testing and Inspections , Observations, Contractor s 3.2, Occupancy 2.2.2, 9.6.6, 9.8, Orders, Written 1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9.2, 7, 8.2.2, , 12.1, , , OWNER 2 Owner, Definition of Owner, Information and Services Required of the 2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.2, , 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, , , 11.2, 11.3, , , , , Owner s Authority 1.5, 2.1.1, 2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, , , 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.9, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1, 6.1, 6.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.5.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, , , , , , , , , 14.3, 14.4, Owner s Financial Capability 2.2.1, , Owner s Liability Insurance 11.2 Owner s Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.4, , Owner s Right to Carry Out the Work 2.4, Owner s Right to Clean Up 6.3 Owner s Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts 6.1 Owner s Right to Stop the Work 2.3 Owner s Right to Suspend the Work 14.3 Owner s Right to Terminate the Contract 14.2 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications and Other Instruments of Service 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.5, 2.2.5, 3.2.2, , 3.17, , Partial Occupancy or Use 9.6.6, 9.9, Patching, Cutting and 3.14, Patents 3.17 Payment, Applications for 4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.8.5, , , , Payment, Certificates for 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, , , 13.7, , Payment, Failure of , 9.7, , 13.6, , Payment, Final 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, , , , , 13.7, , Payment Bond, Performance Bond and , 9.6.7, , 11.4 Payments, Progress 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, , 13.6, , PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9 AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 7

19 Payments to Subcontractors 5.4.2, , 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, PCB Performance Bond and Payment Bond , 9.6.7, , 11.4 Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws 2.2.2, 3.7, 3.13, , PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF 10 Polychlorinated Biphenyl Product Data, Definition of Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings 3.11, 3.12, Progress and Completion 4.2.2, 8.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, , Progress Payments 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, , 13.6, , Project, Definition of Project Representatives Property Insurance , 11.3 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10 Regulations and Laws 1.5, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, , 3.13, 4.1.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, , 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, , , 13.6, 14, , 15.4 Rejection of Work 3.5, 4.2.6, Releases and Waivers of Liens Representations 3.2.1, 3.5, , 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, Representatives 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.9, 4.1.1, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, , 5.1.1, 5.1.2, Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3.3.2, 3.18, 4.2.3, 5.3.1, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5.1, 10 Retainage 9.3.1, 9.6.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, , Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor 3.2, , Review of Contractor s Submittals by Owner and Architect , , 3.11, 3.12, 4.2, 5.2, 6.1.3, 9.2, Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples by Contractor 3.12 Rights and Remedies 1.1.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.5, 3.7.4, , 4.2.6, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1, 6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, , 10.3, , , 13.4, 14, 15.4 Royalties, Patents and Copyrights 3.17 Rules and Notices for Arbitration Safety of Persons and Property 10.2, 10.4 Safety Precautions and Programs 3.3.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 5.3.1, 10.1, 10.2, 10.4 Samples, Definition of Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and 3.11, 3.12, Samples at the Site, Documents and 3.11 Schedule of Values 9.2, Schedules, Construction 3.10, , , 6.1.3, Separate Contracts and Contractors 1.1.4, , , 4.2.4, 4.2.7, 6, 8.3.1, Shop Drawings, Definition of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 3.11, 3.12, Site, Use of 3.13, 6.1.1, Site Inspections 3.2.2, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 3.7.4, 4.2, 9.4.2, , 13.5 Site Visits, Architect s 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, , 13.5 Special Inspections and Testing 4.2.6, , 13.5 Specifications, Definition of Specifications 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.2.2, 1.5, 3.11, , 3.17, Statute of Limitations 13.7, Stopping the Work 2.3, 9.7, 10.3, 14.1 Stored Materials 6.2.1, 9.3.2, , Subcontractor, Definition of SUBCONTRACTORS 5 Subcontractors, Work by 1.2.2, 3.3.2, , 4.2.3, 5.2.3, 5.3, 5.4, , Subcontractual Relations 5.3, 5.4, , 9.6, 9.10, , 14.1, AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 8

20 Submittals 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.7, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8, 9.9.1, , , Submittal Schedule , , Subrogation, Waivers of 6.1.1, Substantial Completion 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, , 12.2, 13.7 Substantial Completion, Definition of Substitution of Subcontractors 5.2.3, Substitution of Architect Substitutions of Materials 3.4.2, 3.5, Sub-subcontractor, Definition of Subsurface Conditions Successors and Assigns 13.2 Superintendent 3.9, Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, , 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.7, 8.2, 8.3.1, 9.4.2, 10, 12, 14, Surety , 9.8.5, , , , Surety, Consent of , Surveys Suspension by the Owner for Convenience 14.3 Suspension of the Work 5.4.2, 14.3 Suspension or Termination of the Contract , 14 Taxes 3.6, , Termination by the Contractor 14.1, Termination by the Owner for Cause , 14.2, Termination by the Owner for Convenience 14.4 Termination of the Architect Termination of the Contractor TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14 Tests and Inspections 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, , , , , 13.5 TIME 8 Time, Delays and Extensions of 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, , , , , Time Limits 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, , , 4.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, , 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14, , 15.4 Time Limits on Claims 3.7.4, , 13.7, Title to Work 9.3.2, Transmission of Data in Digital Form 1.6 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12 Uncovering of Work 12.1 Unforeseen Conditions, Concealed or Unknown 3.7.4, 8.3.1, 10.3 Unit Prices , Use of Documents 1.1.1, 1.5, 2.2.5, , 5.3 Use of Site 3.13, 6.1.1, Values, Schedule of 9.2, Waiver of Claims by the Architect Waiver of Claims by the Contractor , , Waiver of Claims by the Owner 9.9.3, , , , , , Waiver of Consequential Damages , Waiver of Liens , Waivers of Subrogation 6.1.1, Warranty 3.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, , , 13.7 Weather Delays Work, Definition of Written Consent 1.5.2, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, , , 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, , , , 13.2, , Written Interpretations , AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 9

21 Written Notice 2.3, 2.4, 3.3.1, 3.9, , , 5.2.1, 8.2.2, 9.7, 9.10, , 10.3, , , , 13.3, 14, Written Orders 1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9, 7, 8.2.2, 12.1, 12.2, , , AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 10

22 ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents are enumerated in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement) and consist of the Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals, the Contractor s bid or proposal, or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Contractor and the Architect or the Architect s consultants, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or a Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and the Architect or the Architect s consultants or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect s duties THE WORK The term Work means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project THE PROJECT The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner and by separate contractors THE DRAWINGS The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams THE SPECIFICATIONS The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE Instruments of Service are representations, in any medium of expression now known or later developed, of the tangible and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect s consultants under their respective professional services agreements. Instruments of Service may include, without limitation, studies, surveys, models, sketches, drawings, specifications, and other similar materials INITIAL DECISION MAKER The Initial Decision Maker is the person identified in the Agreement to render initial decisions on Claims in accordance with Section 15.2 and certify termination of the Agreement under Section CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 11

23 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words that have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. 1.3 CAPITALIZATION Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those that are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of numbered articles or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. 1.4 INTERPRETATION In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as all and any and articles such as the and an, but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. 1.5 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE The Architect and the Architect s consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective Instruments of Service, including the Drawings and Specifications, and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, including copyrights. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and material or equipment suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect s or Architect s consultants reserved rights The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to them solely and exclusively for execution of the Work. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice, if any, shown on the Instruments of Service. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and material or equipment suppliers may not use the Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect and the Architect s consultants. 1.6 TRANSMISSION OF DATA IN DIGITAL FORM If the parties intend to transmit Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form, they shall endeavor to establish necessary protocols governing such transmissions, unless otherwise already provided in the Agreement or the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 2 OWNER 2.1 GENERAL The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner s approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term Owner means the Owner or the Owner s authorized representative The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a written request, information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or enforce mechanic s lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site, and the Owner s interest therein. 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER Prior to commencement of the Work, the Contractor may request in writing that the Owner provide reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner s obligations under the Contract. Thereafter, the Contractor may only request such evidence if (1) the Owner fails to make payments to the Contractor as the Contract Documents require; (2) a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum; or (3) the Contractor identifies in writing a reasonable concern regarding the Owner s ability to make payment when due. The Owner shall furnish such evidence as a condition precedent to commencement or continuation of the Work or AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 12

24 the portion of the Work affected by a material change. After the Owner furnishes the evidence, the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, including those required under Section 3.7.1, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work The Owner shall furnish information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness. The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under the Owner s control and relevant to the Contractor s performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after receiving the Contractor s written request for such information or services Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor one copy of the Contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section OWNER S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK If the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Section 12.2 or repeatedly fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Section OWNER S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a ten-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including Owner s expenses and compensation for the Architect s additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR 3.1 GENERAL The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Contractor shall be lawfully licensed, if required in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this Contract. The term Contractor means the Contractor or the Contractor s authorized representative The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect s administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons or entities other than the Contractor. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 13

25 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents Because the Contract Documents are complementary, the Contractor shall, before starting each portion of the Work, carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.2.3, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work, and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. It is recognized that the Contractor s review is made in the Contractor s capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, but the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions the Architect issues in response to the Contractor s notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Article 15. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Sections or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. If the Contractor performs those obligations, the Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents, for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents, or for nonconformities of the Contract Documents to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities. 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor s best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for, and have control over, construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and, except as stated below, shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Owner and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from the Architect. If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor, the Owner shall be solely responsible for any loss or damage arising solely from those Owner-required means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor s employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for, or on behalf of, the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 14

26 facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work Except in the case of minor changes in the Work authorized by the Architect in accordance with Sections or 7.4, the Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order or Construction Change Directive The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor s employees and other persons carrying out the Work. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly skilled in tasks assigned to them. 3.5 WARRANTY The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise. The Contractor further warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects, except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit. Work, materials, or equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. The Contractor s warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. 3.6 TAXES The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. 3.7 PERMITS, FEES, NOTICES AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit as well as for other permits, fees, licenses, and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and legally required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, that differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor s cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the reasons. If either party disputes the Architect s determination or recommendation, that party may proceed as provided in Article If, in the course of the Work, the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial markers, archaeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receipt of such notice, the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 15

27 the operations. The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article ALLOWANCES The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,.1 Allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts;.2 Contractor s costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances; and.3 Whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Section and (2) changes in Contractor s costs under Section Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner with reasonable promptness. 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor The Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the name and qualifications of a proposed superintendent. The Architect may reply within 14 days to the Contractor in writing stating (1) whether the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to the proposed superintendent or (2) that the Architect requires additional time to review. Failure of the Architect to reply within the 14 day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection The Contractor shall not employ a proposed superintendent to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not change the superintendent without the Owner s consent, which shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed CONTRACTOR S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner s and Architect s information a Contractor s construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work The Contractor shall prepare a submittal schedule, promptly after being awarded the Contract and thereafter as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule, and shall submit the schedule(s) for the Architect s approval. The Architect s approval shall not unreasonably be delayed or withheld. The submittal schedule shall (1) be coordinated with the Contractor s construction schedule, and (2) allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. If the Contractor fails to submit a submittal schedule, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time based on the time required for review of submittals The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 16

28 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made during construction, and one copy of approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. Their purpose is to demonstrate the way by which the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for those portions of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittals. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals that are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents to the Owner and Architect that the Contractor has (1) reviewed and approved them, (2) determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so and (3) checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect s approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Architect s approval thereof The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such written notice, the Architect s approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services that constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. The Contractor shall not be AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 17

29 required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional s written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications and approvals performed or provided by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Section , the Architect will review, approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance and design criteria specified in the Contract Documents USE OF SITE The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment CUTTING AND PATCHING The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. All areas requiring cutting, fitting and patching shall be restored to the condition existing prior to the cutting, fitting and patching, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor; such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor s consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work CLEANING UP The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor s tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials from and about the Project If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and Owner shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor ACCESS TO WORK The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 18

30 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION To the fullest extent permitted by law the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Section shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT 4.1 GENERAL The Owner shall retain an architect lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. That person or entity is identified as the Architect in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld If the employment of the Architect is terminated, the Owner shall employ a successor architect as to whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the Architect. 4.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be an Owner s representative during construction until the date the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction, or as otherwise agreed with the Owner, to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and to determine in general if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will not have control over, charge of, or responsibility for, the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor s rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents, except as provided in Section On the basis of the site visits, the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and report to the Owner (1) known deviations from the Contract Documents and from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and (2) defects and deficiencies observed in the Work. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 19

31 4.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS FACILITATING CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate with each other through the Architect about matters arising out of or relating to the Contract. Communications by and with the Architect s consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner Based on the Architect s evaluations of the Contractor s Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts The Architect has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Sections and , whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work The Architect will review and approve, or take other appropriate action upon, the Contractor s submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect s action will be taken in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Architect s professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect s review of the Contractor s submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3, 3.5 and The Architect s review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect s approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4. The Architect will investigate and make determinations and recommendations regarding concealed and unknown conditions as provided in Section The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion; issue Certificates of Substantial Completion pursuant to Section 9.8; receive and forward to the Owner, for the Owner s review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor pursuant to Section 9.10; and issue a final Certificate for Payment pursuant to Section If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect s responsibilities at the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of, and reasonably inferable from, the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith The Architect s decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 20

32 The Architect will review and respond to requests for information about the Contract Documents. The Architect s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If appropriate, the Architect will prepare and issue supplemental Drawings and Specifications in response to the requests for information. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1 DEFINITIONS A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term Subcontractor is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term Subcontractor does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term Sub-subcontractor is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subsubcontractor. 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal portion of the Work. The Architect may reply within 14 days to the Contractor in writing stating (1) whether the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity or (2) that the Architect requires additional time for review. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply within the 14 day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor s Work. However, no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required The Contractor shall not substitute a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitution. 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor s Work, which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement that may AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 21

33 be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors. 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner, provided that.1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements that the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor in writing; and.2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contract. When the Owner accepts the assignment of a subcontract agreement, the Owner assumes the Contractor s rights and obligations under the subcontract Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor s compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension Upon such assignment to the Owner under this Section 5.4, the Owner may further assign the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity. If the Owner assigns the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity, the Owner shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all of the successor contractor s obligations under the subcontract. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 OWNER S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner s own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided in Article When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, the term Contractor in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner s own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules. The Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner s own forces, the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights that apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor s construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents If part of the Contractor s Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 22

34 the Owner s or separate contractor s completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor s Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs the Owner incurs that are payable to a separate contractor because of the Contractor s delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs the Contractor incurs because of a separate contractor s delays, improperly timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Section The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Section OWNER S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1 GENERAL Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and Architect; a Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor; an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contractor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work. 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor and Architect stating their agreement upon all of the following:.1 The change in the Work;.2 The amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum; and.3 The extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time. 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods:.1 Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation;.2 Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;.3 Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 23

35 .4 As provided in Section If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive so that application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor s agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor s agreement therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the Architect shall determine the method and the adjustment on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, an amount for overhead and profit as set forth in the Agreement, or if no such amount is set forth in the Agreement, a reasonable amount. In such case, and also under Section , the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Section shall be limited to the following:.1 Costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, and workers compensation insurance;.2 Costs of materials, supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed;.3 Rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or others;.4 Costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related to the Work; and.5 Additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change that results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, the Contractor may request payment for Work completed under the Construction Change Directive in Applications for Payment. The Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs and certify for payment the amount that the Architect determines, in the Architect s professional judgment, to be reasonably justified. The Architect s interim determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order, subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a Claim in accordance with Article When the Owner and Contractor agree with a determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and the Architect will prepare a Change Order. Change Orders may be issued for all or any part of a Construction Change Directive. 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK The Architect has authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes will be effected by written order signed by the Architect and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 24

36 ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.1 DEFINITIONS Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section The term day as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner. The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner; or by changes ordered in the Work; or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor s control; or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration; or by other causes that the Architect determines may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Article This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.1 CONTRACT SUM The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Where the Contract is based on a stipulated sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect, before the first Application for Payment, a schedule of values allocating the entire Contract Sum to the various portions of the Work and prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor s Applications for Payment. 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment prepared in accordance with the schedule of values, if required under Section 9.2, for completed portions of the Work. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor s right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and shall reflect retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 25

37 As provided in Section 7.3.9, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work that have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by interim determinations of the Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or material supplier, unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner s title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner s interest, and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor s knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work. 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor s Application for Payment, either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect s reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Section The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect s evaluation of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that, to the best of the Architect s knowledge, information and belief, the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor s right to payment, or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect s opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect s opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2, because of.1 defective Work not remedied;.2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor; AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 26

38 .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment;.4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;.5 damage to the Owner or a separate contractor;.6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or.7 repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld If the Architect withholds certification for payment under Section , the Owner may, at its sole option, issue joint checks to the Contractor and to any Subcontractor or material or equipment suppliers to whom the Contractor failed to make payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment suitably delivered. If the Owner makes payments by joint check, the Owner shall notify the Architect and the Architect will reflect such payment on the next Certificate for Payment. 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor no later than seven days after receipt of payment from the Owner the amount to which the Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of the Subcontractor s portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractor that the Contractor has properly paid Subcontractors and material and equipment suppliers amounts paid by the Owner to the Contractor for subcontracted Work. If the Contractor fails to furnish such evidence within seven days, the Owner shall have the right to contact Subcontractors to ascertain whether they have been properly paid. Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor, except as may otherwise be required by law Contractor payments to material and equipment suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2, and A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor, shall create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust or shall entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision. 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor s Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by binding dispute resolution, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days written notice to the Owner and Architect, AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 27

39 stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor s reasonable costs of shutdown, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents. 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents Upon receipt of the Contractor s list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect s inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor s list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. Upon such acceptance and consent of surety, if any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer as required under Section and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Project. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT Upon receipt of the Contractor s written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 28

40 Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect s knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect s on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect s final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section as precedent to the Contractor s being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner s property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to the Owner, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment and (5), if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys fees If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from.1 liens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled;.2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or.3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to.1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby;.2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor s Subcontractors or Subsubcontractors; and.3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 29

41 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Sections and caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections and , except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor s obligations under Section The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor s organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor s superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect The Contractor shall not permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to cause damage or create an unsafe condition INJURY OR DAMAGE TO PERSON OR PROPERTY If either party suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter HAZARDOUS MATERIALS The Contractor is responsible for compliance with any requirements included in the Contract Documents regarding hazardous materials. If the Contractor encounters a hazardous material or substance not addressed in the Contract Documents and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing Upon receipt of the Contractor s written notice, the Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance is found to be present, to cause it to be rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance. The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. By Change Order, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the Contractor s reasonable additional costs of shut-down, delay and start-up. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 30

42 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors, Architect, Architect s consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Section and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), except to the extent that such damage, loss or expense is due to the fault or negligence of the party seeking indemnity The Owner shall not be responsible under this Section 10.3 for materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site unless such materials or substances are required by the Contract Documents. The Owner shall be responsible for materials or substances required by the Contract Documents, except to the extent of the Contractor s fault or negligence in the use and handling of such materials or substances The Contractor shall indemnify the Owner for the cost and expense the Owner incurs (1) for remediation of a material or substance the Contractor brings to the site and negligently handles, or (2) where the Contractor fails to perform its obligations under Section , except to the extent that the cost and expense are due to the Owner s fault or negligence If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable by a government agency for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred EMERGENCIES In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor s discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Article 15 and Article 7. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 CONTRACTOR S LIABILITY INSURANCE The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor s operations and completed operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:.1 Claims under workers compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts that are applicable to the Work to be performed;.2 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of the Contractor s employees;.3 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than the Contractor s employees;.4 Claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage;.5 Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom;.6 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising out of ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle;.7 Claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations; and.8 Claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor s obligations under Section The insurance required by Section shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or claims-made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from the date of commencement of the Work until the date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment, and, with respect to the Contractor s completed operations coverage, until the expiration of the period for correction AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 31

43 of Work or for such other period for maintenance of completed operations coverage as specified in the Contract Documents Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of each required policy of insurance. These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Section 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to the Owner. An additional certificate evidencing continuation of liability coverage, including coverage for completed operations, shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Section and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of such coverage until the expiration of the time required by Section Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness The Contractor shall cause the commercial liability coverage required by the Contract Documents to include (1) the Owner, the Architect and the Architect s consultants as additional insureds for claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor s negligent acts or omissions during the Contractor s operations; and (2) the Owner as an additional insured for claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor s negligent acts or omissions during the Contractor s completed operations OWNER S LIABILITY INSURANCE The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner s usual liability insurance PROPERTY INSURANCE Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder s risk all-risk or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract Modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others, comprising total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made as provided in Section 9.10 or until substantial completion. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Subsubcontractors in the Project Property insurance shall be on an all-risk or equivalent policy form and shall include, without limitation, insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, falsework, testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect s and Contractor s services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss If the property insurance requires deductibles, the Contractor shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site, and also portions of the Work in transit Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Section 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation, lapse or reduction of insurance LOSS OF USE INSURANCE The Owner, at the Owner s option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner s property due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner waives all rights of action AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) Deleted: Owner Deleted: no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 11.3 to be covered, whichever is later Deleted: If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of the coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance that will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors and Subsubcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Contractor in writing, then the Owner shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. Deleted: Owner Deleted: BOILER AND MACHINERY INSURANCE The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law, which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by the Owner; this insurance shall include interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds. 32

44 against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner s property, including consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused If the Owner requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other special causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy, the Contractor shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner by appropriate Change Order If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period, the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Section for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance. All separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Contractor shall file with the Owner a copy of each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Section Each policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire, and that its limits will not be reduced, until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to the Owner. Deleted: Contractor Deleted: Owner Deleted: Contractor Deleted: Owner Deleted: Contractor Deleted: Contractor WAIVERS OF SUBROGATION The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, subsubcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect s consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Section 11.3 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, Architect s consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontractors, subsubcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged A loss insured under the Owner s property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Owner s duties. The cost of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary. The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received, which the Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or as determined in accordance with the method of binding dispute resolution selected in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. If after such loss no other special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for convenience, replacement of damaged property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change in the Work in accordance with Article The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner s exercise of this power; if such objection is made, the dispute shall be resolved in the manner selected by the Owner and Contractor as the method of binding dispute resolution in the Agreement. If the Owner and Contractor have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Owner as fiduciary shall make settlement with insurers or, in the case of a dispute over distribution of insurance proceeds, in accordance with the directions of the arbitrators. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 33

45 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall authorize a copy to be furnished. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect s request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if requested in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect s examination and be replaced at the Contractor s expense without change in the Contract Time If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be at the Owner s expense. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, such costs and the cost of correction shall be at the Contractor s expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections, the cost of uncovering and replacement, and compensation for the Architect s services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor s expense AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION In addition to the Contractor s obligations under Section 3.5, if, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 9.9.1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual completion of that portion of the Work The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Section The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor s correction or removal of Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 34

46 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations the Contractor has under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for correction of Work as described in Section relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor s liability with respect to the Contractor s obligations other than specifically to correct the Work ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK If the Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.1 GOVERNING LAW The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located except that, if the parties have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Federal Arbitration Act shall govern Section SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Section , neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to a lender providing construction financing for the Project, if the lender assumes the Owner s rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual, to a member of the firm or entity, or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended; or if delivered at, or sent by registered or certified mail or by courier service providing proof of delivery to, the last business address known to the party giving notice RIGHTS AND REMEDIES Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach there under, except as may be specifically agreed in writing TESTS AND INSPECTIONS Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract Documents and by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of (1) tests, inspections or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded, and (2) tests, inspections or approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations prohibit the Owner from delegating their cost to the Contractor If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Section , the Architect will, upon written AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 35

47 authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such costs, except as provided in Section , shall be at the Owner s expense If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Sections and reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect s services and expenses shall be at the Contractor s expense Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work INTEREST Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located TIME LIMITS ON CLAIMS The Owner and Contractor shall commence all claims and causes of action, whether in contract, tort, breach of warranty or otherwise, against the other arising out of or related to the Contract in accordance with the requirements of the final dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement within the time period specified by applicable law, but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work. The Owner and Contractor waive all claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, for any of the following reasons:.1 Issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction that requires all Work to be stopped;.2 An act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency that requires all Work to be stopped;.3 Because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents; or.4 The Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Contractor s request, reasonable evidence as required by Section The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Section 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365-day period, whichever is less If one of the reasons described in Section or exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days written notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed, including reasonable overhead and profit, costs incurred by reason of such termination, and damages. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 36

48 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the Owner has repeatedly failed to fulfill the Owner s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Section TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor.1 repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials;.2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors;.3 repeatedly disregards applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of a public authority; or.4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner, upon certification by the Initial Decision Maker that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor s surety, if any, seven days written notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety:.1 Exclude the Contractor from the site and take possession of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor;.2 Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4; and.3 Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon written request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section , the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect s services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension, delay or interruption as described in Section Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent.1 that performance is, was or would have been so suspended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or.2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner s convenience and without cause Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner s convenience, the Contractor shall.1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice;.2 take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work; and AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 37

49 .3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders In case of such termination for the Owner s convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment for Work executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination, along with reasonable overhead and profit on the Work not executed. ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 15.1 CLAIMS DEFINITION A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, payment of money, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term Claim also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim NOTICE OF CLAIMS Claims by either the Owner or Contractor must be initiated by written notice to the other party and to the Initial Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker. Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later CONTINUING CONTRACT PERFORMANCE Pending final resolution of a Claim, except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Article 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect will prepare Change Orders and issue Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decisions of the Initial Decision Maker CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL TIME If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as provided herein shall be given. The Contractor s Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay, only one Claim is necessary If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction CLAIMS FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes.1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and.2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work. This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party s termination in accordance with Article 14. Nothing contained in this Section shall be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 38

50 15.2 INITIAL DECISION Claims, excluding those arising under Sections 10.3, 10.4, , and , shall be referred to the Initial Decision Maker for initial decision. The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker, unless otherwise indicated in the Agreement. Except for those Claims excluded by this Section , an initial decision shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation of any Claim arising prior to the date final payment is due, unless 30 days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Initial Decision Maker with no decision having been rendered. Unless the Initial Decision Maker and all affected parties agree, the Initial Decision Maker will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner The Initial Decision Maker will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of a Claim take one or more of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise, or (5) advise the parties that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim if the Initial Decision Maker lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Initial Decision Maker concludes that, in the Initial Decision Maker s sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Initial Decision Maker to resolve the Claim In evaluating Claims, the Initial Decision Maker may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Initial Decision Maker in rendering a decision. The Initial Decision Maker may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner s expense If the Initial Decision Maker requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of such request, and shall either (1) provide a response on the requested supporting data, (2) advise the Initial Decision Maker when the response or supporting data will be furnished or (3) advise the Initial Decision Maker that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the Initial Decision Maker will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the Claim, or indicating that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim. This initial decision shall (1) be in writing; (2) state the reasons therefor; and (3) notify the parties and the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker, of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The initial decision shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and, if the parties fail to resolve their dispute through mediation, to binding dispute resolution Either party may file for mediation of an initial decision at any time, subject to the terms of Section Either party may, within 30 days from the date of an initial decision, demand in writing that the other party file for mediation within 60 days of the initial decision. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for mediation within the time required, then both parties waive their rights to mediate or pursue binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision In the event of a Claim against the Contractor, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor s default, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety s assistance in resolving the controversy If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic s lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines MEDIATION Claims, disputes, or other matters in controversy arising out of or related to the Contract except those waived as provided for in Sections , , and shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to binding dispute resolution The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 39

51 Industry Mediation Procedures in effect on the date of the Agreement. A request for mediation shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the mediation. The request may be made concurrently with the filing of binding dispute resolution proceedings but, in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of binding dispute resolution proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. If an arbitration is stayed pursuant to this Section , the parties may nonetheless proceed to the selection of the arbitrator(s) and agree upon a schedule for later proceedings The parties shall share the mediator s fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof ARBITRATION If the parties have selected arbitration as the method for binding dispute resolution in the Agreement, any Claim subject to, but not resolved by, mediation shall be subject to arbitration which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Arbitration Rules in effect on the date of the Agreement. A demand for arbitration shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the arbitration. The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded A demand for arbitration shall be made no earlier than concurrently with the filing of a request for mediation, but in no event shall it be made after the date when the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. For statute of limitations purposes, receipt of a written demand for arbitration by the person or entity administering the arbitration shall constitute the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof CONSOLIDATION OR JOINDER Either party, at its sole discretion, may consolidate an arbitration conducted under this Agreement with any other arbitration to which it is a party provided that (1) the arbitration agreement governing the other arbitration permits consolidation, (2) the arbitrations to be consolidated substantially involve common questions of law or fact, and (3) the arbitrations employ materially similar procedural rules and methods for selecting arbitrator(s) Either party, at its sole discretion, may include by joinder persons or entities substantially involved in a common question of law or fact whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration, provided that the party sought to be joined consents in writing to such joinder. Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of any claim, dispute or other matter in question not described in the written consent The Owner and Contractor grant to any person or entity made a party to an arbitration conducted under this Section 15.4, whether by joinder or consolidation, the same rights of joinder and consolidation as the Owner and Contractor under this Agreement. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:34:47 on 04/25/2011 under Order No _1 which expires on 08/31/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 40

52 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION SUMMARY A. Contractor shall provide all materials, labor and systems required to produce the completed Work as indicated by the Contract Documents, ready for occupancy by the date stipulated. B. Project Identification: Birks Residence at Birch Cove, on Braeloch East Road, in Colchester, VT. C. Project Summary: New 10,000+ square foot residence on Mallets Bay with existing shared private road access. New construction to replace an existing 18 year-old residence in approximately the same footprint but slightly rotated and lengthened. 1. Project in general includes removing existing house, and constructing a new home with: foundation drainage system; geothermal heating system; slate, standing seam metal & single-ply membrane roofing; cedar siding, trim & decking; stone veneer & CMU exterior cavity walls; foamed-in-place insulation; double & triple pane Low-E glazed aluminum clad wood windows & doors; solid wood doors, casework, paneling, ceilings and flooring; acoustic panels; resilient flooring; stone & ceramic tile flooring; GWB walls & ceilings; stone fireplace with accessories, elevator; roller shades; countertops; mirrors, and more as indicated by the drawings and specifications. D. Particular Project Requirements: 1. Existing site conditions and restrictions: a. On-site storage and parking restrictions b. Lake front environmental requirements of authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ) 2. Prior or concurrent work by Owner or others: Landscape and stone wall removal. 3. Prior hazardous waste or asbestos work by Owner or others: None. 4. Pre-purchased and pre-ordered items: Tile and stone as noted. 5. Owner-purchased, Owner-installed items: a. Gym equipment 6. Owner-purchased, Contractor-installed items: a. Toilet accessories. See SECTION b. Custom fabricated metal firebox enclosure. See SECTION c. Plumbing fixtures as noted d. Neon sign for kitchen 7. Millwork Suppliers / Fabricators: a. Owner will review and select from Contractor solicited bids for architectural woodwork / millwork. 8. Occupancy of adjacent facilities: a. Owner will occupy upper level of existing separate garage outbuilding to remain. 9. Contractor's use of new and existing facilities: a. Contractor may use the lower level of existing garage to remain. b. Adjacent property site is available for temporary storage and parking areas as indicated on the Drawings. 10. Scope of separate Owner contracts: a. Independent Testing Agency 1). Fill and sub-base compaction testing 2). Concrete slump and cylinder testing b. Commissioning Agent CxA 1). Whole Building Energy Management System and all related systems GENERAL REQUIREMENTS APR 2011

53 11. Integrated Project Delivery (IPD) Process: a. The Owner and the Architect including all consultants desire to develop the most optimized method of constructing this project with the GC, his subcontractors and major suppliers. b. Collaboration is a fundamental characteristic of IPD. Stakeholders and participants are integrated into one effort with a common goal, and are encouraged to focus on a streamlined and successful outcome to the project instead of individual goals. c. IPD Team principal Stakeholders include the: 1). Owner 2). General Contractor (GC) 3). Architect d. IPG Participants include the: 1). Architect Consultants 2). Owner s Commissioning Agent - CxA 3). Major subcontractors 4). Major suppliers e. Success is contingent on the following principles: 1). Mutual respect and trust, and a commitment to work as a team. a). GC s list of proposed subcontractors and suppliers shall be submitted to the Owner and Architect for approval. 2). Mutual benefit and reward, and because of early involvement, compensation based on the value added and what s best for the project. a). Reduced conflict typically means reduced construction time and the subsequent monetary value attributable to finishing early. 3). A free exchange of ideas and decisions, and innovations, which are then judged on their merits by the team. 4). Influx of knowledge and expertise in the early formative stages of the project to capitalize on informed decisions. 5). Project goals that are developed early and agreed upon by the team. 6). Recognition that intensified planning results in efficiency and savings during execution. 7). Reliance on cutting edge technologies to maximize functionality, generality, and interoperability. 8). Team structure and leadership that is appropriate for the project and that makes a commitment to the team s goals and values. f. The Owner, the Architect and his consultants, and the GC will endeavor to follow the IPD principals to construct this project. E. Construction Time: 1. GC to begin mobilization: September 12, Final Completion: April 4, 2013 F. Project Construction Team: 1. OWNER: a. Mr. and Mrs. Birks Montreal, Quebec, Canada 2. ARCHITECT: a. Brad Rabinowitz, Architect 200 Main Street Burlington, VT Attn: Brad Rabinowitz, AIA Phone: (802) Office@bradrabinowitzarchitect.com Web: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS APR 2011

54 3. CIVIL ENGINEER: a. Krebs & Lansing Consulting Engineers 164 Main Street Colchester, VT Phone: (802) Website: 4. STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: a. Servidio Engineering 135 College Street Burlington, VT Attn: Richard Servidio, PE Phone: (802) Website: 5. MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL - PLUMBING ENGINEER: a. LN Consulting Inc. 69 Union Street Winooski, VT Attn: Wayne Nelson, PE Phone: (802) G. Sustainable Design Requirements: 1. Wood and wood products shall be FSC or Forest Stewardship Council Certified. 2. Products containing VOCs shall be submitted to the Architect for approval prior to use on the project. a. GC shall provide a list of acceptable no- or low-voc and non-toxic alternative products. b. VOC Information: 3. Products containing HAP (hazardous air pollutants), as defined by the U.S. Clean Air Act (CAA) Section 112, and EPA NESHAP regulations, shall be submitted to the Architect for approval prior to use on the project. a. CAA Section 112: b. EPA NESHAP: 12/a18824a.htm c. If approval is given GC shall take all necessary precautions to store, handle, apply, and protect the applicator, passersby, and future inhabitants from exposure and harm. 4. Metals, Metal Plating, and Metallic Project Requirement: a. Lead-free b. Hexavalent chromium-free c. Arsenic-free 5. Contiguous Insulation and Air-Sealed Envelope: Provide continuous insulation and airsealed construction with a maximum 0.1 cfm of building shell at atmospheres (50 Pascal) as adjusted for temperature ( T) leakage as verified by Blower Door Testing, and Infrared Scope & Analysis. a. Air barrier system in all parts of the building envelope is to be designed to support maximum wind loads of 30 year frequency. b. Testing shall occur after building is roughed-in or installed with each item that will penetrate the building envelope (e.g., plumbing, electrical, HVAC, ventilation, combustion appliances, etc.) and the installed air barrier and insulation system, prior to gypsum installation. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS APR 2011

55 c. Test Conditions: Testing shall not commence until the outside wind speed is expected to be below 15 mph for the duration of the test. d. Visual Inspection: Visually inspect snow, frost and dew patterns on roof. e. Blower Door Test: Perform and test to requirements in accordance with ASTM E779 or CGSB Standard ). Enhanced Fog: Locate, using fog wands, and seal air leaks located. 2). Temporarily disable smoke alarms during test. f. Infrared Scope & Analysis: Scan the house exterior walls and roof with a thermography infrared camera to determine air leakage and retained moisture in the exterior envelope. 1). Note: Use only when the temperature difference between the building interior and the outside air is greater than 30 deg F. 2). Apply additional materials to seal identified air leakage, and retest. g. Safety of Combustion Appliances: Verify in accordance with ASTM E1998, Section H of ANSI Z223.1 / NFPA 54, or CGSB Exception: Sealed combustion appliances do not need to be tested. h. Passive Radon Control: Test in accordance to one of the following applicable codes or standards: NFPA 5000, Chapter 49; IRC, Appendix F; CABO, Appendix F; or ASTM E1465. i. Test Results: If testing does not meet requirements investigate and determine locations of leakage, perform corrective actions to properly seal leakage, and re-test until requirements are met. j. Commissioning: Coordinate and provide necessary assistance with CxA and A/E. 1.2 CONTRACT FORMS A. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. Contracts for this Project include the following: 1. Owner Contractor Agreement: AIA A , Stipulated Sum 2. Bid Bond: None 3. Material and Payment Bond: None 4. General Conditions: AIA A , for Construction 5. Supplementary General Conditions: Project specific requirements 1.3 WORK PHASES A. One Document Issue 1. Demolition 2. Site & Site Utility Work 3. Foundation and Building Shell Enclosure 4. Interior Fit-Up 5. Whole Building Commissioning 6. Landscaping 1.4 USE OF PREMISES A. General: General Contractor and his subcontractors shall have near full use of site for construction operations, including use of Project site, during construction period. Use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to occupy existing buildings, perform work, or to retain other contractors on portions of Project as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Exception: Upper level of the existing garage to remain is for the Owner s use only. B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Limits: Confine constructions operations to areas on the Drawings that indicate where Work is permitted. Do not exceed indicated construction limits. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS APR 2011

56 a. Locate temporary construction parking as indicated. 2. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize: C. Work Restrictions: 1. Work Hours: 7:00 am to 6:00 pm, Monday through Friday; No Work on Holidays a. Note: Work on Saturdays permitted with prior approval by Architect. 2. Blasting: In accordance with AHJ 3. Mallets Bay: Protect from construction run-off 4. Braeloch East Road: Keep in good repair daily from construction operations. 1.5 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 49 Division format using the CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat 2004" numbering system. 1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help crossreferencing in the Contract Documents. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents. 2. Division 01: This Section in governs the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 1.6 DEFINITIONS A. AHJ: means authorities having jurisdiction from local, state and federal regulatory agencies. B. Approved: Except where specifically stated otherwise, the words "approved", "directed", "requested", "selected", "accepted" mean "approved by the Architect", "directed by the Architect" and so on. The words "approved" and "accepted" shall be held to the limitations stated in the General and Supplementary Conditions. In no case shall "approval" or "acceptance" by the Architect be interpreted as a release of Contractor of his responsibilities to fulfill all of the requirements of the Contract Documents. C. CoC. Chain-of-Custody, typically used to follow each handler of sustainably managed and harvested wood following FSC-STD requirements from forest to the project site. D. : (colon). In accordance with; Per; "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with" E. Day: Except as otherwise defined in Owner-Contractor Agreement, day means calendar day. F. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, furnish means supply, including shop fabrication if applicable, and delivery to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation and the like as applicable in each instance. G. Indicated: is a reference to other portions of the Contract Documents. H. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, install means operations at project site including, but not limited to, unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, connecting to services, placing in service and similar operations as applicable in each instance. I. Installer: The person or firm engaged by Contractor or Subcontractor for performance of a GENERAL REQUIREMENTS APR 2011

57 specific unit of installation work at the project site. It is a general requirement that Installers be expert and experienced in the work they are engaged to perform. J. Observe, Observation: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the Architect's observation of the work will be held to the limitations stated in the General and Supplementary Conditions and the Owner/Architect Agreement. In no case shall observation by the Architect be interpreted as a release of Contractor of his responsibilities to fulfill all of the requirements of the Contract Documents. Observe shall be defined in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract to include only visiting the site periodically, observing the condition and progress of the work, and reporting to the Owner. K. Per. In accordance with L. Provide: means furnish and install, complete with all necessary components and accessories, ready for intended use. 1.7 INDUSTRY REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Referenced standards are part of the Contract Documents and have the same force and effect as if bound with these specifications. B. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, comply with the current standard referenced in effect as of the date of the Owner/Contractor Agreement. C. Obtain copies of industry standards directly from publisher. D. The titles of industry standard organizations are commonly abbreviated; full titles may be found in Encyclopedia of Associations. 1.8 CODES, REGULATIONS, AUTHORITIES A. Comply with all applicable codes, ordinances, regulations and requirements of each AHJ. B. Submit copies of all permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, notices, judgments, and communications from AHJ. 1.9 ALLOWANCES A. Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order UNIT PRICES A. Unit Prices are to include each related cost including but not limited to overhead, profit, general conditions, temporary facilities and supervision. 1. Coordinate Unit Price with requirements for related and adjacent work. 2. Include on bid form each unit price requested. Bids will be evaluated on the basis of the lowest total of the base bid plus the alternates plus a comparison of the unit prices. 3. Unit price bid will be used as the basis for pricing Change Order(s) to adjust the Contract Price to the actual amount of work completed. B. Unit Price Schedule: 1. Price per cubic yard ($ / CY) to remove an estimated 2,500 CY of rock ledge. a. Remove in situ rock ledge by blasting, mechanical, and hand means. 1). Overall cost shall be verified by truck volume tickets taken from each dump truck leaving the site. 2). Owner s Representative shall observe removal process, collect and validate each truck ticket ALTERNATES A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain Work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be GENERAL REQUIREMENTS APR 2011

58 completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. B. Schedule of Alternates: 1. Natural slate roofing in lieu of synthetic recycled plastic slate roofing. 2. Wood legally sourced according to the Lacey Act in lieu of FSC certified wood, except provide FSC Certified Rainforest Wood SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Procedures: Subcontractors and Suppliers to send submittals to GC for review prior to GC transmitting them to the Architect for his review. 1. Product Data: Electronic copies of requested information preferred. Submitting one (1) paper copy is acceptable. Architect will scan reviewed submittal and return it to the GC. 2. Shop Drawings: Electronic Adobe.PDF files copies of requested information preferred. Submitting one (1) blackline print copy is acceptable. Architect will mark-up review the Adobe.PDF file, or scan the reviewed blackline print submittal, and return it to the GC. Refer to each DIVISION SECTION for additional and specific requirements. 3. RFI: Submit requests for interpretation with reference to Contract Document, drawing number, and specification section. a. Exceptions: If agreed upon by GC and Architect, RFI may be incorporated in Progress Meeting minutes without separate written RFI and RFI logs. 4. Applications for Payment: Submit using AIA Form G702 Application for Payment & G703 Continuation Sheet CLARIFICATIONS A. Each identified conflict between the Drawings and Specifications shall be reviewed and determined by the Architect, who will issue a Clarification to the Contractor CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES A. Architect s Supplemental instruction (ASI): Issued for minor changes in the work defined as instructions or interpretations not involving adjustment to the Contract Price or the Contract Time. Architect to use AIA Document G710 or similar. B. Work Change Proposal Request (PR): Submitted by the Architect to the GC to elicit a response as to the effect of the proposed change to the Contract Price and/or the Contract Time in the form of a Change Order Proposal (COP). Architect to use AIA Document G709 or similar. C. Change Order Request (COR): Submitted by the GC to the Architect typically in response to a PR, or an Architect s reply to an RFI that affects the Contract Price and/or Time, or an unforeseen or uncovered condition that affects the Contract Price and/or Time. GC to use CSI Form 13.6A or an Architect acceptable similar form. D. Construction Change Directive (CCD): Additional Work that is required to be completed in a timely manner whereby the Owner and GC have not yet agreed to the amount of the change to the Contract Price and/or the Contract Time. Architect to use AIA Document G714 or similar. E. Change Order (CO): A written instruction to the GC issued after execution of the agreement that authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the work or an adjustment in the contract to the Contract Price and/or the Contract Time. Architect to use AIA Document G701 or similar PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION A. Coordination: General Contractor (GC) shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other contractors, subcontractors, and other entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS APR 2011

59 B. GC shall participate in coordination requirements and be responsible for: 1. Submitting a Schedule of Values: a. Submit a construction cost breakdown within seven (7) days after contract award to the Architect using the AIA Schedule of Values Form. Indicate Schedule of Values line items by specification section number, and other line items as requested by the Architect. 2. Reviewing Shop Drawings, samples, and Project Data submittals for adherence to the Contract Documents. a. Submittals are typically provided by subcontractors, suppliers and manufacturers but may also be by the GC. 1). Certificates: Submit printed certificates on manufacturer's letterhead with manufacturer s signature certifying that each product and/or assembly to be used meets each regulatory requirement, sustainability characteristic, performance requirement, design criteria, and applicable standard specified. b. GC shall stamp and review each submittal for compliance with specified characteristics, adding location information and site measured dimensions as applicable, prior to forwarding to the Architect for his review. 3. Providing on-site each required Field Sample, Mock-Up, Prototype, and/or Benchmark Installation for review and approval by the Architect and/or the Owner. a. Field Samples: Provide full sized field samples of each different item selected by the Architect to demonstrate aesthetic effects of materials in situ, assisting in making final selections prior to fabrication. b. Benchmark Installation: Provide mockup installations of each different product type to verify final selections made under sample submittals and prototypes, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standard benchmarks for materials and execution. 1). Install mockup installations for benchmarking of each unit type in the Work as indicated by the Drawings or directed by the Architect. 2). Notify Architect 7 days in advance of time when mock-up will be installed for approval viewing. 3). Modify and/or replace mock-ups as many times as necessary to obtain Architect s approval. 4). Obtain approval in writing before commencing work. 5). Approved mockups shall be benchmark installations and may be incorporated into the Work if accepted without exception by the Architect. 6). Protect the approved mock-up during construction period as it will be used to comparatively judge the finished installation 4. Providing administrative and supervisory personnel. a. In addition to Project Superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work. Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other contractors. b. GC s Project Supervisor or a named Assistant Supervisor, both acceptable to the Architect, shall be on the jobsite during all construction operations. No work may be done on-site unless the Supervisor or Assistant Supervisor or the GC is present onsite. 5. Participating in all project meetings. a. Preconstruction, Preinstallation and Coordination Conferences: Schedule, prepare agenda, and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, take and distribute meeting minutes, unless otherwise indicated, and including, but not limited to: 1). Meeting purpose is to review site conditions, installation procedures, work schedules, coordination with other work, warranty requirements, nonconforming items, and completion items. 2). Convene at Work site prior to commencing Work. 3). Require attendance of parties directly affecting or are affected by Work of this Section. 4). Notify required attendees seven (7) days in advance of meeting date. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS APR 2011

60 5). Schedule meetings to coincide with regularly scheduled progress meeting, unless otherwise approved by Architect. b. Progress Meetings: Architect will conduct Progress Meetings, taking and distributing minutes. 1). Provide meeting space with Internet capability. 2). Progress Meetings shall be held twice a month, dates and times to be determined. a). The Architect may call for Additional Progress Meetings to be held to review special conditions. 6. Providing Requests for Interpretation (RFI). a. Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. b. Use AIA Document G716 or an Architect acceptable form with a similar format. 7. Submitting completed Change Order Requests (COR) for proposed work requiring an adjustment to the Contract Price and/or Contract Time. 8. Submitting a monthly Application and Certificate for Payment using AIA Document G702 and G703, Continuation Sheet including attaching Partial Lien Waivers for work completed, a revised Construction Schedule, and a revised Schedule of Values Form, as applicable. a. A minimum three (3) workdays prior to submitting the official application GC shall electronically transmit a draft copy to the Architect for review and comment. Incorporate each Architect comment prior to officially submitting the Application and Certificate for Payment. b. Submit one (1) signed original of the complete submittal documentation, and two (2) copies of the signed G702 and G703 forms on the last workday of each month during construction. 9. Schedule and observe on site all required testing procedures, and inspections by AHJ and the Architect. C. Architect (A/E) Submittal Action: 1. Submittals received by the Architect without GC s acceptable review and stamp shall be returned without action to the GC. 2. For submittals where action and return is required or requested, A/E will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly; generally within fourteen (14) days from date of receipt. a. When the Architect receives Submittals for information, closeout documents, Record Documents and other submittals of similar purposes, no action will be taken. 3. Action Stamp: A/E will stamp each Submittal with a uniform, self-explanatory action stamp. The stamp will be appropriately marked, as follows, to indicate action taken. Review and approval of each submittal by the Architect is for conformance with the design concept of the Drawings and Specifications. Approval shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility for conforming to the plans and specifications and intent of the Contract. a. Approved : Final Unrestricted Release where that part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend upon that compliance. b. Approved as Noted : Final But Restricted Release where that part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend on that compliance. c. Revise and Resubmit : Revise or prepare a new submittal in accordance with the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain a different action mark. d. Not Approved : Do not proceed with that part of the Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal in accordance with the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if GENERAL REQUIREMENTS APR 2011

61 necessary to obtain a different action mark. 1). Do not permit submittals marked "Rejected: Submit Specified Item" or "Revise and Resubmit," to be used at the Project site, or elsewhere where Work is in progress CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION A. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule within seven (7) days of date of contract signing. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: 1. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit to the Architect a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within fifteen (15) days of date established for commencement of Work. Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback was received since the start of Project. 2. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a computerized timescaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work and submit to the Architect within thirty (30) days of date established for commencement of the Work. C. Submittals Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Submit within forty-five (45) days of the Notice to Proceed. D. GC Reports: To be made available to the Architect for review upon request, unless noted otherwise. 1. Daily Construction Log: Prepare and maintain a daily construction report recording required information concerning events at Project site. Report on weather, temperature, work progress, inspections, incidents, accidents, and milestone events. a. Required Information: Names of people on site; time of incidents, accidents and milestone completion. 2. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. 3. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. 4. Special Reports: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. E. Visual Documentation of the Construction: 1. At one (1) acceptable perspective overlook GC to provide a continuous video web-camera feed and internet storage (with playback and fast forward capability) documenting the site work through completing the finished exterior enclosure. a. Remote zoom capable video camera shall be placed on a tripod, aimed and locked at a view of the construction progress. b. Camera and tripod shall be placed in a securely anchored protective temporary enclosure with a shaded clear UV resistant Plexiglas window. c. Provide a level place and rock or concrete pad to anchor the enclosure and tripod to. 2. GC to provide regular weekly uploads throughout construction to the project ftp site of digital color photographs documenting hidden site conditions, uncovered items, items to be covered or enclosed by finish work, inspected work, joints, corners and other construction details, and other items as directed by the Architect NOISE, DUST, AND POLLUTION CONTROL A. Noise Control: Perform demolition and construction operations to minimize noise disturbance to neighbors. B. Dust, and Pollution Control: Conform to the requirements of AHJ. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS APR 2011

62 1. GC shall control dust at all times. Fugitive dust shall be controlled through wetting, sweeping, and other suppression techniques. GC shall maintain on-site ability to pump water from the lake. Trucks hauling materials and excavate from the site shall be covered TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND UTILITIES A. Scope of Temporary Work: This article is not intended to limit the scope of temporary work required under the Contract. Provide all temporary facilities and utilities needed. B. Permits and Fees: Obtain and pay for all permits, fees and charges related to temporary work. C. Codes and AHJ for Temporary Facilities and Utilities: Comply with all requirements of AHJ including OSHA, other federal, state and local, acts, codes, rules and regulations, requirements of utility companies, and industry standards including, but not limited to the following: 1. NFPA Code 241, Building Construction and Demolition Operations 2. ANSI-A10 Series, Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition 3. NECA National Joint Guideline NJG-6, Temporary Job Utilities and Services 4. Electrical Service: NEMA, NECA, and UL D. Field Office: Provide at the construction site a temporary field office of size, construction, and location within the work limit lines, as acceptable to the Architect. Prefabricated structure or trailer will be permitted upon approval of Architect in the location indicated. Minimum size 10 x 16 ft, heated with telephone and internet access. E. Shops and Sheds: At Contractor's option, provide shops and sheds for Contractor's use as needed. Locate shops and sheds where acceptable to Architect and AHJ. Prior to completion of construction, when required for the completion of site work, as approved by the Architect, all temporary storage facilities and surplus stored materials shall be removed from the site and areas restored to suitable condition acceptable to the Architect. 1. Lower level of garage outbuilding is available on-site; otherwise space is available on adjacent property as indicated on the Drawings. F. Toilet Facilities: Provide and maintain clean temporary toilet facilities throughout construction. G. Temporary Heat: Provide temporary heat as needed to protect the work and create a suitable work environment, and to protect the exterior construction against injury or damage resulting from cold temperature and dampness, to heat materials, and to maintain the minimum temperatures called out in the specification and as required by each manufacturer. Protect building from soot, smoke and fire damage. Do not use heat sources that could interfere with curing of mortar, grout or concrete, or that may otherwise cause damage. H. Pumping and Drainage: Provide pumping and drainage acceptable to AHJ as needed to properly dispose of standing and running water regardless of its source. I. Equipment and Tools: Provide all equipment including, but not limited to, hoists, lifts, scaffolding, machines, tools and the like, as needed for execution of the work. Provide for continuous safe access to all parts of the work. J. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures to maintain proper temperatures and to prevent weather damage. Always maintain safe means of egress acceptable to AHJ. K. Snow and Ice: Remove all snow and ice that may interfere with work or safety, or as required to prevent damage to work in place. L. Streets, Walks and Grounds: Maintain public and private roads and walks clear of debris caused by construction operations. Repair all damage caused to streets, drives, lawns, plantings, fences, poles and similar items where disturbed or damaged by building construction and leave them in as good condition after completion of the work as before operations started. 1. Provide geotextile and gravel surface for temporary GC parking and storage as located by the Drawings. M. Protection: Protect all nearby people and property. Provide and maintain barricades, warning signs and lights, railings, walkways and the like. Immediately repair damaged property to its GENERAL REQUIREMENTS APR 2011

63 condition before being damaged. N. Fencing: Provide construction fencing and barriers to indicate project limits, as required by AHJ to protect the public and workmen, and to control access. Provide snow fencing to control blowing and drifting snow. O. Security: Secure building and construction storage against unauthorized entry at all times. Provide secure, locked temporary enclosures. Protect the work at all times. P. Equipment Use: No permanent equipment shall be used during construction without the written permission of the Architect, or as otherwise noted. 1. HVAC ducts shall be sealed and non-operational until Substantial Completion, unless otherwise agreed to by the Architect. 2. Exceptions. The following permanent systems when operational may be used: a. Power b. Artificial lighting c. Potable water Q. Elevators: Temporary use of elevators is not permitted. R. Signs: No signs are permitted, except for the Project Sign, and safety warning signs. S. Water: Provide and maintain water service during construction, including water for drinking and fire protection. Owner will pay for cost of service. T. Light and Power: Provide and maintain light and power system for entire project, including temporary offices and security lighting. Owner will pay for cost of service. 1. Coordinate with power utility to replace transformer. Provide temporary wiring from new transformer to pole(s) and building, including temporary lighting and power outlets for construction use. Remove when permanent systems are in place and acceptable for use. U. Telecommunications: Provide temporary computer Internet and data/telephone service for job trailer. 1. Job Trailer Telecommunications Service Capable of: a. Receiving and sending s with attachments of a minimum 10 megabytes or more. b. Receiving fax telecommunications and printing to recycled bond paper or to an Adobe.PDF file. c. Voice communications and teleconferencing. d. Secure Internet browsing for product information and current weather forecast. 1). Virus protection required for PC type computers. V. Fire Prevention: Take every possible precaution to prevent fire. Store hazardous materials in a manner and at locations acceptable to AHJ. Provide several fire extinguishers for each work area. W. Erosion Control: Provide equipment and materials for minimizing erosion and siltation during the construction phase of the project meeting requirements of AHJ and as indicated by the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Silt fence. 2. Hay bale dike. 3. Hay bale check dam. 4. Hay bale catch basin filter. 5. Erosion control netting. 6. Filter baskets. X. Temporary Project Sign: Provide one (1) sign as indicated by the Drawings PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Sole Sourcing Manufacturers: To the greatest degree possible, provide primary materials and products from one manufacturer for each type or kind. Provide secondary materials as GENERAL REQUIREMENTS APR 2011

64 recommended by manufacturers of primary materials. B. Delivery, Storage, and Handling: Comply with manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, and the following items, unless otherwise noted in the individual Section. 1. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: Deliver materials to Project site in an undamaged condition, in original bundles and bearing intact labels. a. Inspect shipped materials on delivery to ensure compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. Reject damaged goods, and accept properly ordered, protected and undamaged goods. b. Mark products with Shop Drawing location reference, unless already properly marked. 1). Use removable tags or concealed markings. 2. Storage and Handling Requirements: Protect materials and accessories during shipping, handling, storage and installation from exposure to weather, water, direct sun, soiling, deterioration, and other damage. a. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on-site storage. b. Store certified materials separately for auditing. 3. Packaging Waste Management: When ordering materials and products request to each manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, and shipper that they provide least amount of packaging that adequately and properly protects, supports and contains the items shipped, and is reusable, returnable, or recyclable. C. Substitution Limitations: 1. Substitution Requests: Identify each product or system to be substituted by first referencing the applicable specification sections and drawing numbers. GC to provide certification and evidence to prove compliance with Contract Document requirements as acceptable to Architect. a. Prior to Bid opening for each substitution request: Submit a completed CSI Substitution Request form 1.5C. b. After Bid Opening for each substitution request: Submit a completed CSI Substitution Request form 13.1A. 2. Substitution Conditions: Substitution requests will be returned without action unless one of the following conditions is satisfied. GC shall state which of the following conditions applies to the requested substitution: a. Request is due to an "or equal" or or equivalent clause. b. Specified material or product cannot be coordinated with other work. c. Specified material or product is not acceptable to AHJ. d. Substantial advantage is offered Owner in terms of cost, time, or other valuable consideration. 3. Invalid Substitutions: GC's submittal and Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, samples, product data or other submittal is not a valid request for, nor an approval of a substitution unless GC also presents the information as a Request for Substitution. a. GC shall notify Architect and Owner in writing prior to signing the contract agreement of each item they believe is not available EXECUTION A. Construction Layout: As required by the AHJ, initial lay out of the Work will be completed and verified in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks by the civil engineering consultant. GC will then complete the layout of building components, and internal utilities throughout the remainder of construction. If discrepancies are discovered, GC shall promptly notify Architect. B. Field Engineering: 1. Reference Points: Civil engineering consultant will locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. GC shall preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS APR 2011

65 2. Site Benchmarks: Civil engineering consultant will establish and GC shall maintain a minimum of two permanent site benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. 3. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, the civil engineering consultant will prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and site work. C. Examination and Verification of Conditions: 1. Field Measurements: When required provide in-situ field dimensions necessary for accurate fabrication of project work items. Place dimensions on shop drawing submittals prior to submitting to the Architect. 2. Carefully examine installation areas with each Installer/Applicator present prior to the start of their work, for compliance with requirements affecting Work performance. a. Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates, structural support, penetrations, tolerances, levelness, plumbness, humidity, moisture content level, cleanliness, and other conditions are as required by each manufacturer, and ready to receive Work. 3. Correct each detrimental condition that will adversely affect the execution, permanence or quality of the work of each Section. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions. 5. Preinstallation Testing: Test substrate surfaces to be bonded to ensure adhesion is not impaired. Clean, abrade or otherwise treat surface to ensure proper adhesive bond using manufacturer recommended methods. D. Installation: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. E. Progress Cleaning: Clean and maintain Project site and Work areas broom clean on a daily basis including common areas. Keep all areas clean to safety requirements at all times. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Salvage, reuse, recycle, and convert to heat energy, or dispose of materials lawfully. F. Starting And Adjusting: Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. Coordinate commissioning Work with Owner s CxA or commissioning agent. G. Protection of Installed Construction: Provide protection adequate to maintain conditions ensuring installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. H. Correction of Non-Conforming Work: According to the General and Supplementary Conditions repair or remove and replace non-conforming work. Replace or restore damaged materials, substrates and finishes to a condition acceptable to Architect. 1. Repair includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. 2. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. 3. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair to a condition acceptable to the Architect. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS APR 2011

66 4. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace each component that cannot be repaired to a condition acceptable to the Architect. 5. Remove and replace chipped, scratched or broken glass, or other reflective surfaces with same but undamaged material(s) CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL A. Waste Management Plan: Within thirty (30) calendar days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, GC shall submit to the Owner a Waste Management Plan, which shall contain the following: 1. On-site incineration not allowed. 2. Analysis of the proposed jobsite waste to be generated, including types and rough quantities. 3. Alternatives to Landfilling: A list of each material proposed to be salvaged or recycled during the course of the Project. 4. Landfill Options: The name of the landfills where trash and building debris will be disposed of, the applicable landfill tipping fees, and the projected cost of disposing of all Project waste in the landfills. 5. Materials Handling Procedures: A description of the means by which each waste material identified above to be recycled or reused will be protected from contamination, and a description of the means to be employed in recycling the above materials consistent with requirements for acceptance by designated facilities. 6. Handle hazardous waste in strict accordance with manufacturers recommendations and AHJ rules and regulations for materials regulated under RCRA (Resource Conservation and Recovery Act). 7. Transportation: A description of the means of transportation of the recyclable materials (whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to designated centers, or whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler and removed from the site) and destination of materials CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Substantial Completion: 1. Complete the following: Submit a list of any item below that is incomplete. a. GC shall prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (GC punch list), the value of items on the list, and a schedule for when the Work is to be complete. b. Once the GC punch list is substantially complete GC will notify the Architect the GC s recommendation to inspect for Substantial Completion. c. Architect will prepare a list of items (if any) to be completed and corrected (Architect s punch list), and a date by which the GC is to complete or correct the nonconforming Work. d. GC and Architect are to come to an agreement on the Date of Substantial Completion. 1). Architect to issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion using AIA Document G704 or similar. e. GC to advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. f. GC to submit executed warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. g. GC to obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include final lien waivers, occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. h. GC to prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. i. GC to deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label each item with manufacturer's name and model number, as applicable. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS APR 2011

67 j. GC to make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys directly to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. k. GC to complete startup testing of systems. l. GC to submit test/adjust/balance records to Architect and Commissioning Agent CxA. m. GC to terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. n. GC to advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. o. GC to submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. p. GC to complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 1). Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. 2. Inspection: Submit a written request to the Architect for Substantial Completion inspection. a. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. b. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. B. Final Completion: 1. GC to complete the following: a. Submit a final Application for Payment. b. Submit copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (Architect s punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. c. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. d. Certify that health and environmental requirements of AHJ were met. e. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training instructions. 2. Inspection: Submit a written request to the Architect for final inspection for acceptance OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) DATA A. O&M Work consists of administrative and procedural requirements for preparing O&M manuals, including Printed Binders, DVDs, CDs, and the following: 1. O&M documentation directory 2. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment 3. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, finishes, systems and equipment. B. O&M Documentation Directory: Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1. List of Documents 2. List of Systems 3. List of Equipment 4. Table of Contents C. Operation Manuals: Include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility 3. Operating standards 4. Operating procedures 5. Operating logs GENERAL REQUIREMENTS APR 2011

68 6. Wiring diagrams 7. Control diagrams 8. Piped system diagrams 9. Precautions against improper use 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates D. Product Maintenance Manuals 1. Product Information. Include the following, as applicable: a. Product name and model number b. Manufacturer's name c. Color, pattern, and texture d. Material and chemical composition e. Reordering information for specially manufactured products 2. Maintenance Procedures. Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: a. Inspection procedures b. Types of environmentally safe cleaning agents to be used, and safe methods of cleaning c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product d. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance e. Repair instructions. 3. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of environmentally safe materials, local sources, and related services. 4. Warranties: Include copies of executed warranties and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. E. Systems And Equipment Maintenance Manual: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, for each system listed below. 1. Plumbing System including, but not limited to, a ground sourced heat pump. 2. HVAC system 3. Electrical system including, but not limited to: a. Photovoltaic system b. Whole Building Energy Management System (Controls) 1.24 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Record Drawings: 1. Record Prints: Maintain one set of black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. a. Scan and upload Record Prints to project ftp site, or submit on a CD, or as otherwise directed by the Architect. B. Record Specifications: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where GENERAL REQUIREMENTS APR 2011

69 applicable. D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. 1. GC to collect and bind, ready during construction for continued use and reference at the job site, Miscellaneous Record Submittals identifying each by submittal number, type, and specification section information. Submit bound record at Substantial Completion. 2. GC may, at his option, scan Miscellaneous Record Submittals and upload to the project ftp site in lieu of submitting bound records at Substantial Completion WARRANTIES A. Submit warranty documents within ten (10) days after acceptance for equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission. B. Make other warranty submittals not later than two (2) weeks prior to Substantial Completion. C. Submit warranties within ten (10) days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period, for items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion. D. Form of Submittal: Submit electronic Adobe.PDF files with mark-up capability enabled. 1. Include a Table of Contents listing each warranty following the Project Manual s with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified, and the name of product or work item. 2. Provide complete information, using separate typed sheets as necessary, listing subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principals DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Provide an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system as follows: 1. Demonstrate operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Provide training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct the Owner or Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. C. Schedule: 1. Geothermal 2. Whole Building Energy Management System (Controls) END OF SECTION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS APR 2011

70 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION SITE DEMOLITION A. Section includes: Capping, salvage, demolition and removal of site elements. B. Related Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including GENERAL and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and SECTION , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to this Section. 1. SECTION : for temporary construction and environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations. 2. SECTION , STRUCTURE DEMOLITION: Coordination of site utility work. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Unit Prices: SECTION for removal of rock ledge material. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Predemolition Meeting: Conduct meeting at Project site to inspect scope of site demolition, review process and procedures, required submittals, utilities, environmental precautions, safety items, waste disposal, and final demolition site conditions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Predemolition Documentation: Photograph or video existing conditions of adjoining site improvements, including items to remain that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site demolition operations. Submit prior to beginning the Work. B. Project Record Documents: Identify location of capped utilities with photographs and dimensioned location plan drawings to scale. C. Qualification Statements: For site demolition firm. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA and other AHJ notification, blasting, and hauling ordinances and regulations before beginning salvage or demolition. 1. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. B. Site Demolition Firm Qualifications: Minimum of five (5) years experience in site demolition of comparable projects. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy the upper level of the on-site garage to remain. B. Existing Conditions: After the project is begun, Contractor is responsible for the condition of site to be demolished. Owner does not warrant that the condition of site to be demolished will not have changed since the time of inspection for bidding purposes. C. Explosives: Use of explosives will be permitted for removal of rock ledge only. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not used) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and sealed. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with Contract Drawings and specifications to determine extent of site demolition required. SITE DEMOLITION APR 2011

71 C. When unanticipated elements that conflict with intended site demolition activities are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Traffic: Do not obstruct public ways without the written permission of authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ) and of the Owner. B. Protection: 1. Provide for the protection of persons passing around or through the area of demolition. 2. Perform demolition so as to prevent damage to adjacent improvements and facilities to remain. 3. Erect temporary protection such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, etc., where required by AHJ or as directed by the Architect. C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of site elements being demolished. D. Damages: Without cost to the Owner and without delay, repair any damages caused to site elements and building structures to remain. 3.3 UTILITY SERVICES A. Utility Services: Arrange for disconnecting and sealing utilities to be demolished, prior to start of site demolition work. 1. Disconnect water utilities from well and lake supply. Protect for future connection. 2. Disconnect cable to satellite dish. Leave in a ready state for reconnection. 3. Coordinate shut-off of electric with local power utility as indicated. 4. Disconnect and cap other indicated utilities before starting demolition operations. B. Bypass Connections: Provide as necessary to provide temporary services to garage to remain, job trailer, and jobsite. C. Notify the Owner a minimum 48 hours in advance of changeover. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect utilities that remain from damage. B. Protect trees, plant growth, and features designated to remain as final landscaping. C. Protect benchmarks and existing structures from damage or displacement. D. Use means necessary to prevent dust becoming a nuisance to the public, to neighbors, and to other work being performed on or near the site. E. Maintain access to the site at all times. 3.5 EXPLOSIVES A. Do not use explosives, except for removal of rock ledge material, unless otherwise agreed to in writing. Perform blasting operations in full accordance with rules and regulations of AHJ. 3.6 POLLUTION CONTROLS A. Control as much as practicable the spread of dust and dirt. B. Observe environmental protection regulations of AHJ. C. Do not allow water usage that results in freezing or flooding. D. Do not allow adjacent improvements to remain to become soiled by demolition operations. 3.7 DEMOLITION - GENERAL A. Existing to Remain: Construction or items indicated to remain shall be protected against SITE DEMOLITION APR 2011

72 damage during demolition operations. Where practicable, and with the Owner's permission, the Contractor may elect to remove items to a suitable storage location during demolition and then properly clean and reinstall the items. B. Confirm with Owner that all stone walls to be salvage have been removed. C. Perform work in a systematic manner. D. Use any methods permitted by governing regulations of AHJ and the requirements of the Contract Documents. 3.8 DEMOLITION ON OR BELOW GRADE A. Remove rock walls, bituminous paving, and concrete elements as indicated. B. Completely remove below-grade utilities as indicated. 1. GC to remove two (2) existing 500 gal. propane tanks and replace them with two (2) new 1,000 gal. tanks. GC to use propane for necessary heat providing for required exhausting and ventilation. C. Remove indicated trees, shrubs and groundcover as indicated. 3.9 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Clearing: Clear areas required for access to site and execution of Work. 1. Remove trees and shrubs within areas as indicated on the Plans. 2. Remove stumps, roots and tap roots and other projections 1-1/2 inch or greater in diameter to 2'-0" below the excavated surfaces in cut areas and 2'-0" below the exposed subgrade in fill areas. B. Promptly dispose of materials resulting from demolition operations not allowed for reuse on-site. Do not allow materials to accumulate on site. 1. Remove debris, rock, and extracted plant life from site. 2. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. C. Transport materials resulting from demolition operations and legally dispose of off-site. D. Do not burn removed materials on project site. E. Contractor shall be responsible for backfilling (capping) and grading all waste sites CLEANING A. Remove tools and equipment. Dispose of scrap. B. Leave exterior areas free of debris. C. Return structures and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to commencement of demolition. END OF SECTION SITE DEMOLITION APR 2011

73 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: SECTION STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 1. Removal, salvage or disposal, off site, of the following: a. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled b. Demolition and removal of building structures c. Building foundations, footings, and supporting walls. d. Exterior walkways, patios, stairs, planters, retaining walls, and site furnishings within demolition areas. 2. And the following Work: a. Disconnect, cap and identify exposed utilities to allow for salvage and demolition activities to safely progress. B. Related Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including GENERAL and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and SECTION , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to this Section. 1. SECTION : for temporary construction and environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations. 2. SECTION , SITE DEMOLITION: Site utilities. 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Predemolition Meeting: Conduct meeting at Project site to inspect scope of salvage and demolition, review process and procedures, required submittals, utilities, environmental precautions, safety items, waste disposal, and final demolition site conditions. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section , for submittal procedures. B. Schedule of Salvage and Demolition activities indicating the following: 1. Sequence of salvage, and demolition, with starting and ending dates for each activity. 2. Utility service shutoffs and capping. 3. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from building. C. Inventory: After salvage is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed for salvage. D. Predemolition Documentation: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Submit prior to beginning the Work. E. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of any hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept demolition waste. F. Qualification Statements: For demolition firm. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA and other AHJ notification and hauling ordinances and regulations before beginning salvage or demolition. 1. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. B. Demolition Firm Qualifications: Minimum of five (5) years experience in demolition of comparable structures. STRUCTURE DEMOLITION APR 2011

74 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy the upper level of the on-site garage to remain. B. Hazardous Materials: It is not likely that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify the Architect, and Owner for abatement. C. Salvaged Materials: Items of salvageable value to Contractor may be removed from structure in the time period allowed prior to demolition. Transport salvaged items from site as they are removed. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. D. Explosives: Use of explosives will not be permitted. E. Utility Services: Do not start demolition work until utility disconnections have been completed and verified in writing. 1. Arrange for disconnecting and sealing utilities serving structures to be demolished, prior to start of demolition work. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged for the Owner. C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended salvage or demolition activities are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. D. Contractor to perform periodic visual surveys to detect hazards resulting from salvage and demolition activities. Provide safety protection measures for identified hazards and resolve. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct salvage, demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with access roads and streets. B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and site items to remain. C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 3.3 DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Conduct all demolition in a safe and secure manor. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of AHJ governing regulations and as follows: 1. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of structures or site items to remain, be demolished, or that are adjacent. 2. Protect designated trees and plants from damage. Relocate as necessary. 3. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Pollution Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in air. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. 1. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding, and pollution. C. Salvaged Items: Complete salvage operations up until time scheduled for demolition. 1. Detach items from existing construction and promptly remove them from the site. STRUCTURE DEMOLITION APR 2011

75 2. Salvaged items are no longer the property of the Owner, unless otherwise noted or labeled. D. Building Demolition: Demolish buildings completely and remove from site. Use such methods as required to complete work within limitations of governing regulations. 1. Proceed with demolition in systematic manner, from top of structure to ground. Complete demolition work above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on lower levels. 2. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. 3. Break up and remove concrete slabs on grade, unless otherwise indicated to remain. 4. Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and remove materials so as to not impose excessive loads to supporting walls, floors, or framing. 5. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. a. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. E. Below Grade Construction: Demolish foundation walls and other below grade construction, including concrete slabs, piles, pile caps, retaining walls, pipe trenches, etc., and remove from site. 3.4 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an AHJ-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Comply with all applicable regulations governing demolition, building material recycling and disposal. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolition materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. 3.6 SALVAGE SCHEDULE A. Items Salvaged to Owner: 1. Two (2) stained glass windows 2. Ipe decking B. Items Salvaged by Contractor and delivered to Re-Source on Pine Street, Burlington, VT, or to other reuse or recycle entities at Contractor s discretion: 1. Windows 2. Doors 3. Plumbing fixtures 4. Cabinetry 5. Heating system 6. Water filtration system STRUCTURE DEMOLITION APR 2011

76 7. Appliances END OF SECTION STRUCTURE DEMOLITION APR 2011

77 SECTION PRE-CAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The work of this section includes the pre-cast concrete pavers. B. The scope includes supplying and installation of the pavers and all related accessories. C. The scope of work is indicated on Drawing S1.4. Provide minimum depth of sub base as indicated on Drawing C-105. D. Note that the Unilock Printed Specifications shall become part of the Project Specifications. E. Pavers to be Stonehenge Color Granite size 12x12 and 6x12 and 6x6 by Unilock. PRE-CAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS AUG 2011

78 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION UNIT MASONRY A. Work of this Section consists of unit masonry, and includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Block or concrete masonry units (CMUs): ASTM C90 (Load bearing and non-loadbearing) 2. Mortar and grout 3. Steel Reinforcing 4. Embedded flashing 5. Miscellaneous accessories B. Products Installed BUT Furnished from Other Sections: 1. SECTION , METAL FABRICATIONS: Steel relieving angles. 2. SECTION , THERMAL INSULATION 3. SECTION , FLASHING AND SHEET METAL: for exposed sheet metal flashing. 4. SECTION , FIRESTOPPING: Penetration treatment through interior fire-rated CMU construction. 5. SECTION , JOINT PROTECTION: Expansion foam, and elastomeric joint sealers. 6. SECTION , FIREPLACE SPECIALTIES: Fireplace accessories; firebrick. C. Related Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including GENERAL and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and SECTION , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to this Section. 1. DIVISION 03 & 05 / STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS 2. DIVISION 32 / CIVIL DRAWINGS 1.2 REFERENCES A. Referenced Standards noted in this section, in SECTION , and current editions of the following: 1. ACI. American Concrete Institute; a. ACI-530 Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures 2. ASCE. American Society of Civil Engineers; 3. ASTM. ASTM International; SUBMITTALS A. See Section , for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed literature descriptions of materials, components and systems, performance criteria, use limitations, recommendations and installation information. C. Shop Drawings. Submit plans and elevations showing CMU compliance with ACI 315 and indicating: 1. CMU wall reinforcing including bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of masonry reinforcement for fabrication, bending, and placement of reinforcement bars. D. Test and Evaluation Reports: Submit certified CMU material test results by a recognized testing laboratory in accordance with specified test methods for each product and/or system indicating UNIT MASONRY APR 2011

79 physical, chemical and performance characteristics. E. Qualification Statements: Manufacturer(s); Mason Installer. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Approvals: 1. Fire Performance Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E Codes: Comply with requirements of State of Vermont building codes, rules and regulations, and with ACI 530 / ASCE 5 / TMS 402. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced a minimum five (5) years in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful inservice performance. C. Mason Installer Qualifications: Perform installation with skilled, experienced and trained workmen supervised by trained personnel who shall have at least ten (10) years successful experience in installations of similar size and scope. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, SECTION , and the following: 1. Faces of units exposed in finished Work shall be handled and stored with extreme care to prevent chipping or marring. 2. Chipped or otherwise damaged faces will not be permitted in exposed Work. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Loading: Do not apply loads until Work has set and cured and is ready to accept loading. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU) A. CMU: Provide normal weight or lightweight, load bearing units of Portland cement, water, sand, and gravel. Provide hollow and/or solid configurations as indicated, and conforming to ASTM C90. Provide CMU with following characteristics: 1. Moisture Content: < 35 percent of total absorption in accordance with ASTM C Residual Linear Shrinkage: < 0.01 percent when dried to equilibrium of 50 percent relative humidity at 73 deg F (23 deg C) ambient temperature. 3. Provide CMU exposed in finished Work with uniform light gray color and uniform mediumfine texture. a. Manufacture units in a single run, uninterrupted except at ends of normal working days, to assure uniformity of color and texture. b. Moderate "manufacturing range" of variation in color and texture will be permitted, but such variations shall not exceed those shown on approved sample panels. 4. Face: Smooth Face Design. 5. Size: Provide units 8 by 16 inch (200mm by 400mm) nominal face size, and indicated nominal thicknesses. 6. Provide special shapes of each type of block as required to complete Work as indicated at no additional cost to Owner. a. Carefully review Drawings to determine scope and varieties of special block shapes required. b. Provide 100 percent solid CMU lip stretcher(s). 7. Fire-Resistive CMU Construction: Provide fire-rated CMU masonry as defined in the IBC 2003, 2006 and 2009 CODE, using the equivalent thickness method of determining fire UNIT MASONRY APR 2011

80 resistivity. 8. Special CMU: a. Provide half-blocks, lintel blocks, beam "U" blocks, other special blocks, and required special cutting. b. Provide jamb blocks, end blocks, control joint blocks, and lintel blocks with exposed ends closed. 2.2 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type N B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I 1. Not more than 0.60 percent alkali. 2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S 3. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, except for joints less than 1/4 inch use aggregate graded 100% passing the No. 16 sieve. 4. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404 C. Water: Clean and potable, free from deleterious quantities of acids, alkalis, oils, salts and organic materials. D. Add-Mixes: None, unless otherwise approved by the Architect. 2.3 JOINT REINFORCEMENT, TIES AND ANCHORS A. Materials: 1. Reinforcing Steel: Deformed steel bars, ASTM A615, Grade 60 for Bars No. 3 to No Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Wire: ASTM A641 / A641M B. Manufacturers of Joint Reinforcement and Anchors: 1. Dur-O-Wal: 2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: 3. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America: 4. See SECTION for product substitution submittal requirements. C. Joint Reinforcement: Welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units. 1. Width: Approximately 2 inches (50mm) less than nominal width of walls and partitions 2. Mortar Coverage: a. Exterior: Not less than 5/8 inch (16mm) b. Interior: 1/2 inch (13mm) 3. Wire Size: a. Side Rods: 9 gage (minimum inch or mm diameter) b. Cross Rods: 9 gage (minimum inch or mm diameter) 4. Exterior CMU Walls: 9 gage (minimum inch or mm diameter) 5. Configuration: a. Single-Wythe Masonry: Truss design with continuous diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches (406mm) o.c. b. Multi-Wythe Masonry: Adjustable wall tie pintle section fitting into eye section of rectangular box-type cross ties. c. Spacing: Not more than 16 inches (406mm) o.c. d. Truss type units: Side rods spaced for embedment within each face shell of back-up wythe and ties extended to within 1 inch (25mm) of exterior face of facing wythe. 6. Masonry ties for anchoring unit masonry walls and partitions to intersecting masonry (other UNIT MASONRY APR 2011

81 than where tee reinforcements are specified) and to anchor ends of concrete masonry units where adjoining concrete masonry units of different thickness, shall be 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch mesh size, 16/16 gauge galvanized steel mesh, cut to size not less than 12 inches in length and of width 2 inches less than partition width, or other steel tie system acceptable by local codes and approved by Architect. 7. Ties for Other Miscellaneous Uses: Standard proprietary galvanized steel items appropriate in each case for the project conditions. 8. Pencil Rods at Construction Joints: As shown, steel dowels dipped in tar for half of length D. Flexible Anchors: 1. Two-piece, which permit vertical or horizontal differential movement, but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to, plane of wall. 2. Anchorage to Steel Framework: Manufacturer's standard, crimped 1/4 inch (6mm) diameter wire for welding to steel framework. a. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire sized to extend within 1 inch (25mm) of exterior face of facing wythe. E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307, Grade A, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM C153, Class C, in sizes and configuration indicated F. Cleaning Solution: Not acidic, and not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Masonry Drainage Matt / Rainscreen: 1. Acceptable Product: Provide Driwall Rainscreen 075-1, by Keene Building Products, or Sure Cavity by Masonry Technology, Inc B. Insulation: SECTION C. Joint Treatment: SECTION D. Building Paper: ASTM D226, Type I ("No.15") asphalt felt; as bond break material. E. Waterproofing Treatment: At below-grade CMU walls spray apply noncrystalline type colloidalsilica waterproofing sealer to properly prepared exposed CMU wall as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Manufacturer / Product: Interlock Industries Inc. / SCP TM ; a. No substitution. 2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: 1. Restrictions: Use only the specified additives to mortar and grout mixes. a. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. b. Do not substitute mortar for grout 2. Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, Proportion Specifications, Cement-Lime Mortar, for types of mortar required, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Type M: Below grade in contact with earth, and where indicated. a. Air Content: 8 to12 percent maximum. 2. Type N: Interior non-loadbearing walls. a. Air Content: 8 to14 percent maximum. 3. Type S: All other masonry. a. Air Content: 8 to 12 percent maximum. C. Grout: ASTM C476 with consistency complying with ACI Compressive Strength: 2500 psi (17.2 MPa) minimum at 28 days, as per ASTM C1019 UNIT MASONRY APR 2011

82 2. Slump: 8 to 10 inches (200mm to 250mm) when tested at point of discharge as per ASTM C Mix: Portland cement, water, and ASTM C404 aggregates PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions. Examination per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Carefully examine installation areas with Mason Installer present, for compliance with requirements affecting Work performance. a. Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates, structural support, reinforcement, penetrations, tolerances, levelness, plumbness, humidity, moisture content level, cleanliness, and other conditions are as required by the roofing system manufacturer, and ready to receive Work. b. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located. c. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. 2. Correct each detrimental condition that will adversely affect the execution, permanence or quality of the work of this Section. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Beginning masonry work constitutes acceptance of conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Layout new masonry work in advance to ensure accurate spacing of surface bond patterns, uniformity of joint widths and to properly locate all openings. Avoid the use of less than half size units at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other locations. B. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections. C. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. D. When open-flame or spark producing tools such as blower torches, welding equipment, and the like are required in the process of executing the Work, Contractor shall provide fire protective covering and maintain constant non-working fire watch where work is being performed and until it is completed. E. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of thickness indicated. B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections of the Specifications. C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening. D. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. 1. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. 2. Use full-size units without cutting, where possible. 3. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. 4. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. UNIT MASONRY APR 2011

83 E. Mix units for exposed unit masonry from several pallets or cubes as they are placed to produce uniform blend of colors and textures. F. Masonry Protection: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's Work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. G. Loading: Do not apply loads until Work has set and cured and is ready to accept loading. 3.4 COURSING A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Bond: Running 2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches 3. Mortar Joints: Concave 3.5 PLACING AND BONDING A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work. B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. C. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted. D. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. E. Interlock intersections and external corners. F. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. G. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks with compressible joint filler. H. Place precast chimney cap atop chimney masonry; mortar into place; seal to protruding flue. 3.6 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - GENERAL A. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or specified under specific wall type, install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. C. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. D. Fasten anchors to structural framing and embed in masonry joints as masonry is laid. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or closer spacing is indicated under specific wall type, space anchors at maximum of 24 inches horizontally and 16 inches vertically. 3.7 LINTELS A. Install loose steel lintels over openings in stone veneer, and loose steel or reinforced unit masonry lintels in unit masonry interior partitions per schedules in structural drawings and as indicated in the Drawings. B. Maintain minimum 4 inch bearing on each side of opening for precast concrete lintels, and 8 inch bearing on each side of opening for unit masonry or steel lintels. 3.8 CONTROL JOINTS A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control joints. B. Form control joint with a sheet building paper bond breaker fitted to one side of the hollow contour end of the block unit. Fill the resultant core with grout fill. Rake joint at exposed unit UNIT MASONRY APR 2011

84 faces for placement of backer rod and sealant. C. Size control joint in accordance with SECTION D. Form expansion joint as detailed 3.9 BUILT-IN WORK A. As work progresses, install built-in anchor bolts, plates, and hollow metal door and borrowed lite frames and other items to be built into the work and furnished under other sections. B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line. C. Bed anchors of metal doorframes in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids at interior doors solid with grout. 1. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings. D. Do not build into masonry construction organic materials that are subject to deterioration CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for chases. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests, Inspection: No reinforcing shall be covered in the Work until observed by Structural Engineer. B. Mortar Tests: Test each type of mortar in accordance with ASTM C780, testing with same frequency as masonry samples REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point-up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for application of joint protection. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as Work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears prior to tooling joints. 1. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry. 1. Clean soiled surfaces with non-acidic cleaning solution that leaves little or no residue PROTECTION A. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure unit masonry is without damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION UNIT MASONRY APR 2011

85 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION DRY-PLACED STONE A. Section includes, but is not limited to, furnishing and installing Dry-Laid Stone Walls at locations indicated on the Drawings, or as otherwise directed by the Architect. Walls will be considered "double faced" unless noted otherwise on the Plans. 1. Provide Accessories as needed for a complete working installation meeting requirements. B. Related Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including GENERAL and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and Section , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to this Section. 1. DIVISION 32 / CIVIL DRAWINGS: For stone wall sub-base including engineered fill, filter fabric, and compacted coarse aggregate. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards as noted in this section, in SECTION , and current editions of the following: 1. BSI. Building Stone Institute; a. BSI - Building Retaining Walls Without Mortar: ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: GC, Installer and Architect/Engineer (A/E) shall meet to discuss acceptable stones, retaining walls, erosion control measures, and coordination with other work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Procedures per SECTION B. Qualification Statements: Installer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company or mason with a minimum of ten (10) years successful experience specializing in work of the type required by this SECTION. 1. DSC Level 2 or higher Certification, or equivalent credentials acceptable to the Architect. B. Mock-ups / Benchmark Installations: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and execution of workmanship, in places as indicated by the Drawings. 1. Build mockups of each different type of dry-laid stone wall in sizes a minimum four (4) feet long by actual heights indicated on the Drawings. a. Include cap, face, cross-tie and drainage stones for joints and all components of the dry-laid stone wall assembly. b. Clean mockup according to the proposed cleaning method. c. Contact Architect for review and approval of mockup only when cleaned. 2. Approval of Mockups as a Benchmark Installation is for aesthetic qualities of the masonry workmanship. a. A Mockup built as part of the final Work and accepted by the Architect is a Benchmark Installation and, if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion, may become part of the completed Work. 3. Protect accepted Benchmark Installations from construction operations. 4. Immediately disassemble Mockups NOT approved as Benchmark Installations, and salvage stones for stone work. DRY-PLACED STONE APR 2011

86 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Stain Prevention: Immediately remove soil to prevent it from staining the face of the stone wall assembly, unless otherwise directed by the Architect. 1. Protect base of stone walls from rain-splashed mud splatter by coverings spread on the ground and over the wall surface. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Dry-Laid Stone: As selected from the project site to match Architect s samples, or as otherwise directed by the Architect. B. Crushed Gravel (See CIVIL DRAWINGS): Provide materials secured from approved sources. Gravel shall consist of angular and round fragments of hard durable rock of uniform quality throughout, reasonably free from thin elongated pieces, soft or disintegrated stone, dirt, organic or other objectionable matter. Material shall meet the following grading requirements: Sieve Designation COARSE GRAVEL 1. 4 inch No No No Percent by Weight Passing Square Mesh Sieve C. Compacted Fill / Granular Borrow (See CIVIL DRAWINGS): Provide material that is free of shale, clay, friable material, debris, and organic matter, graded in accordance with ANSI/ASTM C136 within the following limits: Percent by Weight Sieve Designation Passing Square Mesh Sieve 1. 6 inch /4 inch No No No Geotextile Stabilization Fabric (See CIVIL DRAWINGS): Furnish and place an approved nonwoven polypropylene stabilization fabric on a prepared surface within the limits shown on the Drawings. a. Basis of Design Product: Mirifi 140n filter fabric by Koninklijke TenCate ( or an Architect acceptable equivalent meeting requirements from one of the following manufacturers: 1). Carthage Mills; 2). Propex; 3). US Fabrics; ACCESSORIES A. Masonry Cleaner: 1. Hand wash stone veneer with clean, potable water and bristle brushes. 2. Demonstrate the proposed cleaning technique on Mock-ups before proceeding with final cleaning of dry-placed stone wall assembly. 3. Do not use detergent or other cleaners containing acid. 4. If pressure washing is proposed, contractor will demonstrate competency with pressure washing technique to the Architect, and obtain Architect s written approval, before DRY-PLACED STONE APR 2011

87 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION proceeding with final cleaning. A. Verification of Conditions: Examine conditions, with Installer and A/E present, for compliance with requirements, and proceed with work only when conditions are acceptable after each unsatisfactory condition has been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordination Items - Sub-Base, See CIVIL DRAWINGS, and as follows: 1. Preparation: a. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum. b. Identify known below grade utilities. Stake and flag locations. c. Protect benchmarks and existing structures from construction operations. d. Maintain and protect existing utilities remaining which pass through work area. e. Upon discovery of unknown utility or concealed conditions, discontinue affected work; notify Architect. f. Installer to process stone selected from the site, and prepare each one for installation. 2. Erosion Control: Erosion control shall be installed prior to beginning earthwork operations. 3. Trenching. Trenches for constructing stone walls shall be excavated to a depth of 18 inches and to a width of 36 inches, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, or directed by the Architect. 4. Fill and Gravel Placement: Place fill/granular borrow, if and as needed, and compact to 90 percent Proctor. Then place crushed gravel to datum indicated and compact to 95% Procter, as indicated. Compaction operations shall occur in maximum 4 inch lifts. 3.3 SETTING OF DRY-LAID STONE WALLS A. Dry Laying Stone: 1. Lay stones to line and in courses roughly leveled up. 2. Bottom, or foundation, courses shall be composed of large stones and are to be laid to form a relatively flat surface upon which the succeeding courses may be placed. 3. Open spaces about the foundation (or base) of the wall shall be filled in with suitable engineered fill material excavated from the trench. 4. All stones shall be laid with bearing beds parallel to the natural bed of the material. 5. Select stones, roughly squared, are to be used at the ends and at angles in the wall. 6. Foundation courses shall consist of the large stones and the thinnest courses shall be placed towards the top of the wall. B. Wall Size: Stone wall shall have a width of not less than 24 inches and a height of 3 feet above the surrounding ground surface, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, or as directed by the A/E. C. Bearing: Care must be taken to insure that each stone takes a firm bearing at not less than three separate points upon the underlying course. D. Joints: 1. Open joints shall be chinked and spalls fitted to provide firm bearing throughout the length of the stone. 2. Face joints shall not exceed 1 inch in width unless otherwise directed by the Architect. 3. Chinking shall be permitted only in horizontal joints in the faces. Chinking of vertical joints in wall faces shall NOT be permitted. E. Header Stones: 1. Header stones shall hold in the heart of the wall and must extend not less than 12 inches DRY-PLACED STONE APR 2011

88 into the core, and shall occupy not less than one-fourth of the face area of the wall and shall be evenly distributed. 2. Header stones in walls, 2 feet or less in thickness, shall extend entirely through the wall. F. Tie Stones: 1. The top of the wall must be finished with a slight 2 percent slope and shall contain tie stones that extend entirely across the width of the wall. 2. Tie stones shall make up no less than one-fourth of the stones in the course. 3. All stones used in the top course shall have a width of no less than 8 inches and a thickness of at least 3 inches. 3.4 CLEANING A. Stone Cleaning: Clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains and foreign materials before setting. B. Waste Management: Remove and properly dispose of debris from dry-laid stone construction in accordance with SECTION and AHJ. 1. All excess material shall be removed and disposed of and the work area shall be left in a clean and neat condition satisfactory to the Architect. END OF SECTION DRY-PLACED STONE APR 2011

89 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION QUARRIED STONE VENEER A. Section includes, but is not limited to, furnishing and installing the following work: 1. Full-bed rubblestone veneer anchored to CMU and/or concrete backup in a typical rubblestone installation with full mortar collar joint (at wall base) 2. Full-bed split face stone veneer anchored to stud backup in a typical cavity wall with air space (above rubblestone). 3. Dimension limestone accent elements: wall caps, sills, watertable transition, etc. 4. Stone masonry mortar 5. Accessories: a. Stone veneer anchoring b. Dimension limestone accents anchoring c. Masonry through wall flashing d. Rubblestone drainage matt and weep system e. Stone veneer cavity wall rigid insulation f. Miscellaneous masonry wall components 6. New masonry cleaning B. Products Installed But Furnished Under Other Sections: 1. SECTION , METAL FABRICATIONS: metal items built into the masonry work. 2. SECTION , FLASHING AND SHEET METAL: Sheet metal wall copings and sill cap flashings. C. Related Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including GENERAL and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and Section , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to this Section. 1. DIVISION 03 / STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS: For embeds and/or dovetail slots in concrete for anchoring stone veneer. 2. SECTION , METAL FABRICATIONS: Shelf angles, structural supports, and metal fastenings. 3. SECTION , FLASHING AND SHEET METAL: Coping and sill flashings. 4. SECTION , JOINT PROTECTION: Control joint sealant. 5. SECTION , TILING: Bluestone exterior paving work. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Abbreviations and Acronyms: SECTION B. Reference Standards as noted in this section, in SECTION , and current editions of the following: 1. ACI. American Concrete Institute; a. ACI-530 Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures 2. ASTM. ASTM International; a. ASTM C568, Standard Specification for Dimension Limestone b. ASTM C270, Mortar for unit masonry. 3. MIA. Marble Institute of America, a. MIA (DSDM), Dimension Stone Design Manual QUARRIED STONE VENEER APR 2011

90 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Procedures per SECTION B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer s product data, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations for each STONE variety proposed for use on Project, include data on physical properties and origins of stone specified. 1. Mockup Materials: Submit list product names together with manufacturers, source of supply, and other information necessary to identify each material used including mix proportions for mortar and source of aggregates. C. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings for DIMENSION LIMESTONE ACCENT including full layout and dimensions of fireplace, typical coursing, and other cut stone elements, with each piece labeled to correspond to its precise setting location, and a location plan. D. Verification Samples: Submit for approval three (3) representative samples of each color, grade, finish and variety of stone required, including full color range to be expected in final, fabricated product. 1. Limestone Sample Size: Min. 10 x 20 inch 2. Rubblestone Sample Sizes: Min. 6 x 6 inch E. Qualification Statements: Installer. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company with a minimum of ten (10) years successful experience specializing in work of the type required by this section. B. Single Source Responsibility: 1. Stone: Obtain each variety of stone, regardless of finish, from a single quarry with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. 2. Mortar: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar component from a single manufacturer with each aggregate from one source or producer. C. Mock-ups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. 1. Build mockups for each type of stone veneer assembly in sizes approximately 48 x 48 inch by full thickness, including face and backup. a. Include through-wall flashing, anchors, drainage matt, flashing, weeps and all components of the masonry wall assembly. b. Clean mockup according to the proposed cleaning method. c. Contact Architect for review and approval of mockup only when panel is cleaned and mortar color has cured. 2. Approval of Mockups is for color, texture and finishing of stone; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to stone colors, tooling of joints and aesthetic qualities of the masonry workmanship. a. Approval of materials list product data or of mockups do NOT constitute approval of deviations to the Contract Documents. Each deviation and/or substitution request shall follow the Product Substitution Process, and if successful, the Contract Modification Procedures stated in SECTION Protect accepted Mockups from the elements. 4. Remove Mockups not considered Benchmark Installations at Substantial Completion, unless otherwise directed by the Architect. D. Benchmark Installation: A Mockup built as part of the final Work is considered a Benchmark Installation and, if approved and undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion, may become part of the completed Work. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, and SECTION QUARRIED STONE VENEER APR 2011

91 requirements. 1. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: Closely coordinate deliveries to minimize on-site material storage. 2. Storage and Handling Requirements: a. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover and in a dry location. b. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. c. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. d. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 3. Packaging Waste Management: Pallets and cartons shall be returned to the supplier for reuse or recycling. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Protection of Stone Veneer Assemblies: During construction, cover tops of masonry walls, projections and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day s work. Cover partially completed masonry assemblies when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down face of wall surface and hold cover securely in place. B. Stain Prevention: Immediately remove mortar and soil to prevent them staining the face of the stone veneer assembly. 1. Protect base of masonry walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on the ground and over the wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window- and door-frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at end of each day to prevent rain from splattering mortar and dirt on completed masonry. C. Ambient Conditions: Follow cold weather masonry construction and protection procedures outlined in the IMIAWC Cold Weather recommended practices. 1. Wet Conditions: a. If ice or snow has formed on masonry bed, remove by carefully applying heat until top surface is dry to the touch. b. Remove all masonry deemed frozen or damaged. c. Use dry masonry units. Do not use wet or frozen units. 2. Construction requirements while masonry Work is progressing and air temperature is: a. 40 F to 32 F: Heat sand or mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40 F and 120 F. b. 32 F to 25 F: Heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40 F and 120 F. Maintain temperatures of mortar on boards above freezing. 3. Protection requirements for newly completed masonry and mean daily air temperature is: a. 40 F to 32 F: Protect masonry from rain and snow for 24 hr. by covering with weather-resistive membrane. b. 32 F to 25 F: Completely cover masonry with weather-resistive membrane for 24 hr. c. 25 F to 20 F: Completely cover masonry with insulating blankets or equal protection for 24 hrs. d. 20 F and Below: Maintain masonry temperature above 32 F for 24 hrs. by enclosure and supplementary heat, or electric heating blankets, or infrared lamps, or other approved methods. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS QUARRIED STONE VENEER APR 2011

92 A. Quarried Stone Veneer: 1. Rubblestone Veneer (at the wall base over CMU and/or concrete backup with full mortar collar joint assembly): Noir Dauphinais quarried by Carrieres Ducharmes, as submitted by Trowel Trades Supply, Inc., Colchester, VT, Fabrication shall produce the following characteristics: a. Bed surfaces shall be natural quarry bed. b. Stone faces shall be selected for natural, weathered faces, not sawn, with some faces split or broken, to produce a generally dark gray color with some light beige and tan weathering. A significant proportion of the stones will have more than one possible face for use. c. Face area from 0.5 sf to 2.5 sf. d. Bed depth shall be selected for dimensional tolerance of 3 to 6 inch. Backs will be natural, not gauged, split or sawn. 2. Split Face Stone Veneer (cavity wall assembly anchored to stud backup): Eramosa limestone vein split face, quarried by Owen Sound Ledgerock, as submitted by Trowel Trades Supply, Inc, Colchester, VT, Fabrication will produce the following characteristics: a. Each bed surface shall be sawn top and bottom. b. Vein split face and split backs, showing the horizontal, sedimentary veining visible across the stone faces. c. Bed depth shall be gauged by the guillotine splitter at 3.5 inch d. Heights will be determined by coursing design e. Lengths will be random up to 30 inch with broken or sawn ends to be dressed in field. B. Dimension Stone Accent Elements: 2.2 MIXES 1. For Sills, Wall Caps and as indicated: Provide Eramosa dimension limestone, meeting or exceeding the requirements of ASTM C568, Standard Specification for Dimension Limestone, as submitted by Trowel Trades Supply, Inc., Colchester, VT, , to be fabricated as follows: a. Vein cut orientation for all vertical faces b. Sawn and sandblasted finish on all exposed faces, unless noted otherwise c. Honed finish where noted on the Drawings d. Drip edge required along bottom of all elements proud of the wall face. e. Fabrication tolerances of cut stone accents shall conform to the guidelines in the MIA Dimension Stone Design Manual: Limestone, Chapter 6, Section 3.1. A. Setting Mortar: 1. For All Stone Veneer Assemblies: Type N natural gray mortar mixed on site or factory preblended per ASTM C270 proportion requirements, using portland cement conforming to ASTM C150, Hydrated Lime meeting ASTM C207, and washed masonry sand meeting ASTM C144, natural color. 2. Add pigment as required and allow Architect to choose from the full pallet of available mortar color options. 3. Do not use mortar admixtures, including air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellant agents, antifreeze compounds, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cold Weather Admixture: not permitted. 5. Water: Potable. B. Pointing Mortar: 1. For pointing raked out joints between dimension stone accent elements, use Type N natural gray mortar mixed to a less soupy consistency more suitable for pointing. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Stone Veneer Anchors QUARRIED STONE VENEER APR 2011

93 1. Materials: Stainless Steel wire tie per ASTM A580, Type Screw-attached Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a stainless steel wire section for attachment over sheathing to studs, and as follows: a. Product: Heckman Building Products Pos-I-Tie stone veneer anchor, to be installed as the stone veneer is being laid, where coursing permits, at stud locations, approximately 1 anchor per 2.5 sf of wall surface. 1). Anchor Section: Zinc alloy barrel selected to correspond to the thickness of the sheathing and rigid insulation indicated, with flanged head with eye and corrosion resistant self-drilling screw. Eye designed to receive wire tie section and serve as head for drilling fastener into framing. a). Barrel length to suit sheathing and insulation thickness, allowing screw to seat directly against framing with flanged head covering hole in sheathing. 2). Wire Tie Section: Stainless Steel Triangular shaped 3/16 inch x length required to project halfway into the stone veneer wythe. B. Dimension Stone Anchors: 1. Cut-to-size limestone accent elements, sills, watertable, lintels, etc, bearing on full bed masonry, shall be anchored back to the structure at the quarter points of each stone element, using stainless steel bent plate anchors inserted into field cut kerfs in the stone. 2. Anchor length shall be selected to assure the bend engages the kerf at the midpoint of the stone element. a. For fine adjustment to extend anchor length, use horseshoe shaped Korolath shims. b. Anchor fasteners shall be appropriate for the structural substrate. C. Through-Wall Masonry Flashing 1. Compound Membrane Flashing: Hyload Elvaloy, thickness 40 mil, Gray color. a. Stone Veneer on Stud Backup: Hyload Elvaloy surface-adhered S/A flashing with builtin drip edge. b. Stone Veneer on Concrete and CMU Backup: Hyload Elvaloy Membrane. c. Primer: Hyload Surface Primer for application to sheathing before adhering the S/A Membrane, and to prime CMU and concrete backup. d. Mastic: Hyload Mastic to adhere Hyload Membrane to CMU and concrete backup, and to seal all laps in the Membrane flashing. Lap minimum 6 inch. 2. End Dams & Corners: Provide pre-formed Hyload cloaks to detail end dams, interior and exterior corners, level changes and special applications. a. Provide standard type cloaks for most conditions, and special shapes as needed to meet design requirements. D. Masonry Veneer Weeps: 1. Stone Cavity Weeps: Provide weeps by Masonry Technology, Inc., placed over masonry through wall flashing at all locations where flashing occurs. E. Rubblestone Veneer Wall Drainage Matt / Rainscreen: 1. Acceptable Product: Provide Driwall Rainscreen 075-1, by Keene Building Products, or Sure Cavity by Masonry Technology, Inc a. Place behind rubblestone veneer assembly where full mortar collar joint is used. b. To provide a drainage plane behind the mortar collar joint staple rainscreen mat over exterior sheathing and membrane surface continuously across the entire wall area to be covered by rubblestone veneer. F. Control Joint (Expansion Joint) Filler: 1. Basis of Design Product: Provide Dur-O-Wal DA-2015 Rapid Expansion Joint, 4.5 pcf density, black, closed cell, neoprene/sbr rubber, designed for use as a vertical expansion/control joint between stone masonry veneer panels. a. Fill with backer rod and seal with Bondaflex PUR 25 polyurethane sealant or an Architect approved equivalent. 1). Sealant color as selected by Architect from full range of available sealant colors. QUARRIED STONE VENEER APR 2011

94 G. Cavity Wall Insulation: 1. Provide Type IV, 25 psi, rigid, extruded polystyrene insulation board, of thickness indicated. a. Basis of Design Product: Foamular 250 by Owens Corning or an Architect approved equivalent. H. Masonry Cleaner: 1. Hand wash stone veneer with clean, potable water and bristle brushes. 2. Demonstrate the proposed cleaning technique on the sample wall before proceeding with final cleaning of stone veneer assembly. 3. Do not use cleaners containing acid. 4. If pressure washing is proposed, contractor will demonstrate competency with pressure washing technique to the Architect, and obtain Architect s written approval, before proceeding with final cleaning. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine conditions of substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements, and proceed with work only when conditions are acceptable after each unsatisfactory condition has been corrected. 1. Examine surfaces indicated to receive masonry veneer assemblies, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other field conditions affecting performance. 2. Examine wall framing, sheathing and air-barrier to verify that stud locations are suitable for spacing of veneer anchors and that installation will result in a weatherproof covering. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordination Items: 1. Work by Others: Advise installers of other work about specific requirements for placement of reinforcement, veneer anchors, flashing and similar items to be built into the stone veneer assemblies. a. Weatherproofing Membrane by Others: SECTION Insulation: Install rigid insulation after the Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing has been installed by others. Mark stud locations clearly on rigid insulation. a. NOTE: Do NOT place tape on joints. Leave joints between insulation boards un-taped to prevent double membrane and allow moisture to escape to the exterior drainage system. 3. Drainage Mat: As the stone veneer is being laid, staple the drainage matt directly over the rigid insulation being careful to keep track of stud locations. B. Field Engineering (Stud Framing): Accurately mark stud centerlines on face of sheathing before installing masonry veneer anchors to assure anchor fasteners will be connected to the stud flange. C. Anchors: Install veneer anchors through the rigid insulation and sheathing to connect directly into the stud backup, with approx. 1 anchor per 2.5 square feet as coursing permits. 1. Seal each penetration caused by veneer anchors with silicone sealant. See SECTION D. Stone Cleaning: Clean dirty or stained stone veneer surfaces by removing soil, stains and foreign materials before setting. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. All Work shall be performed according to the requirements of ACI-530 / : Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures and Related Commentaries. ( QUARRIED STONE VENEER APR 2011

95 3.4 SETTING OF RUBBLESTONE VENEER, GENERAL A. Field Cutting: Perform necessary field cutting, as stone is set. Use brick hammers and hand chisels to cut and shape the individual stones to fit the random pattern. Cut control joints and butt end lines straight and true with power saws if necessary, with edges eased slightly to prevent snipping. B. Trim to Fit: Arrange and trim stones for accurate fit in roughly square, roughly rectangular horizontal pattern with no four-way joint intersections and no soldiers, that is, stones set in an orientation where the height is greater than the length. C. Setting: Set stones with full mortar bed and head joints approximately 1/2 inch wide, struck with the concave joint finish. Insert smaller stones into spaces between larger stones as needed to produce mortar joints as uniform in width as practical. D. Cavity Fill: Fill space between rubblestone veneer and drainage matt with a full mortar collar joint. Full mortar collar joint will go directly against the drainage matt material, with the filter fabric side of the drainage matt facing out. E. Blending: Arrange stones with color and size variations uniformly dispersed for an evenly blended appearance. F. Brush Clean: Brush stone veneer work during installation to minimize the need for aggressive cleaning measures. G. Control Joints: Provide vertical control joints at locations as indicated on the plans. H. Flashing at Masonry: Install masonry through-wall flashing at wall base, shelf angles, lintels, sills and at obstructions to downward flow of water in the wall, and where indicated. I. Flashing at Stud Walls: Extend flashing from exterior face of veneer under the membrane and up the face of the sheathing at least 8 inch. Lap all flashing minimum of 6 inch and seal all flashing laps with Hyload Mastic. J. Weeps: Place the Stone Cavity Weep material directly on top of the through-wall flashing, then place mortar bed on top of the Stone Cavity Weep. Trim Stone Cavity Weep material flush with the rubblestone wall face. 3.5 SETTING OF SAWN-BED SPLIT FACE STONE VENEER A. Typical Cavity Wall Construction: Set sawn bed split face veneer stones in coursing as indicated on drawings. B. Provide clear space behind the split face veneer. C. Set stones so minimum bond overlap is 6 inch. Dress ends of stones to minimize difference between concave and convex faces of split faces. D. Mortar joints should be approximately 1/2 inch struck with the concave jointer. 3.6 SETTING OF DIMENSION STONE ACCENTS A. Set accent elements on full-bed masonry bearing surface in precise locations as designated on approved shop drawings and setting drawings. B. Anchor each element to the structure with stainless steel bent plate tie-back anchors installed at the quarter points of each element and fastened back to the structure with the appropriate fastener. C. Set stones on Korolath shims in a full bed of Type N setting mortar. Rake back setting mortar 1/2 inch to 3/4 inch and allow to cure. D. After setting mortar has cured, fill the raked out joints with Type N pointing mortar and strike slightly concave. 3.7 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: 1. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. QUARRIED STONE VENEER APR 2011

96 2. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet or 3/4 inch in 40 feet or more. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: Verify that each expansion and control joint is properly spaced and installed. B. Correcting Non-Conforming Work. Remove and replace stone veneer assemblies of the following description: 1. Stone work not matching approved samples, mockups, and benchmark installations. 2. Stone work not complying with other requirements indicated on the Drawings and in the Specifications. 3.9 CLEANING A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone walls as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean stone veneer as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrapers. 2. Test cleaning method on mockup and obtain Architect s written approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with final cleaning. 3. Conditions permitting perform final cleaning of masonry walls within two (2) weeks of Substantial Completion. C. Waste Management: Remove and properly dispose of debris from quarried stone and mortar in accordance with SECTION and AHJ. END OF SECTION QUARRIED STONE VENEER APR 2011

97 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION METAL FABRICATIONS A. Provide design engineering, fabricating, delivery, erecting and/or installing of shop fabricated metal products as follows: 1. Loose steel angles, channels, and threaded rod supports 2. Steel plate and pipe ladders 3. Steel rod, plate, pipe and tube railings, pickets, and posts 4. Steel plate chimney flue and collar transition 5. Metal anchors and fasteners B. Shop fabricated steel products design engineered, fabricated, delivered, and furnished by this Section for erection and/or installation Under Other Sections: 1. Lintels to SECTION , CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 2. Elevator Hoistway Divider Beams to SECTION , RESIDENTIAL ELEVATORS C. Related Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including GENERAL and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and SECTION , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to this Section. 1. DIV 03 & 05 / STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS: Metal fabrications placement in concrete; structural steel specifications 2. SECTION , CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY: Metal fabrications placement in CMU 3. SECTION , QUARRIED STONE VENEER: Metal fabrications placement in masonry 4. SECTION , ROUGH CARPENTRY, for wood blocking for anchoring railings 5. SECTION , PAINTING AND COATING: Paint finish 6. SECTION , FIREPLACE SPECIALTIES: Coordination with fireplace flue construction. 7. SECTION , RESIDENTIAL ELEVATOR: Rails 1.2 REFERENCES A. Referenced Standards per SECTION , and current editions of the following: 1. ANSI. American National Standards Institute; a. ANSI A American National Standard for Ladders -- Fixed -- Safety Requirements 2. ASME. American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 3. ASTM. ASTM International; 4. AWS. American Welding Society; a. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society 5. SSPC. The Society for Protective Coatings; ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal railings into concrete and masonry. 1. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. METAL FABRICATIONS APR 2011

98 2. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Procedures: See SECTION B. Shop Drawings: Unless otherwise required by Structural, submit drawings for all shop fabricated and galvanized metal indicating profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, bearing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details. 1. Drawings for installed products indicated to comply with design loads. 2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. C. Samples: Submit two (2) 3 x 6 inch samples of each metal finishes, and of factory-applied coating systems proposed for use for approval prior to coating application. D. Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Railing Prototypes. Provide materials or assemblies of each railing unit type for Architect s review and approval prior to fabrication production indicating: 1. Each different welded and bolted joint connection detail 2. Each different support, and exposed fastener 3. Bends, angles and corners 4. Finishes B. Mock-ups: Furnish metal fabrications to other sections as needed to construct mock-ups. C. Certifications: Lead-free galvanizing 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, and SECTION , and as follows: 1. Deliver finish coating paint materials to galvanizer with label or product data sheet affixed to the manufacturer's containers showing manufacturer's name, type of paint, stock number, batch number, label analysis of solids and vehicle, reducing instructions, thinning instructions, drying and recoat time, application instructions with recommended methods, environmental restrictions and MSDS sheets. 2. Remove containers without labels, or illegible defaced labels, permanently from premises. 3. Store paint materials in an accepted location reserved only for such materials and relocated equipment in compliance with applicable health and fire regulations of AHJ. 4. Each container showing damage to the extent that spillage of contents is visible shall be rejected and removed permanently from the site. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawing submittals. B. Environmental Limitations: Metal exposed to moisture shall have a protective coating, unless noted otherwise. C. Compatibility with Adjacent and Finish Materials: Protect against galvanic reaction between dissimilar metals with a protective coating. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer / Special Warranty: Prepare and submit in accordance with SECTION Galvanizing Visible Rust: Provide written twenty (20) year material warranty that METAL FABRICATIONS APR 2011

99 galvanizing shall be free from 10 percent or more visible rust, issued by the manufacturer upon completion of the work and beginning on the date of Substantial Completion. 2. Galvanizing Finish Coating: Provide written ten (10) year material warranty for galvanizing coating finish, issued by the manufacturer upon completion of the work and beginning on the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE / DESIGN CRITERIA A. Structural Performance of Railings: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/foot (0.73 kn/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kn) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/foot (0.73 kn/m) applied in any random direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kn) applied in any random direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kn) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sf (0.093 m 2 ) b. Uniform load of 25 lbf/sf (1.2 kn/m 2 ) applied horizontally. c. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2.2 MATERIALS - STEEL A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/ A36M B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500 (cold formed) C. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, & Flat Bars: ASTM A666; Type 316 D. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A276; Type 316 E. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A283/ A283M; Grade C or D F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/ A53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish. G. Bronze Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Bars: ASTM B36 / B36M, Alloy UNS No. C28000 (muntz metal, 60 percent copper) H. Bronze Extrusions: ASTM B455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (extruded architectural bronze) I. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: 1. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exposed exterior use; and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at concealed exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 2. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Hexagon-head bolts, with hex nuts and, where indicated, flat round washers. a. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36 b. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3/ B18.6.7M c. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1/ B M d. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B / B18.22M e. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B / B M f. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488, conducted by a qualified independent testing METAL FABRICATIONS APR 2011

100 agency. 1). Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components lead-free zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2). Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F593/ F738M and nuts complying with ASTM F594/ F836M. 3. Stainless Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless steel bolts, nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. J. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded. K. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15; lead- and chromate-free; complying with VOC limitations of AHJ; compatible with topcoat finish. L. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of AHJ. M. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187. N. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.3 FABRICATION - GENERAL A. Metal Fabrication - General: 1. Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes for components exposed to view in the completed Work. 3. Unless galvanized, provide primed surfaces ready for field paint finishing. 4. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1mm), unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. 5. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. 6. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. 7. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. B. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. C. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. D. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. 1. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. 2. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. 3. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. E. Exposed Connections: Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flathead (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous and as approved by the Architect. F. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. G. Tolerances: 1. Squareness: 1/8 inch max. difference in diag. measurements 2. Max. Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch METAL FABRICATIONS APR 2011

101 3. Max. Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch 4. Max. Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches 5. Max. Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches 2.4 STEEL RAILING FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of indicated rod, tube or pipe, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads. 1. Configuration: As indicated B. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. C. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. D. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6mm) or less. E. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work. 1. Connect posts to framing supports with indicated and approved fasteners. 2. For galvanized railings, provide galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous-metal components as indicated. 3. For non-galvanized railings, provide non-galvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry and concrete construction. F. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material, where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate. 2.5 OTHER FABRICATED ITEMS A. Loose Steel Lintels: As detailed; galvanized finish. B. Shelf Angles: As detailed; galvanized finish. C. Steel Weld Plates and Angles: As detailed; galvanized finish. D. Bollards: Steel pipe, concrete filled, crowned cap, as detailed; galvanized finish. 2.6 FINISHES - STEEL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2. C. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. D. Prime Painting: One coat factory-applied high-solid polyamide epoxy primer, 3.0 mils dry film thickness minimum. 1. Manufacturer and Product List. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: a. Tnemec 27 Typoxy b. DuPont Corlar 25P c. Rustoleum 3500 d. Substitution Limitations: See product requirements in Section E. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel: 1. General: METAL FABRICATIONS APR 2011

102 a. Surface Preparation: Clean steel in accordance with SSPC-SP 1, solvent wipe followed by SSPC-SP 7, Brush-Off blast clean to produce minimum mil profile. b. Galvanizing bath shall contain 0.05 to 0.09 percent nickel and other earthly materials. c. The dry kettle process shall be used to eliminate any flux inclusions on the surface of the galvanized material. Prior to galvanizing, the steel shall be immersed in a pre flux solution (zinc ammonium chloride). The pre flux tank must be 12 to 14 deg Baume and contain less than 0.4 percent iron. The wet kettle process is prohibited for products used on this project. d. Galvanizing shall exhibit a rugosity (smoothness) not greater than 4 rug (16-20 microns of variation) when measured by a profilometer over a 1 inch straight line on the surface of architectural and structural elements that are less than 24 pounds per running foot. Profilometer shall be capable of operating in 1 micron increments. 1). Surface blasting prior to application of factory-applied post galvanizing wet coatings will produce a high rugosity and not be acceptable. 2. Structural Steel Members: Galvanize fabricated products after fabrication to ASTM A123/ A123M requirements. a. Minimum Thickness: 1.7 oz/sf galvanized coating; minimum 3 to 4 mils 3. Non-structural Steel Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/ A123M requirements; minimum 3 mils 4. Hardware, Anchors and Fasteners: Galvanize to requirements of ASTM A153; minimum 3 mils F. Stainless-Steel Finishes: Bright, Directional Satin Finish: No. 4. G. Bronze: Oil rubbed; US10B/ 613 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates, for installation as work of other sections. C. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Installation - General: Comply with fabricator and galvanizer requirements for installation of materials and fabrications, including use of nylon slings or padded cables for handling factoryprimed or factory-finished materials. B. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects, securely anchored but allowing for expansion-contraction movement. C. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. D. Field weld components as indicated by the Drawings in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 1. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 2. Remove welding flux immediately. 3. Grind welds smooth at exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. METAL FABRICATIONS APR 2011

103 E. Galvanizing Filed Touch-Up and Repair: For damaged and field-welded metal coated surfaces, clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas. 1. Comply with requirements of ASTM A Galvanizing repair paint shall have 65 percent zinc by weight, and match adjacent galvanized surface thickness. 3. Touch-up of galvanized surfaces with aerosol spray, silver paint, bright paint, brite paint, or aluminum paints is not acceptable. 4. Touch-up finish in conformance with manufacturer s recommendations for each factoryprimed or factory-finished surface needing repair. a. Provide touch-up such that repair is not visible to the Architect from a distance of 6 feet. 5. Provide a touch up repair kit with each order. F. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. G. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. H. Railing Installation: 1. Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. a. Space posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. b. Plumb posts in each direction. c. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction. 2. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. a. Provide bracket with 1-1/2 inch (38mm) clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. b. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. c. Secure wall brackets to building construction. I. Tolerances: 1. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per floor level, non-cumulative 2. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch 3. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections in accordance with SECTION : Field welds; DFT (dry film thickness) of galvanizing. B. Non-Conforming Work: Fix as directed by General and Supplementary Conditions, and SECTION , General Requirements meeting each Contract Document requirement to the approval of the Architect. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0 mil (0.05mm) dry film thickness. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair leadfree galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780. C. Comply with construction waste management and disposal requirements of SECTION PROTECTION A. Protect installed work from construction operations until date of Final Completion or Owner occupancy, whichever occurs first. METAL FABRICATIONS APR 2011

104 END OF SECTION METAL FABRICATIONS APR 2011

105 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION ROUGH CARPENTRY A. Section includes, but is not limited to, furnishing and installing the following work: 1. Wood Boards: Select or common 2. Dimension Lumber: Structural light framing, light framing, studs, decking, structural joists and planks 3. Timbers: Beams and stringers, posts and timbers 4. Wood treatments 5. Accessories including, but not limited to, metal connector plates, structural connectors, fasteners B. Related Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including GENERAL and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and SECTION , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to this Section. 1. SECTION , FINISH CARPENTRY 2. SECTION , THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING: Roofing nailers and decking 3. SECTION , TOILET ACCESSORIES: Grab bars and other wall-mounted accessories 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Alternate No. 2: Work of this Section is affected by SECTION , Alternates 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See SECTION , for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed descriptions of materials, components, treatment systems, performance criteria, fasteners, brackets, hangers, gusset plates, adhesives, finishes, use limitations, recommendations and installation information. C. Samples: Submit printed material for each type of proposed fastener, hanger or other accessory. Submit three (3) of each accessory for Final Selection. D. Certificates: Certificates of Grade and kiln drying (KD); FSC chain-of-custody certificates. E. Test and Evaluation Reports: By an independent testing laboratory showing reduced strength values and design stress reduction values for all fire retardant wood and plywood. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Provide fire retardant treatment that complies with FHA requirements. B. Qualifications: Supplier shall be a firm capable of providing Third Party Certification that wood materials were sourced from sustainably managed forests. C. Certifications: Wood timber and manufactured wood products shall be sourced from sustainably managed forests as certified by SmartWood, SCS, BVC, or PwC, and displaying the FSC label. D. Sustainability Standards and Certifications: 1. Certified Wood Materials: Meeting FSC-STD chain-of-custody requirements. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery, Storage and Handling per supplierr s written recommendations, and requirements of ROUGH CARPENTRY APR 2011

106 SECTION WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: Contractor shall provide Wood Treatment manufacturer s twenty (20) year limited warranty against structural damage due to termites, carpenter ants and fungal decay. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install rough carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. B. Existing Conditions: Locate concealed framing, blocking and reinforcements that support woodwork and document on shop drawings before work is enclosed. All preparatory support work shall be subject to inspection and approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS / FABRICATORS A. FSC Certified Wood in Vermont Sources: ( ( B. FSC / SmartWood Certified Resource Managers of Vermont Timber 1. Essex Timber Company, LLC, Ipswich, MA; (manages old Champion International lands) 2. Fountain Forestry Incorporated, Montpelier, VT; Marsh-Billings-Rockefeller National Historical Park, Woodstock, VT; Redstart Forestry, Corinth, VT; C. FSC Certified Lumber Wholesalers in VT: 1. Currier Farms Forest Products, Danville, VT; Lumberjack Lumber, Inc., White River Junction, VT; 3. Vermont Family Forests, Bristol, VT; ; D. FSC Certified SPF Framing Lumber Sources: 1. Pleasant River Lumber, Dover-Foxcroft, ME; E. Sawmills in VT List: (200+/- sawmills. ( F. Substitution Limitations: Manufacturers of equivalent products shall be considered when submitted in accordance with SECTION DESCRIPTION A. Regulatory Requirements 1. Mechanically Graded Lumber: Machine stress-rated lumber (MSR) or machine evaluated lumber (MEL) and grade stamped as conforming to the American Lumber Standard or Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB) and ASTM D Visually Graded Lumber: Lumber visually graded by trained graders for appearance and strength factors according to PS20 rules as enforced by regional organization such as NeLMA and others. 2.3 MATERIALS A. General: 1. Hardwood: Provide solid wood lumber and veneers per performance requirements. 2. Softwood: Provide solid wood lumber and veneers per performance requirements. 3. Solid wood grain pattern cut a. Quarter sawn (straight-grained, edge grained or straight-grained) ROUGH CARPENTRY APR 2011

107 b. Rift sawn B. Structural and Framing Lumber: 1. Per US DoC PS20 or Canadian NLGA, and applicable grading rules of the inspection agency, as certified by ALSC's Board of Review for wood species as included in the Work: a. NeLMA Grading Rules: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 3. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency. C. Wood Decking: FSC certified 1. Wood Species: Ipe 2.4 WOOD TREATMENTS A. Wood Treatment: American Wood-Preservers Association AWPA Standards; use category UC1 or UCFA; use only hexavalent chromium-free and arsenic-free treatment materials. 1. Waterborne Preservative Material: AWPA P5 using one or more of the following materials. a. Alkaline Copper Quat: ACQ-D per AWPA P29, or ACQ-B per AWPA P27 (for Western wood) b. Copper Azole: CA-B per AWPA P32, or CA-C (Wolmanized) per AWPA P48 c. Sodium Borates: SBX / DOT per AWPA P25; for interior use only d. Zinc Borate: ZB per AWPA P51; for interior use only e. Micronized Copper Quat: MCQ, and MCA / µca-c (EPP certified only) 2. Lumber Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C1, C31; free of halogens, sulfates and ammonium phosphate. 3. Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes: AWPA P17 Lumber; ASTM D Kiln-Dried After Treatment (KDAT) Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum for framing lumber and 15 percent for plywood. 5. Hygroscopic Requirements: Per ASTM D3201 at relative humidity up to 95 percent. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Connectors: Of appropriate type, length and durability for wood product used to securely fasten to the substrate or other wood product for the intended life, exposure, and use of the unit. 1. Metal and Finish: Provide Type 304 stainless steel for exterior exposed connectors and fasteners; all others are as follows: a. Steel Batch Hot-Dip Galvanized (HDG): 1). Fasteners: Hot-dipped galvanized mild steel per ASTM A153/ A153M, class D, for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2). Connectors: Hot-dipped galvanized mild steel per ASTM A123 b. Steel Continuous HDG: Hot-dipped galvanized per ASTM A653 with a G90 or G185 coating. c. Exceptions: Provide Type 304 stainless steel connectors and fasteners for pressure treated wood with actual retention levels greater than 0.40 pcf for ACQ or MCQ, 0.41 pcf for CBA-A, or 0.21 pcf for CA-B (with ground contact). 1). Verify retention levels with preservative treatment facility. 2. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing. 3. Anchors: a. Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. b. Bolts shall be square or hexagonal head machine bolts with matching nuts and cut ROUGH CARPENTRY APR 2011

108 washers. c. Concrete and masonry anchors when not included in the concrete or masonry construction, shall be rust resistant coated machine screws or bolts with standard expansion shield type concrete anchors. 4. Only low velocity type power driven fasteners shall be permitted. Power driven fasteners will not be permitted for use in concrete curbs, along edges of concrete or at concrete joints or in masonry work. B. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation complying with ASTM D3498 with VOC content of 70 g/l or less, that is recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer. C. Glue: NAF aliphatic-resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general carpentry use that complies with VOC & HAP requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION, PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION A. Examination, preparation and installation per manufacturer s current written instructions, industry standards, and SECTION requirements. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and installation area properly prepared. 2. Install wood framing per ANSI / AF&PA NDS-2005, unless otherwise noted. 3. Provide structural and fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated, and as required by AHJ. For perimeter blocking anchorage spacing requirements refer to FM Data Sheet Fasten or anchor materials and units in a concealed manner with fasteners appropriate to use and anticipated durability. Attach rough carpentry work to substrate securely by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with ICC Table , Fastening Schedule, and ICC-ES / ESR-1539, which may supercede the ICC National Evaluation Report NER-272. a. Wood Decking: Blind fastened. 5. Fasten wood and wood products though sound wood, sorting and selecting to avoid characteristic imperfections like knots and checks. 6. Install preservative treated wood in accordance with requirements of applicable codes and related Division 06 Section requirements. 3.2 CLEANING, MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION A. Provide Progress Cleaning, Waste Management, and Provide Final Cleaning per SECTION requirements. B. Provide Initial Maintenance per manufacturer s recommendations. 3.3 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Substantial Completion Requirements per SECTION requirements. END OF SECTION ROUGH CARPENTRY APR 2011

109 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION FINISH CARPENTRY A. Work of this Section consists of milled wood, and includes but is not limited to, furnishing and installing the following work: 1. Millwork, molding and trim a. Door casings b. Window casings c. Mantels d. Baseboards e. Chair-rails f. Picture-rails g. Crown molding h. Interior wood ceiling i. Exterior wood soffit 2. Prefinished Hardboard and Plywood Paneling 3. Profiled Board Paneling 4. Wood treatments 5. Accessories including, but not limited to, fasteners B. Related Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including GENERAL and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and SECTION , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to this Section. 1. SECTION , ROUGH CARPENTRY 2. SECTION , ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 3. SECTION , WOOD SHINGLES 4. SECTION , FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 5. SECTION , WOOD FRENCH DOORS 6. SECTION , STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 7. SECTION , SECTIONAL DOORS 8. SECTION , WOOD WINDOWS 9. SECTION , DOOR HARDWARE 10. SECTION , WOOD FLOORING 11. SECTION , ACOUSTIC WALL PANELS 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Alternate No. 2: Work of this Section is affected by SECTION , Alternates 1.3 REFERENCES A. Abbreviations and Acronyms per SECTION B. Referenced Standards per SECTION , and current editions of the following: 1. ALSC. American Lumber Standard Committee, Inc.; 2. AWI. Architectural Woodwork Institute; a. AWI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards, October 1, 2009 FINISH CARPENTRY APR 2011

110 3. FSC. Forest Stewardship Council; Certified Sustainably Managed Lumber; a. U.S. Product Standard PS 1 for Construction and Industrial Plywood a. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), October 1, 2009 a. CARB Certification Program; b. EPP. Environmentally Preferable Product Grademark Program a. Certifier: Rainforest Alliance SmartWood Program. b. Certifier: Scientific Certification Systems Forest Conservation Program (FCP); c. Certifier: BVC. Bureau Veritas Certification; d. Certifier: Price Waterhouse Cooper LLC (PwC); e. Withdrawn Certifier: SGS Systems & Services Certification USA; a. Standard Grading Rules for Northeastern Lumber 2006 a. Procedures for the Development of Voluntary Product Standards 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data per SECTION , and as follows: Submit manufacturer's printed descriptions of materials, components and systems, performance criteria, use limitations, recommendations and installation information for: 1. VOC information for paintings, coatings, and adhesives. 2. Provide technical data published literature on fire retardant treatment materials. B. Samples per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Initial for Selection: Submit printed color charts or sample chains indicating manufacturer s complete range for each type of prefinished material exposed to view that is not yet selected by Architect or specified. 2. Final Selection: Submit 12 inch (300mm) long sample of each different profile (grain and species for clear finish) with proposed finishes, and fasteners. C. Certificates: 1. Provide certified material FSC-STD chain-of-custody from original material resource to project site. 2. KD Certificate for kiln-dried moisture content by (ALSC) recognized inspection agency. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements 1. Engineered wood shall display the APA trademark. 2. Work shall be in accordance with the AWI (AWS) premium grade. a. Provide AWI (AWS) Quality Certification Program labels and inspection or Certificate indicating that woodwork complies with the requirements of the grades specified. B. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: A firm experienced a minimum five (5) years in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. a. Manufacturer shall be capable of providing Third Party Certification that wood materials were sourced from sustainably managed forests. 2. Supplier: A firm capable of providing Third Party Certification that wood materials were sourced from sustainably managed forests. 3. Fabricator: A firm experienced a minimum five (5) years in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. a. Fabricator shall be capable of providing Third Party Certification that wood materials FINISH CARPENTRY APR 2011

111 were sourced from sustainably managed forests. 4. Installer: Perform installation with skilled, experienced and trained workmen supervised by trained personnel who shall have a minimum three (3) years successful experience in installations of similar size and scope. C. Certifications: Wood timber and manufactured wood products shall be sourced from sustainably managed forests as certified by SmartWood, SCS, SGS, BVC, or CSA and displaying the FSC label. D. Sustainability Standards and Certifications: 1. Certified Wood Materials: Meeting FSC-STD chain-of-custody requirements. 2. Engineered wood shall be made using non-toxic glues, no added formaldehyde, and 100 percent recycled fibers or certified sustainably harvested wood. 3. Composite wood and agrifiber products shall contain no added urea-formaldehyde resins. a. SCAQMD for Architectural Coatings b. SCAQMD for Adhesive and Sealant Applications c. BAAQMD for containers greater than 16 oz. d. California Air Resources Board (CARB) for containers 16 oz. or less. e. Green Seal VOC Standards: E. Mockup Benchmark Installations per SECTION , and as follows: Provide mockup installations of each different millwork type to verify final selections made under sample submittals and prototypes, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standard benchmarks for materials and execution F. Prototypes per SECTION , and as follows. Provide materials or assemblies of each unit type for review and approval prior to benchmarking, manufacturing or fabrication production indicating each different exposed to view: 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery, Storage and Handling per SECTION WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: Contractor shall provide Wood Treatment manufacturer s twenty (20) year limited warranty against structural damage due to termites, carpenter ants and fungal decay. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions per manufacturer s recommendations, SECTION , and as follows: 1. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wood products until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and consistently maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels, and in accordance with manufacturer s recommendations. B. Existing Conditions: 1. Field measurements per SECTION Locate concealed framing, blocking and reinforcements that support woodwork and document on shop drawings before work is enclosed. All preparatory support work shall be subject to inspection and approval of Architectural Woodworker and other trades. 3. Establish dimensions as accurately as project progress allows, provide scribes for site fitting where necessary. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS / FABRICATORS A. Fabricator or Supplier List of FSC Certified Sustainable Millwork or Molding: Subject to FINISH CARPENTRY APR 2011

112 compliance with requirements, provide products by the following (or as listed by VT Woodnet at 1. R.K. Miles, Inc., Manchester Center, VT; x Lumberjack Lumber, Inc., White River Junction, VT; 3. Vermont Wildwoods, Marshfield, VT; 4. Boyce Highlands Inc., Concord, NH; Forest Products Associates, Greenfield, MA; 6. Holt & Bugbee Company, Tewksbury, MA; Katahdin Forest Products, Inc., Oakfield, ME; Residents' Committee to Protect the Adirondacks (CoC), North Creek, NY; x14 B. Manufacturers List of FSC Certified Sustainable Plywood: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Newport Furniture Parts Corp dba Newport Panels Corporation & Newport Gliders, Newport, VT; x Atlantic Plywood Corporation, Woburn, MA; Cowls Building Supply, Inc., North Amherst, MA; Hammond Lumber Company, Belgrade, ME; C. Fabricator or Supplier List of Sustainable VT Millwork or Molding: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Breznick Woodworking, Londonderry, VT; 2. C. W. Hasert, Cabinetmakers, Rutland, VT; 3. Knight Kitchens, North Clarendon, VT; 4. Koenig Cedar Co., South Burlington, VT; 5. Shelburne Fine Woodworking, Shelburne, VT; 6. Vermont Custom Cabinetry, Westminster, VT; 7. Vermont Furniture Works, Stowe, VT; D. Fabricator or Supplier List of FSC Certified Sustainable VT Flooring: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Planet Hardwood, St. George, VT; ; 2. TimberKnee Wide Plank Flooring, South Royalton, VT; 3. Vermont Family Forests, Bristol, VT; ; 4. Vermont Wildwoods, Marshfield, VT; 5. Carlisle Wide Plank Floors, Stoddard, NH; E. Substitution Limitations: Fabricators of equivalent products shall be considered when submitted in accordance with SECTION DESCRIPTION A. Regulatory Requirements: Hardwood Grades per NHLA American Hardwood Lumber Grades, and Softwood Grades per NeLMA (WWPA) Grade. B. Sustainability Characteristics 1. Wood Trim a. FSC certified b. Vermont sourced and produced c. Domestically produced FINISH CARPENTRY APR 2011

113 d. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.3 PERFORMANCE / DESIGN CRITERIA A. Performance Capacities: 1. NHLA Grade: Select 2. NeLMA (WWPA) Grade: C Select 3. Moisture Content: 6 to 9 percent for hardwoods per NHLA B. Design Criteria 1. Solid wood and veneered plywood grain pattern cut a. Quarter sawn (straight-grained, edge grained or straight-grained) with a narrow stripped pattern b. Rift sawn with a narrow stripped pattern (red or white oak only) 2. Wood Species: a. Transparent Finish: 1). Interior Trim: White Oak 2). Exterior Trim: Cedar and/or Mahogany 3). Exterior Soffit: Cedar, stained b. Opaque Paint Finish: Poplar 2.4 MATERIALS A. General: Hardwood or Softwood, solid wood or veneer type, and wood species as indicated by the Drawings. B. Structural and Framing Lumber: 1. Per NIST - US DoC PS20 and applicable grading rules of the inspection agency, as certified by ALSC's Board of Review for wood species as included in the Work: a. NeLMA Grading Rules: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. b. NHLA Rules: National Hardwood Lumber Association. 2. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 3. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency. C. Engineered Wood Products: Refer to SECTION Structural Plywood: Per NIST US DoC PS 1 2. Particleboard (Chipboard, Flakeboard, Waferboard, Strandboard): Per ANSI A Medium-Density Fiberboard (MDF): Per ANSI A Hardboard: Per CPA / ANSI A WOOD TREATMENTS A. Refer to SECTION ASSEMBLY / FABRICATION A. Expansion / Contraction Movement: Assemble wood products using details that allow for expansion and contraction due to changes in environmental conditions. 2.7 FINISHES A. Shop Finishing: 1. Wood Finishing Standards a. Finish System: AWI (AWS) Section 5, Premium Grade, System 11, Polyurethane, Catalyzed b. HMA basics of hardwood FINISH CARPENTRY APR 2011

114 a. Non-Petroleum Based Finish Systems b. Varnishes B. Field Finishing: Per SECTION ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Of appropriate type, length and durability for wood product used to securely fasten to the substrate or other wood product for the intended life, exposure, and use of the unit. 1. Provide Hexavalent chromium-free fasteners. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examination per SECTION PREPARATION A. Preparation per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Layout installation by marking extents of each item, and anchoring / fastening locations coordinated with blocking or other structural support. a. Marks shall be covered up and hidden by installation. b. Locate areas out-of-level and correct. 2. Protect adjacent conditions per SECTION , and as follows: a. Protect adjacent substrates, installed work and existing items from damage by construction operations with temporary effective means. 3. Surface Preparation for Coating System: a. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, and similar items in places that are not to be coated, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. 1). Remove items if necessary for complete sealing or finishing of items and adjacent surfaces. 2). Clean surfaces before applying paint or surface treatments. 3). Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. 4). Schedule cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly-coated surfaces. 5). Following completion of coating operations in each space or area, items shall be reinstalled in the same manner that they were removed. b. Unfinished Wood Surfaces: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper. Sand smooth surfaces exposed to view and dust off. 1). Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before application of primer. 2). Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 3). When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. 4. Product Preparation: Handle products in accordance with manufacturer s instructions and warranty requirement including, but not limited to: a. Remove shipping / storage protection, and exposed labels. b. Acclimatize wood materials to installation location. c. Strictly adhering to manufacturer s handling and installation safety requirements. B. Door and Window Openings: Examine if rough openings are square, plumb and correctly sized. 1. Correct rough openings more than 1/4 inch out of plumb and adjust sole plate. FINISH CARPENTRY APR 2011

115 2. Shim rough opening to doorframe as needed to make plumb and compensate for twist. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Installation per AWI (AWS) premium standard requirements, each product manufacturer s written instructions, SECTION , and the following: 1. General: a. Place finish carpentry to indicated levels and lines, with members plumb, aligned, cut, and fitted. b. Fit finish carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. 1). Provide flush hairline joints. 2). Fit scribe wood to irregularities of adjacent surfaces. 3). Provide biscuit joints at window and door casings c. Shim using concealed shims. d. Allow for expansion and contraction movement of wood material joints due to moisture. e. Abut and align top and face edge surfaces in one true plane, with internal supports placed to prevent deflection. Plane solid wood when necessary to make top and face planes aligned and flush. f. Fasten or anchor materials and units in a concealed manner with fasteners appropriate to use and anticipated durability. 1). Do NOT use chromium-plated metal fasteners and anchors. 2). Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. 3). Make tight connections between members. 4). Install fasteners without splitting wood; pre-drill hardwood and countersink nail heads, fill flush and sand smooth, unless otherwise indicated. 5). Place fasteners, when exposed, aligned in straight rows parallel with edges of members for exposed work, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered. g. Wood with Transparent Finish: Match color and grain pattern. 2. Trim a. Inside Corner: Butt one side-piece to wall, and cope second side piece to fit tight to profile of the first piece. b. Outside Corner: Miter both pieces. a. Doors shall be installed plumb and level. b. Remove each nail or strap used as bracing for prehung door and doorframe. c. Place the hinge jamb atop the thick end of a shim resting on the floor next to the trimmer. d. Fit door into rough opening and adjust as needed until plumb. e. Maintaining plumb, bring edge of hinge jamb flush with drywall and nail to trimmer through the shims. f. For solid-core door, place a 2-1/2 inch screw through the jamb, under doorstop, and into the trimmer next to each hinge. g. Secure head and then strike jambs. h. Reinstall doorstops 1/16 inch (dime) from closed door. i. Install door casings last starting at the top with a head casing setback of 3/16 inch. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests and Inspections per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Allow and facilitate unscheduled inspections of timber stands and complete forestry operations to meet FSC or other sustainability standards. 2. Wood Moisture Content: Test random boards with a moisture meter to verify wood boards meet certified moisture content of the Kiln Dried (KD) certificate. B. Non-Conforming Work per General Conditions and as follows: FINISH CARPENTRY APR 2011

116 1. Remove, Repair and Reinstall or Restore in Place damaged items. a. Finish touch-up damaged surface finishes. b. Apply EPA registered treatment to water-damaged treated lumber. 2. Replace damaged materials or items with New if repair not acceptable to Architect. 3.5 CLEANING A. Waste Management per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Disposal Requirements: a. Handle hazardous waste in strict accordance with manufacturers recommendations and AHJ rules and regulations for materials regulated under RCRA (Resource Conservation and Recovery Act). b. On-site incineration not allowed. 2. Coordinate take-back program with manufacturer, as applicable. a. Store and return pallets, containers and packaging to manufacturer or recycler for reuse or recycling. B. Provide Progress Cleaning per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Work Areas: Continuously clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for safety and proper execution of the Work. a. Clean and maintain completed construction until Substantial Completion. 2. Site: Continuously maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Provide Final Cleaning immediately prior to Substantial Completion inspection per SECTION CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Substantial Completion Requirements per SECTION PROTECTION A. Protect installed work from weather, vandalism and construction operations damage until Final Completion or Owner occupancy, whichever comes first. END OF SECTION FINISH CARPENTRY APR 2011

117 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK A. Work of this Section consists of exterior and interior sustainable architectural woodwork, and includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Architectural Wood Casework a. Solid Wood Architectural Cabinets b. Wood Veneer-Faced Architectural Cabinets c. Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets 2. Stairs and railings 3. Brackets 4. Paneling a. Custom dishwasher front paneling. See SECTION , RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES b. Other custom paneling as indicated 5. Accessories including, but not limited to, fasteners, hardware, edging, cableways B. Related Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including GENERAL and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and SECTION , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to this Section. 1. SECTION , FINISH CARPENTRY: Wood trim, millwork, molding and trim. 2. SECTION , COUNTERTOPS: Solid wood, quarried stone, cultured stone, and solid surfacing countertops 3. SECTION , RESIDENTIAL ELEVATOR: Custom elevator wall and ceiling paneling 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Alternate No. 2: Work of this Section is affected by SECTION , Alternates 1.3 REFERENCES A. Abbreviations and Acronyms per SECTION , and as follows: 1. NAF. No Added Formaldehyde B. Referenced Standards per SECTION and as follows: 1. AWI. Architectural Woodwork Institute; a. AWI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards, October 1, BAAQMD. Bay Area Air Quality Management District; 3. BHMA. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 4. EPA. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; 5. FSC. Forest Stewardship Council; Certified Sustainably Managed Lumber; 6. HMA. Hardwood Manufacturers Association; 7. NeLMA. Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; a. Standard Grading Rules for Northeastern Lumber NHLA. National Hardwood Lumber Association; 9. NIST. National Institute of Standards and Technology; ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK APR 2011

118 a. Voluntary Product Standards (PS) 10. SCAQMD. South Coast Air Quality Management District; SPIB. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Verify each FSC certified material chain-of-custody (CoC) from original material resource to project site. 2. Coordinate hardware and plumbing templates with cabinet fabricator. 3. Coordinate Architect s review of prototype mockups at cabinet fabricator s shop and at project site. B. Preinstallation Meetings per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Meeting purpose shall be to review site conditions, installation procedures, schedules, coordination with other work, and warranty requirements. C. Sequencing and Scheduling: Per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Cabinet Fabricator: a. Certified wood tracked and stored separately. b. Maintain dust control. c. Wood scrap, chips and dust reused, recycled or converted into harnessed energy. d. Uses non-toxic, no HAP, and low or no-voc adhesives and finishes. e. Does not use cadmium or hexavalent chromium-plated materials. f. Harvested forest resource and cabinets within 500 miles (805 km). 2. Jobsite: Certified wood materials stored and tracked separately prior to installation. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. See SECTION , for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed descriptions of materials, components and systems, performance criteria, treatment systems, joinery, adhesives, hardware, finishes, sample warranty, handling requirements, preparation and installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Submit keyed casework and countertop location plans, detailed and keyed plans and elevations indicating materials, dimensions, finishes, hardware, blocking, hanging strips and other attachment requirements, cutouts and holes, power, cabling, wiring, built-in appliances and equipment. 1. Field Measurements: Indicate verified field measurements on the Shop Drawings. 2. For wood paneling with transparent finish indicate by elevation veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification numbers indicating the flitch and flitch sequence for each leaf. 3. Use U.S National CAD Standard (NCS) including Uniform Drawing System (UDS) standard notation for elevations, sections and details. 4. Shop Drawings shall not be copies of the Contract Drawings. D. Samples: 1. Initial for Selection: Submit printed color charts and/or sample chains indicating manufacturer s complete range for each type of material finish exposed to view that is not yet selected by Architect or specified. Match Architect s sample when requested. 2. Final Selection: Submit products for acceptance, those required prior to manufacturing to verify close tolerances, shapes and/or specifically required aesthetics. a. Wood boards for each species and cut finished one (1) side and one (1) edge 5 inches (125mm) wide by 24 inches (600mm) long. b. Minimum three (3) representative wood veneer flitch samples (flitch numbered sets) for each species and cut for transparent finish. ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK APR 2011

119 c. Wood veneer-faced and finished panel products, 12 by 24 inches (300mm by 600mm) for each species, cut and core selected. Include one (1) veneer seam and panel joint. E. Certificates: Submit with manufacturer s signature certifying that each product and/or system meets the requirements of the performance characteristics, physical criteria, and applicable standards specified. 1. AWWI (AWS) Program Certificate 2. Material recycled content F. Test and Evaluation Reports: Submit certified test results by a recognized testing laboratory in accordance with specified test methods for each product and/or system indicating physical, chemical and performance characteristics. 1. Formaldehyde content G. Closeout Submittals per SECTION , unless noted otherwise. 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Including, but not limited to, methods for maintaining installed products and precautions against cleaning materials with methods detrimental to finishes and performance. 2. Executed Warranty Documentation: Manufacturers material warranties and installers workmanship warranty. 3. Record Documents: Drawings, Specifications, and Product Data. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Work shall be in accordance with the AWI (AWS) Premium grade. 1. Provide AWI (AWS) Quality Certification Program labels and inspection or Certificate indicating that woodwork complies with the requirements of the grades specified. B. Qualifications: 1. Fabricator: A firm experienced a minimum five (5) years in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units within required project construction schedule. a. Fabricator shall be capable of providing Third Party Certification that wood materials were sourced from sustainably managed or certified forests. 2. Supplier: A firm capable of providing Third Party Certification that wood materials were sourced from sustainably managed forests. 3. Installer: Perform installation with skilled, experienced and trained workmen supervised by trained personnel who shall have a minimum three (3) years successful experience in installations of similar size and scope. C. Certifications: Wood timber and manufactured wood products shall be sourced from sustainably managed forests as certified by SmartWood, SCS, BVC, or PwC, and displaying the FSC label. D. Sustainability Standards and Certifications: 1. Certified Wood Materials: Meeting FSC-STD chain-of-custody requirements. 2. Engineered wood shall be made using non-toxic glues, no added formaldehyde, and 100 percent recycled fibers or certified sustainably harvested wood. 3. Composite wood and agrifiber products shall contain no added urea-formaldehyde resins. 4. VOC Limits: According to SCAQMD, BAAQMD, and as tested using U.S. EPA Reference Test Method 24 and as defined by: a. SCAQMD Rule 1113 for Architectural Coatings b. Green Seal VOC Standards: 1). GS-11 for Low Odor or Low VOC Paint 2). GC-03 for Anti-Corrosive Paints, Second Edition, January 7, ). GS-36 for Aerosols ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK APR 2011

120 E. Mockups per SECTION , and as follows: Assemblies required for testing, either in the field or off-site. 1. Provide full scale three-dimensional assemblies of each type and style of cabinets required utilizing final specified materials and final production techniques, constructed to be fully tested to ensure that the systems meet the performance requirements of the Specification by application of the maximum applied loads, in-situ conditions, structural movements. 2. Build Mock-up in location and size acceptable to Architect of type specified. a. Notify design professional 7 days in advance of time when mock-up will be installed for approval viewing. b. Demonstrate the anticipated range of materials, workmanship and finish expected. c. Obtain approval in writing before commencing work. Mock-up may be included as a part of the finished project. d. Protect the approved mock-up during construction period as it will be used to comparatively judge the finished installation 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery, Storage and Handling per SECTION WARRANTY A. Fabricator Warranty: Contractor shall provide fabricator s guarantee against structural defects in materials and workmanship for the five (5) years beginning on the date of Substantial Completion acceptance. 1. Defective piece(s) shall be repaired or replaced at the discretion of the fabricator in a timely manner. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions per manufacturer s recommendations, and SECTION B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wood products until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and consistently maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels, and in accordance with manufacturer s recommendations. C. Existing Conditions 1. Field measurements per SECTION Locate concealed framing, blocking and reinforcements that support woodwork and document on Shop Drawings before work is enclosed. All preparatory support work shall be subject to inspection and approval of Architectural Woodworker and other trades. 3. Establish dimensions as accurately as project progress allows, provide scribes for site fitting where necessary. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS / FABRICATORS A. Fabricator List of FSC Certified VT Casework. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Beeken Parsons, Inc., Shelburne, VT; ; 2. J.S. Benson Woodworking & Design LLC, Brattleboro, VT; Shelburne Fine Woodworking, Shelburne, VT; ; SCS-COC Stark Mountain Woodworking Company, New Haven, VT; ; 5. Wilson Woodworking, Windsor, VT; B. Fabricator List of VT Cabinetry and Millwork that uses FSC Certified wood when directed. Subject to compliance with FSC requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cotswold Furniture Makers, Stowe, VT; ; ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK APR 2011

121 2. Fine Lines in Wood, Inc., New Haven, VT; Vermont Green Cabinets, Hinesburg, VT; ; 4. William Laberge Cabinetmakers, Inc., Dorset, VT; ; SCS-COC NCoates Walker, Inc., Milton, VT; C. Substitution Limitations: Manufacturers of equivalent products shall be considered when submitted in accordance with SECTION Substitution Exception: Any FSC certified fabricator listed at DESCRIPTION A. Regulatory Requirements 1. Hardwood Grades: NHLA American Hardwood Lumber SELECT Grade 2. Softwood Grades: NeLMA (WWPA) C-SELECT Grade B. Sustainability Characteristics 1. Cabinetry and countertops a. FSC certified b. Vermont sourced and produced c. Domestically produced d. Salvaged and reused e. Recycled content f. MIC-free agri-board cabinet facing 2.3 PERFORMANCE / DESIGN CRITERIA A. Performance Criteria: 1. Design Loading: a. Shelving, Trays and Cabinet Drawers: Safely support an evenly distributed load of 50 lb (23 kg) per lineal foot b. Furniture Board: Minimum 45 lb (20 kg) density industrial grade c. Drawer Guides: Minimum 100 lb (45 kg) rating full extension B. Design Requirements: 1. Wood or wood composite a. Transparent Finish 1). Grade: Select 2). Species: White oak b. Opaque Finish 1). MDF 2). Poplar c. Plywood: Rift/ quarter sawn 2. Base and Wall Cabinets: Custom solid wood + plywood veneer, frameless & framed as noted, or otherwise selected by the Architect. 3. Color Contrast of Clear Finished Wood: Unless specifically called out, do NOT mix sapwood and heartwood where visible or semi-visible. 2.4 ASSEMBLY / FABRICATION A. General 1. Fabricate units to dimensions, profiles, details, plumbing, hardware, appliances, telecommunications and electrical work indicated by approved Shop Drawings. a. Fit components together to allow for expansion and contraction movement due to changes in environmental conditions. b. Shop assemble each unit in as large a component as practicable to minimize field joining. c. Locate openings accurately using templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK APR 2011

122 accurately sized and shaped openings. d. Locate hardware accurately using templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped letting of properly operating hardware. e. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. f. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. g. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. 1). Verify that various parts fit as intended, adjust as needed, and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment. B. Shop Fabrication 1. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 2. Seal cut edges of wood and engineered wood products to control moisture absorption. 3. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: a. Cabinet Corners and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch (1.6mm). 4. Install hardware when final finishing is complete. a. Adjust and align hardware so that contact points meet and moving parts operate freely. b. After installation allow for final field adjustment. 5. Wood Coatings: a. When Solvent-Based: Low-VOC and no-hap 6. Clean shop-finished surfaces, touch-up and remove or refinish damaged or solid areas, as acceptable to Architect. a. Clean and polish each cabinet and countertop unit. b. Apply protection for shipping not to be removed until just prior to installation. 2.5 FINISHES A. Shop Finishing: 1. Wood Finishing Standards: Provide base stain with clear finish as scheduled. a. Finish System: AWI (AWS) Section 5, Premium Grade, System 11, Polyurethane, Catalyzed B. Field Finishing (Stairs, Paneling Final Coat): Per SECTION ACESSORIES A. Cabinet Hardware and Accessories: Comply with BHMA and Exposed Hardware Finishes: Comply with BHMA A Provide hexavalent chromium-free, lead-free, and arsenic-free metal finishes or coatings. B. Fasteners: Hexavalent chromium-free and of appropriate type and length for wood product used to securely fasten to the substrate for the intended life and use of the unit. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Fabricator Tests and Inspections per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Mock-Up Review: a. Notify Architect when prototype Mockup units are complete and ready for inspection. b. Architect s review of cabinet mockups will occur at fabricator s shop, and at project site for all other mockups. c. Do not proceed with fabrication work until Architect s acceptance and conditional or unconditional release. d. Rejected units shall be removed and modified as noted or otherwise disposed. ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK APR 2011

123 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 1). If rejected units are complete and usable, deliver them to a building material reuse center, if within one hour s drive of project site, or facilitate reuse utilizing a web-based freecycle service. e. Accepted Benchmark Prototype shall remain accessible for viewing during normal business hours until Final Completion. 1). Benchmark prototype mockups shall remain unmodified except as requested by Architect s conditional review. 2). Benchmark prototype mockups accepted unconditionally may be incorporated into the work when meeting all other requirements. A. Examination per SECTION PREPARATION A. Preparation per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Layout installation by marking extents of each item, and anchoring / fastening locations coordinated with blocking or other structural support. a. Marks shall be covered up and hidden by installation. b. GC to locate areas out-of-level and correct. 2. Protect adjacent conditions per SECTION , and as follows: a. Protect adjacent substrates, installed work and existing items from damage by construction operations with temporary but effective means. 3. Product Preparation: Handle products in accordance with manufacturer s instructions and warranty requirement including, but not limited to: a. Remove shipping / storage protection b. Acclimatize product to installation location. c. Strictly adhering to manufacturer s handling and installation safety requirements. 4. Verify field dimensions and squareness of adjacent walls prior to installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Installation per fabricator s written instructions, AWI (AWS), SECTION , and the following: 1. General: a. Keep finish materials parallel to walls and floors. 1). Exception: Cabinets and doors shall be plumb. b. Install casework plumb, level, true and aligned without distortions. c. Shim using concealed shims. d. Where casework abuts other finished work, scribe and apply filler strips for a continuous tight fit with concealed fasteners. Fit scribe strips to irregularities of adjacent surfaces. e. Allow for expansion and contraction movement of wood material joints due to moisture. f. Abut and align top and edge surfaces in one true plane, with internal supports placed to prevent deflection. 1). Provide flush hairline joints in tops. g. Fasten or anchor materials and units in a concealed manner with fasteners appropriate to use and anticipated durability. 1). Do NOT use chromium-plated metal fasteners and anchors. 2). Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. 3). Make tight connections between members. 4). Install fasteners without splitting wood; pre-drill hardwood and countersink nail heads, fill flush and sand smooth, unless otherwise indicated. ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK APR 2011

124 5). Place exposed fasteners aligned in straight rows parallel with edges of exposed members with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered. h. Wood with Transparent Finish: Match color and grain pattern. 2. Tolerances: Provide joint widths not more than 1/16 inch wide at any location, filled and flush with abutting edges. Horizontal alignment of top surface of all joints for their entire length shall be within 1/32 inch. Front edges of all abutting pieces shall align. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Correction of Non-Conforming Work per SECTION B. Fabricators Field Services: Fabricators field representative(s) shall give product use recommendations, and perform site visits to inspect product installation in accordance with instructions and warranty requirements. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjusting per SECTION , and as follows: Adjust each cabinet door and drawer until operation is smooth and acceptable to the Architect and the Owner. 3.6 CLEANING A. Comply with construction waste management and disposal requirements of SECTION , and as follows: 1. Coordinate take-back program with manufacturer, if applicable. a. Store and return pallets, containers and packaging to manufacturer or fabricator or recycler for reuse or recycling. b. Store scrap materials to be returned to manufacturer for recycling into new product. B. Provide Progress Cleaning per SECTION C. Provide Final Cleaning immediately prior to Substantial Completion inspection. 1. Protection: Remove fabricators and other installed protection immediately prior to Substantial Completion inspection, unless otherwise required. 3.7 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Substantial Completion Requirements per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Perform Closeout Procedures. 2. Perform required Demonstration and Training with Owner s designated staff. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect installed materials and casework from construction operations until date of Final Completion or Owner occupancy, whichever occurs first. END OF SECTION ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK APR 2011

125 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION SHEET WATERPROOFING A. Section includes, but is not limited to, furnishing and installing the following work: 1. Rubberized asphalt sheet membrane waterproofing (WP) system 2. Prefabricated drainage composite 3. Protection board 4. Waterstop and other materials as necessary for a complete working installation. B. Related Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including GENERAL and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and SECTION , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to this Section. 1. DIVISION 03 / STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS: Concrete work 2. SECTION , UNIT MASONRY: Block work 3. SECTION , THERMAL INSULATION: Underslab VR tie-in coordination 1.2 REFERENCES A. Referenced Standards per SECTION , and current editions of the following: 1. ASTM. ASTM International; ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Per SECTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Procedures: See SECTION B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer s product data, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations. C. Samples: Submit three (3) representative samples of sheet membrane, protection board, and prefabricated drainage composite for approval. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish system materials from one manufacturer for entire Project, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company with a minimum of ten (10) years experience specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section. C. Installer Qualifications: Company with a minimum of three (3) years experience specializing in work of the type required by this section. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, and SECTION WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: Prepare and submit in accordance with SECTION , and as follows: 1. Sheet Membrane WP: Provide written five (5) year material warranty issued by the WP membrane manufacturer upon completion of the work and beginning on the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS SHEET WATERPROOFING APR 2011

126 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer List. Provide Sheet Membrane WP System by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Grace Construction Products; Cambridge, MA; 2. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc. (CCW); Wylie, Texas; 3. Colloid Environmental Technologies Company (CETCO) Building Materials Group; Hoffman Estates, IL; 4. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Hampshire, IL; 5. Substitution Limitations: Per SECTION MATERIALS A. Sheet Membrane WP: A self-adhesive, cold-applied composite sheet consisting of a thickness of inch (1.4 mm) of rubberized asphalt and inch (0.1 mm) of cross-laminated, high density polyethylene film specially formulated for use with water-based surface conditioner. Provide rubberized asphalt membrane covered with a release sheet, which is removed during installation. No special adhesive or heat shall be required to form laps. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Grace Bituthene System 4000 b. CCW MiraDRI 860/861 c. CETCO Envirosheet or Envirosheet LT d. W.R. Meadows Mel-Rol B. Prefabricated Drainage Composite: As recommended by acceptable manufacturer and designed to promote positive drainage while serving as a protection course. C. Protection Board: As recommended by acceptable manufacturer. 1. Expanded Polystyrene Protection Board: 1 inch (25 mm) thick for vertical applications complying with ASTM C578. Adhere to waterproofing membrane with bituthene protection board adhesive. 2. Asphalt Hardboard: A premolded semi-rigid protection board consisting of bitumen, mineral core and reinforcement. Provide inch (3 mm) thick hardboard on horizontal surfaces not receiving steel reinforced slab. Where steel reinforcing bars are to be used, apply two layers of inch (3 mm) thick hardboard or one layer of 0.25 inch (6 mm) thick hardboard. D. Waterstop: Hydrophilic non-bentonite waterstop for non-moving concrete construction joints, as recommended by acceptable manufacturer. E. Miscellaneous Materials: Surface conditioner, mastic, liquid membrane, tape and other accessories as specified or acceptable to manufacturer of sheet membrane waterproofing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions. Examination per SECTION PREPARATION A. General. Refer to manufacturer s instructions and recommendations for preparation of substrates, and as follows: 1. Surfaces shall be structurally sound and free of voids, spalled areas, loose aggregate and sharp protrusions. 2. Remove dust, dirt, loose stone, debris, and contaminants such as grease, oil and wax from exposed surfaces. 3. Use repair materials and methods acceptable to manufacturer of sheet membrane waterproofing. B. Cast-In-Place Concrete Substrates: SHEET WATERPROOFING APR 2011

127 1. Do not proceed with installation until concrete has properly cured and dried. Minimum 7 days for normal structural concrete, and minimum 14 days for lightweight structural concrete. 2. Fill form tie rod holes with concrete and finish flush with surrounding surface. 3. Repair bugholes over 0.5 inch (13 mm) in length and 0.25 inch (6 mm) deep and finish flush with surrounding surface. 4. Remove scaling to sound, unaffected concrete and repair exposed area. 5. Grind irregular construction joints to suitable flush surface. C. Related Materials: Treat joints and install flashing as recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install according to manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, including but not limited to, the following: 1. Apply surface conditioner at rate recommended by manufacturer. Recoat areas not waterproofed if contaminated by dust. Mask and protect adjoining exposed finish surfaces to protect those surfaces from excessive application of surface conditioner. 2. Delay application of membrane until surface conditioner is completely dry. Dry time will vary with weather conditions. 3. Seal daily terminations with trowelled bead of mastic. 4. Apply protection board and related materials in accordance with manufacturer s recommendations. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Correction of Non-Conforming Work per SECTION CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with construction waste management and disposal requirements of SECTION B. Remove any masking materials after installation. Clean any stains on materials, which would be exposed in the completed work. C. Protect completed membrane waterproofing from subsequent construction activities as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION SHEET WATERPROOFING APR 2011

128 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION THERMAL INSULATION A. Section includes, but is not limited to, furnishing and installing the following work: 1. Thermal insulation: a. Spray-applied dense-pack cellulose b. Foil-faced polyisocyanurate board c. Spray Polyurethane Foam (SPF) 2. Insulation accessories including, but not limited to: a. Vapor Diffusion Retarders (VDR) B. Products Furnished BUT Installed Under Other Sections: 1. SECTION , CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY: Cavity walls and masonry cells. 2. SECTION , BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING: Insulation and insulated drainage panels installed with dampproofing. 3. SECTION , THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING: Insulation specified as part of roofing construction 4. SECTION , FLASHING AND SHEET METAL: Insulation specified as part of standing seam metal roofing construction. 5. SECTION , GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES: Installation in wood-framed GWB assemblies of insulation specified by referencing this Section. C. Related Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including GENERAL and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and SECTION , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to this Section. 1. SECTION , FINISH CARPENTRY: Wood framing. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Definitions per SECTION , and the following: 1. ACH. One (1) complete Air Change within the enclose area (building) per Hour of time. 2. pcf. Lbs/ft 3 or Pounds per Cubic Foot. B. Reference Standards per SECTION , and current editions of the following: 1. ASTM. ASTM International; 2. CIMA. Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; 3. CPSC. U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission; 4. EPA. U.S. Environmental Pollution Agency; 5. GS. Green Seal; 6. SCAQMD. South Coast Air Quality Management District; 7. UL. Underwriters Laboratories; 8. WH. Warnock Hersey, a division of Intertek; ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Per SECTION B. Preinstallation Meetings: Per SECTION SUBMITTALS THERMAL INSULATION APR 2011

129 A. Product Data. Submit manufacturer's printed literature describing materials, components and systems, performance criteria, use limitations, substrate preparation requirements, installation information and other recommendations for the following: 1. Each product, including but not limited to insulation, adhesive, tape, vapor retarder, film. 2. VOC data for each product 3. R-Value of each insulation type per inch, aged (LTTR) 4. Typical joint treatment details B. Samples: Of each type, full-size units or minimum 6 inches (152mm) square and maximum 16 inches (406mm) square. C. Quality Assurance Submittals 1. Test Reports: Submit certified test results by a recognized testing laboratory in accordance with specified test methods for each product and/or system indicating physical, chemical and performance characteristics. 2. Certificates: Submit with manufacturer s signature certifying that each product and/or system meets the requirements of the performance characteristics, physical criteria, and applicable standards specified. a. Certify R-value or U-value including aged LTTR. b. Certify that firesafing materials used are fireproof, inorganic and free of carcinogenic mineral fibers or toxic substances. 3. Manufacturer s Instructions: Installation. 4. Qualification Statements: Submit a letter, on printed letterhead and signed by an officer of the firm, for each listed quality assurance qualification listed, attesting to meeting each requirement called out. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Approvals: 1. Cellulose Insulation shall comply with CPSC 16 CFR 1209 and Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84 3. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E Insecticide, mildecide and fungicide utilized shall be US EPA registered. 6. Energy Star Rating Program Airtightness: To achieve provide <1.5 ACH at 1 psf (50 Pa). 7. Corrosiveness to Aluminum, Copper, Steel and Galvanized Steel: Cellulose insulation system shall be non-corrosive as tested in accordance with ASTM C Adhesive Toxicity: Comply with applicable regulations regarding toxic and hazardous materials, GS-36 for Commercial Adhesive, and SCQMD Rule 1168 and as specified. B. Qualifications: 1. Foam and Cellulose Manufacturers: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum ten (10) years documented experience. a. Licensed by manufacturer of proprietary formulations. 2. Foam and Cellulose Applicators: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three (3) years documented experience. a. Certified by the manufacturer. b. Employees assigned to this project shall be factory trained and certified professionals, equipped with specialized machines designed for this project s application. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of insulation and related accessories through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING THERMAL INSULATION APR 2011

130 A. Comply with manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, SECTION , and as follows: 1. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. 2. Protect Plastic Insulation By: not exposing it to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment; protecting against ignition at all times; not delivering plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time; and completing installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Geotechnical and other reports. 1. Clay and other expansive soils shall not to be used as backfill against perimeter foundation insulation. B. Environmental Limitations: Protection of Plastic Insulation 1. Do not expose rigid insulation to sunlight, except to extent necessary to install and conceal. 2. Protect rigid insulation against ignition. Cover with fire-rated covering, an approved 15 minute thermal barrier. C. Ensure compatibility of each insulation with adjacent and finish materials PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE / DESIGN CRITERIA A. Design Criteria: 1. Insulation is to be a contiguous envelope on all six sides and sealed air and water-tight around each fenestration. 2. Carefully design location of dew point as to not create a moisture issue. 3. Vapor retarders, when specified, are to be provided as one contiguous monolithic sealed enclosure, and sealed tight around each fenestration. B. Performance Criteria: 1. Insulation R-values for walls, roofs and at grade: a. Minimum R-32 for walls b. Minimum R-45 for roofs c. Minimum R-16 for under slab-on-grades 2. Plenum Rating tested in accordance with UL 181 for erosion, mold growth and humidity. 3. Whole Building Airtightness: <0.1 ACH at 50 Pa using blower door test per SECTION Article 1.1.F SPRAY-APPLIED DENSE-PACK CELLULOSE INSULATION A. Cellulosic-Fiber Insulation: Chemically treated for flame-resistance, processing, and handling characteristics. Conforms to CPSC Standards 16 CFR Parts 1209 & Acceptable Manufacturer List. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Nu-Wool Insulation Company, Inc. (MI); ; b. National Fiber (MA), a licensed franchised manufacturer of Nu-Wool Cellulose Insulation for Northeast America; ; c. Igloo Cellulose (Dorval Quebec H9P 2V3); ; d. Fiberlite Technologies, Inc. Joplin, MO; ; e. Hamilton Manufacturing, Inc., Twin Falls, ID; ; f. Substitution Limitations: NO substitutions THERMAL INSULATION APR 2011

131 2. Cellulose insulation shall meet each of the following test and performance requirement: a. Dense Pack: Settled Density per ASTM C739: >3.0 pcf (48.1 kg/m 3 ) 1). R-Value: Minimum 3.7 per ASTM C518 at 75F. b. Surface Burning Characteristics per ASTM E84: Class 1 or Class A c. Wet Spray Applied Cellulose per ASTM C1149: Type II 1). R-Value: Minimum 3.8 per inch per ASTM C518 at 75F. d. Moisture Vapor Sorption: Less than 15 percent for maximum weight gain. e. Fire resistive, pesticide, mildecide, fungicide and/or preservative treatment shall be a 100 percent boron 10 system, which includes elements of boric acid, EPA registered sodium polyborate and EPA registered disodium octaborate tetrahydrate. 1). Cellulose insulation shall not support mildew or fungal growth "even under adverse conditions." 2). Sulfate-based (ie. ammonium sulfate) fire resistive treatments are not acceptable. 3). Corrosiveness to Aluminum, Copper, Steel and Galvanized Steel per ASTM C739: Non-corrosive. f. Recycled Content Requirement: >75 percent post-consumer recovered paper 2.3 SPRAY-APPLIED POLYURETHANE FOAM (SPF) INSULATION A. Spray-applied Polyurethane Foam (SPF) Insulation: 1. Manufacturers. Subject to requirements select products from the following: a. BASF Polyurethane Foam Enterprises LLC; Product Wall-tite: b. Demilec (USA) LLC; HEATLOK SOY: c. North Carolina Foam Industries; Product Insulbloc: d. Substitutions: See Section R-value (aged) per ASTM C518: Not less than R6.5 per inch 3. Closed cell content: >90% 4. Air Permeance as tested per ASTM E283: Less than Liters per sec per square meter 5. Compressive Strength: Min. 25 psi, when tested in accordance with ASTM D Density: Min. 2 pcf, when tested in accordance with ASTM D Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/smoke developed index of 25 / 450, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Foam Sealants (FS) (for use within enclosed exterior metal door, window or louver frames, roof insulation joints, gaps and at miscellaneous penetrations and air barrier component seams shall be as follows: 1. For Window and Door frame applications requiring low-expansion use: Pur fill 1 G, non- CFC, low expansion, water cure polyurethane foam. Provide with a Pageris foam gun applicator. Surface Burning Characteristics when tested in accordance with ASTM E84: Class A 2. For locations where appropriate for full-expansion, use: two-component closed-cell urethane full-expansion foam sealant for limited areas as an alternate to bulk quantities of spray-applied foam. a. Manufacturers: 1). Instafoam Froth Paks 2). Handi Foam 3). Zero-Draft C. Miscellaneous Air Sealing Materials: Provide caulking with approved caulking compound at all locations requiring air infiltration sealing that are too small (3/16 inch or less) for foam sealants. D. Accessories: 1. Primer: As required by insulation manufacturer THERMAL INSULATION APR 2011

132 2. Overcoat: Thin-film water-based fireproof paint type, spray applied a. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively, based on tests performed on un-faced core by ASTM E84 test method. 2.4 FOIL-FACED POLYISO BOARD A. Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C1289; Type I - aluminum-foil-faced on top and bottom sides; Class 2 - glass-fiber reinforced polyisocyanurate foam core; Class A per ASTM E Basis-of-Design Manufacturer / Product: Provide Dow Chemical Company / Thermax ( or an Architect acceptable equivalent subject to requirements select products from one of the following: a. Certainteed / FlintBoard ISO F; ; b. Substitutions: Section UNDERSLAB INSULATION A. Underslab Insluation on Grade: ASTM D 1621, High Load, Extruded Polystyrene Insulation, conforming to the following: 1. Thermal Resistance: R of 5.0 per inch 2. Thickness: Meeting R Compressive Strength: Minimum 60 psi 4. Water Absorption: ASTM C272; maximum 0.1 percent by volume 5. Edges: Square edges B. Acceptable Products and Manufacturers: 1. Styrofoam XPS by Dow Chemical 2. Foamular XPS by Owens Corning 3. GreenGuard Extruded Polystyrene Insulation Board by Pactiv 4. Substitutions: See Section UNDERSLAB VAPOR DIFFUSION RETARDERS (VDR) A. Under Slab VDR: ASTM E1745, Classes A, B, & C; flexible, preformed sheet membrane materials to be used as a vapor barrier in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. 1. VDR Basis of Design - Product by Manufacturer : Viper VaporCheck by Insulation Solutions, Inc., or Architect acceptable equivalent from the following: a. W.R. Meadows / Perminator; b. Stego Industries / Stego-Wrap; 2. Thickness: Minimum 10 mil [15 mil] B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape with adhesive on one face; of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. 1. Moisture Vapor Transmission: Maximum 0.50 perm C. Single-Component Non-sag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Type I, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT related to exposure, and Use O related to vapor-barrier-related substrates. 2.7 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. 2.8 INSULATION FASTENERS A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in THERMAL INSULATION APR 2011

133 place; and complying with the following requirements: 1. Manufacturers / Products. Subject to requirements select products from the following: a. AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers. b. Eckel Industries of Canada; Stic-Klip Type N Fasteners. c. Gemco; Spindle Type. 2. Plate: Perforated galvanized carbon-steel sheet, inch (0.762mm) thick by 2 inches (51mm) square. 3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low carbon steel; fully annealed; inch (2.67mm) in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated. B. Adhesively Attached, Angle-Shaped, Spindle-Type Anchors: Angle welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position indicated with selflocking washer in place; and complying with the following requirements: 1. Manufacturers / Products. Subject to requirements select products from the following: a. Gemco; 90-Degree Insulation Hangers. b. Architect acceptable equivalent. 2. Angle: Formed from inch (0.762mm) thick, perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet with each leg 2 inches (51mm) square. 3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low carbon steel; fully annealed; inch (2.67mm) in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated. C. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from inch (0.41mm) thick galvanized steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38mm) square or in diameter. 1. Manufacturers / Products. Subject to requirements select products from the following: a. AGM Industries, Inc.; RC150. b. AGM Industries, Inc.; SC150. c. Gemco; Dome-Cap. d. Gemco; R-150. e. Gemco; S-150. f. Architect acceptable equivalent per SECTION Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap. D. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates. 1. Manufacturers / Products. Subject to requirements select products from the following: a. AGM Industries, Inc.; TACTOO Adhesive. b. Eckel Industries of Canada; Stic-Klip Type S Adhesive. c. Gemco; Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive. E. Staples or Nails: ASTM F1667, zinc coated, size and type best suited for purpose. F. Screws: ASTM C954 or ASTM C1002, size and length best suited for purpose with washer not less than 2 inches (51mm) in diameter. G. Impaling Pins: Steel pins with head not less than 2 inches (51mm) in diameter with adhesive for anchorage to substrate. Provide impaling pins of length to extend beyond insulation and retain cap washer when washer is placed on the pin. 2.9 PEST CONTROL A. Pest Control: Coordinate between installation of pest control, masonry weeps, and insulation. 1. Physical Barriers: Insects and Rodents a. Stainless steel mesh barriers with minimum openings of 0.66mm x 0.45mm shall be applied over potential entry points into the foundation, such as service pipe penetrations, control joints, brick or block piers, and as indicated by the Drawings. THERMAL INSULATION APR 2011

134 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions. Examination per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation and adhesive. 2. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond. 3. Verify that surfaces are clean, dry, and free of matter that may inhibit insulation or overcoat adhesion. 4. Verify work within construction spaces or crevices are complete prior to insulation application. 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates. B. Coordinate schedule of installation with Owner to ensure building is not occupied during installation. Identify and block all fresh air ventilation intakes into the building with plastic sheets to prevent fumes from entering the building. C. Mask and protect adjacent surfaces from over spray or dusting. D. Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION GENERAL A. Exterior envelope insulation is to be a contiguous six sided envelope, and sealed air and watertight around each fenestration to meet air sealing requirements of SECTION B. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer s written application instructions, as per the Drawings and Specification. C. Install insulation as a contiguous envelope on all sides, including roofs, exterior walls and at grade; make airtight around each fenestration. 1. Secure insulation in place to prevent shifting and discontinuity of the insulation envelope. 2. Allow for material and building movement. 3. Fit insulation tight against adjoining construction, penetrations and tight to fenestration frames, unless noted otherwise. a. Fill voids around penetrations and fenestrations with insulation. 4. Insulation thickness to uniformly to achieve R-Value performance for each surface plane as called out by the Drawings, or where not called out, as specified. D. Install rigid insulating units with joints close and flush, in regular courses and with cross-joints overlapping. 1. Align and space rigid insulation joints with building movement joints. 2. Seal perimeter and around penetrations with compatible materials as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Glass-Fiber Drainage Panel Backfilling: Coordinate with Civil Drawings to insure foundation footing drain tile and gravel system extends vertically up face of drainage board a minimum 8 inches (203mm) to promote conductivity. E. Maintain 3 inch (76mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures. F. Framing: Use insulation widths and lengths that fill cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 1. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between THERMAL INSULATION APR 2011

135 edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. G. Do not close-up or foam pipe or other chases until inspection reviews by AHJ and the Architect have been approved. 3.4 INSTALLATION BY METHOD A. Spray-Applied Cellulose Insulation: 1. Install spray-applied cellulose insulation in accordance with ASTM C1015 and CIMA Technical Bulletin #3, the manufacturer s written application instructions, and as per the Drawings and requirements. a. Installation shall be made only by manufacturer certified or an approved applicator using manufacturer recommended material and equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer s instructions. b. Coordinate cellulose insulation installation with other adjoining insulations and airbarrier systems, sealing edges to provide a contiguous thermal and air envelope. 1). Coordinate systems to meet similar airtight and watertight performance requirements. c. Damp Spray-Applied Method: Spray into cavities, let set and wire cut excess proud of stud faces. 1). Ensure that electrical or other boxes and conduit are sealed from the cavity. 2). Pneumatically spray cellulose insulation with a controlled water fog for adhesion into open wall cavity locations as called out by the Drawings and Specification. a). Apply wet-spray cellulose to a maximum 30 percent moisture content by weight. 3). Vacuum cuttings and overspray during application, placing them into the second hopper for re-application. a). Maintain separation of recycled material from new material for quality control of moisture content. 4). Have installation inspected for moisture content and cover with gypsum wallboard approximately twenty-four (24) to forty-eight (48) hours after application. 5). Total drying time is approximately thirty (30) to forty-five (45) days, depending on climate and application. B. Foamed SPF (Spray-applied polyurethane Foam) Insulation: 1. SPF Insulation: Install to specified thickness or R-value all exterior walls, insulation infill at roof/wall transitions, and other exterior sheathing penetrations to form a completely sealed thermal envelope. Install per manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, and as follows: a. Process a two-component urethane foam system with 1:1 ratio by volume, positivedisplacement, industry-standard pumping equipment. b. Monitor and maintain the component ratio and mix the components of the urethane chemicals in accordance with the manufacturer's product specifications and processing instructions to achieve the desired density and physical properties. Verify the product component ratio with flow meters and programmable ratio monitoring equipment that can prevent the installation of product that is off-ratio by more than the manufacturer s prescribed limits. c. Monitor and maintain the component temperatures in accordance with the manufacturer's product specifications and processing instructions to achieve the desired density and physical properties. d. Apply to a minimum or average cured depth as required in the contract documents. Average thickness specifications will be to a 1/2+ inch tolerance. e. Spray the mixed foam onto the substrate in multiple rises -- increments as recommended by the manufacturer. f. Ambient and substrate temperatures must be in accordance with the manufacturer s minimum requirements during and for the minimum duration of the recommended curing period after the installation. THERMAL INSULATION APR 2011

136 C. Rigid Board: g. Mask areas to be protected from overspray. 1. Vertical: Set insulation units with spindle type anchors or in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive or other method recommended by insulation manufacturer. a. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 48 inches (1.2m) below exterior grade line. b. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying protection course with joints butted. 2. Horizontal: Loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. a. Protect top surface from damage during concrete Work by applying protection course with joints butted. 3. If recommended by insulation manufacturer, seal joints between rigid insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant. 4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves. D. Vapor Retarder (VR): 1. Install vapor barrier directly under slab on grade and on top (warm side) of underslab rigid insulation board. Lay across top of footing and beyond. After exterior foundation waal is constructed fold up VR and tie into waterproofing. 2. Allow for material and building movement. 3. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. a. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment. Cover with vapor-retarder tape and/or another layer of vapor retarder. 4. Seal overlapping and butt joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's written instructions. 5. Seal joints caused by penetrations including, but not limited to, pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections by an independent testing agency under per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Conduct a timed, field density check at the beginning, middle and end of each day s application of rigid board, foamed-in-place and sprayed insulation. a. Inspect Rigid Insulation for proper fit, and tape seal. b. Inspect SPF for verification of insulation and overcoat thickness. c. Inspect sprayed cellulose at irregular intervals for water content. Take freshly sprayed cellulose, which should feel damp, but shall not be able to squeeze water out of a handful. 2. Conduct Visual Inspection, Infrared Scope and Blower Door Testing per SECTION CLEANING A. Waste Management and Disposal Requirements per SECTION PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation, air barriers and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, or other causes. THERMAL INSULATION APR 2011

137 1. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION THERMAL INSULATION APR 2011

138 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION SLATE ROOFING A. Fabricating, furnishing, delivering, erecting and installing the following Slate Roofing work: 1. Slate shingles 2. Integral flexible flashings 3. Waterproof underlayment 4. Accessories as needed to provide a complete watertight installation meeting requirements B. Products furnished and installed by this Section BUT specified under other sections: 1. Metal flashings specified under Section Flashing and Sheet Metal 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. The Conditions of the Contract and General Requirements of the Project Manual apply to this Trade Contractor, material suppliers, and all other persons furnishing labor and materials under this Section. General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and applicable parts of Division 01 are included as part of this Section. 1. SECTION , ROUGH CARPENTRY: Wood underlayment and support framing 2. SECTION , FINISH CARPENTRY: Wood fascia and trim 3. SECTION , THERMAL INSULATION 4. SECTION , FLASHING AND SHEET METAL: Metal flashing, gutters and snow guards. 1.3 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Alternate No. 1: Work of this Section is affected by SECTION , Alternates. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards per SECTION , and current editions of the following: 1. ASTM. ASTM International; 2. NRCA. National Roofing Contractors Association; a. NRCA MS104 - The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual b. NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual 3. NSA. National Slate Association; 4. SMACNA. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; a. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual 5. SRCA. Slate Roofing Contractors Association; SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Procedures: See SECTION B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer s published literature of product data, quarry material properties, colors, finishes, substrate preparation, installation instructions, use limitations and other recommendations. C. Samples: Minimum five (5) Slate shingles, anchors, fasteners, flashings, and underlayments. 1. Slate 2. Accessories for Slate Roofs: SLATE ROOFING APR 2011

139 a. Metal flashing b. Flexible flashing c. Sealants d. Underlayment Membrane e. Fasteners D. Certificates: Material E. Qualifications: Submit documentation showing qualifications of personnel proposed to perform the roofing work, and a list of installations made identifying when, where, and for whom the installations were made. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Provide workers, trained and experienced in installing slate roofing systems of this configuration, and submit documentation of five (5) consecutive years of work of this type. 1. Show familiarity with and perform work in accordance with SMACNA (ASSM) and NRCA B. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish slate materials from one same quarry and manufacturer for entire Project, unless otherwise approved by Architect. C. Benchmark Installation: Provide per SECTION ; provide minimum 10 x 10 ft mock-ups until accepted as a Benchmark Installation by the Architect. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, NRCA MS104, SECTION , and as follows: 1. Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened bundles and containers with the manufacturer's brand and name marked clearly thereon. 2. Store shingles in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and roll goods on-end in an upright position. Do no store materials on roof decks in such a manner as to overstress and/or damage the deck and supporting structure. Avoid placing of loads at mid-spans of framing so that superimposed loads are well distributed. 3. Immediately before laying, store roofing felt for 24 hours in an area maintained at a temperature not lower than 50 deg F (10 deg C). 1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Perform slate roofing operations when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and warranty requirements. 1. Roofer shall proceed with slate shingle installation only after all penetrating work has been completed correctly, the substrate is dry, and weather conditions are favorable. B. Provide temporary protection materials maintained on the site at all times for temporary roofing, flashing, and other protection when delays and/or changed weather conditions do not permit completion of each unit of work prior to the end of each working day. Remove and discard materials that have been used for temporary roofing, flashing and other protection. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Furnish a warranty against defects in material and workmanship of slate roof assembly, including related metal flashing for a period of ten (10) years from date of final acceptance of the work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE / DESIGN CRITERIA A. Slate Roofing System: Gray-green, semi-weathering, unfading type, natural cleft slate roofing in graduated lengths and random widths, fastened with copper nails onto #30 asphalt-saturated sheet felt, except elastomeric membrane underlayment at ridges and valleys. SLATE ROOFING APR 2011

140 2.2 MATERIALS A. Submit certificates of compliance attesting that the materials meet specification requirements. B. Slate: Provide slate conforming to ASTM C406. Slate shall be Grade A, (ASTM S1), hard, dense rock, punched or drilled for two nails each. Cracked slate shall not be used. Exposed corners shall be full. Broken corners on covered ends, which sacrifice nailing strength or the laying of a watertight roof will not be allowed. Submit three representative shingles to show color range. 1. Standard Thickness Roofing Slate: Slate shall be natural cleft 3/16 to 1/4 inch (5 to 6 mm) thickness. a. Slate shall be the following sizes: graduated lengths and random widths. 2. Slate Color: Gray-green, semi-weathering, unfading type, matching Architect s sample from Evergreen Slate. C. Underlayment Membrane: Furnish an underlayment membrane on all surfaces to be covered with slate. Membrane shall consist of asphalt-saturated felt with high strength composite selfadhering membrane in valleys and on ridges. D. Nails: 1. Roofing Felt Roofing felt shall be asphalt-saturated rag felt, Type II, No. 30 asphalt felt in accordance with ASTM D226 / D226M. 2. Elastomeric Membrane Underlayment: Membrane shall be a cold applied composite selfadhering membrane of not less than inch / 40 mil (0.10 mm) high strength polyethylene film with slip resistant embossing, coated on one side with a thick layer of adhesive-consistency rubberized asphalt, interwound with a disposable silicone coated release sheet. a. Tensile strength and elongation values shall be not less than 1.7 MPa 250 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D412 and pliability shall be unaffected when tested in accordance with ASTM D146. b. Basis of Design Product and Manufacturer: Ice & Watershield by Grace Construction Products, or an Architect acceptable equivalent from one of the following: 1). 640 Ice-O-Late by Polyken Technologies, Div. of Kendall Co. 2). Weather Watch Ice & Water Barrier by GAF Building Materials, Corp. 3). Substitution Limitations: See product requirements in SECTION Elastomeric Membrane Accessories: Two component urethane, mastic and primer shall be as approved by the membrane manufacturer. Flashing, expansion joint covers, temporary UV protection and corner fillets shall be as recommended by the membrane manufacturer. 1. Nails shall be large-headed Slater's solid copper nails of Number 10 or 11 gage metal. 2. Nails shall be 3d for slates 18 inch (450 mm) or less in length; 4d nails shall be used for slates 20 inch (500 mm) or longer, and 6d nails shall be used for slates on hips and ridges. 3. Proper size shall be determined by adding 1 inch (25 mm) to twice the thickness of the slate. 4. Nails shall be of sufficient length to adequately penetrate the roof sheathing. 5. Nails used to retain copper flashing and slate at rake edges, hips, ridges, and eaves prone to wind damage shall be of the ring shank design. Otherwise provide smooth design nails. E. Sheet Metal Flashing: Flashing shall be terne coated stainless steel or terne coated copper type in accordance with requirements as specified under SECTION F. Elastic Cement: Elastic cement shall be an approved brand of waterproof elastic slater's cement colored to match as nearly as possible the general color of the slate. G. Sealants, where required, shall be in accordance with the slate manufacturer's recommendations. Submit 237 ml 8 ounces of each type. See SECTION ACCESSORIES FOR SLATE ROOFS A. Crickets or Saddles: Provide crickets of light rafter construction covered with sheathing, underlayment, and copper sheet metal specified in SECTION If the cricket area is large SLATE ROOFING APR 2011

141 and exposed to view, it shall be slated the same as other roof areas. B. Snow Guards: Provide nonferrous metal snow guards, as indicated. See SECTION PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions. Examination per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Roof Surface Protection: Use equipment (such as padded ridge ladders) and techniques to prevent damage to roof as a result of foot or material traffic. B. Surface Preparation: 1. Roof deck surfaces shall be smooth, clean, firm, dry, and free from loose boards, large cracks, and projecting ends that might damage the roofing. 2. Foreign particles shall be cleaned from interlocking areas to ensure proper seating and to prevent water damming. 3. Prior to installation of slate, vents and other projections through roofs shall be properly flashed and secured in position, and projecting nails shall be driven firmly home. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install according to manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, SMACNA (ASSM), NRCA MS104, Slate Roofs by the National Slate Association, and the following: 1. Establish units of work, including removal of existing materials, preparation of existing surfaces and application of underlayment, nailers, and related temporary and/or permanent flashing. 2. Progression of work shall be laid out to prevent other trades from working on or above completed roofing. 3. Vertical surfaces that project through the roof surface at a right angle to the slope of the roof shall have a cricket or saddle built into the roof to divert water away from the back of the vertical member, as indicated. 4. Contractor is responsible for controlling breakage of new or existing slate beyond what is indicated. 5. Personnel who are working on the roof shall wear proper shoes that will not damage slates; shoe soles shall also be made of a material that will aid in preventing falls. B. Roofing Felt Installation: 1. Lay felt in horizontal layers with joints lapped toward eaves and at ends at least 2 inches (50 mm), and secured along laps and at ends as necessary to hold the felt in place and protect the structure until covered with the slate. 2. Felt shall be preserved unbroken, tight and whole. 3. Felt shall lap hips and ridges at least 12 inches (300 mm) to form a double thickness and shall be lapped 2 inches (50 mm) over the metal of valleys or built-in gutters. 3.4 INSTALLATION - WATERPROOF MEMBRANE UNDERLAYMENT A. Surface Preparation: Remove dust, dirt, loose nails or other protrusions. B. Membrane Application: 1. Apply membrane according to manufacturer's instructions and adhere it directly to roof deck. 2. Cut membrane into 10 to 15 foot (3 m to 4.5 m) lengths and re-roll it. 3. Peel back the release paper 1 to 2 feet (300 to 600 mm); align the membrane on the lower SLATE ROOFING APR 2011

142 edge of the roof when the first 1 to 2 feet (300 to 600 mm) are placed. 4. Peel back the release paper under the membrane and press membrane into place. 5. Roll lower edges of membrane firmly with a wallpaper or hand roller. 6. Overlap membrane ends and edges a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). Do not fold membrane onto an exposed face at the roof edge. 8. Valley and Ridge Application: a. Cut membrane into 4 to 6 foot lengths (1.2 to 1.8 m). b. Peel back the release paper and center over the valley or ridge, then drape and press in place, working from the center of the valley or ridge outward in each direction. c. Valleys: Apply membrane starting at the low point and working upwards. d. Overlap all sheets a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 9. Vertical Membrane Flashings: a. Apply primer prior to the membrane application. b. Apply primer at a coverage rate of sf / gal (6-9 m 2 / L). c. Turn up membrane at walls and dormers as indicated on the Drawings. d. Mechanically fasten vertical membrane terminations and trowel mastic as approved by the membrane manufacturer. e. Membrane may be folded onto the fascia, provided it will be covered by a gutter metal edge or other material. 3.5 INSTALLATION - METAL FLASHING A. Install sheet metal flashing at intersections of vertical or projecting surfaces through the roof or against which the roof abuts, such as walls, parapets, dormers, and sides of chimneys. 1. Install in accordance with SECTION SLATING B. Slate Coursing: 1. Project slate 2 inches (50 mm) at the eaves and 1 inch (25 mm) at gable ends, and lay in horizontal courses with 3 inch (75 mm) head-lap (unless otherwise indicated), and each course shall break joints with the preceding one by at least 3 inches (75 mm). 2. Slates at eaves or cornice line shall be doubled and canted 1/4 inch (6 mm) by a wooden cant strip, using same thickness slate for under-eaves at first exposed course. 3. Under-eave slate shall be approximately 3 inches (75 mm) longer than exposure of first course. 4. There shall be no through joints from the roof surface to the underlayment. C. Nailing: 1. Fasten each slate with a minimum of two copper nails of sufficient length to penetrate the roof decking at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) or through the decking thickness, whichever is less. 2. Where the underside of roof decking is exposed to view (i.e., overhanging eaves), nails shall be long enough to penetrate the roof decking but not so long that they may be driven through the decking. 3. Heads of slating nails shall just touch the slate and shall not be driven "home" or draw the slate, but left with the heads just clearing the slate so that the slate hangs on the nail. 4. Nails in slates overlapping sheet metalwork shall not puncture the sheet metal. 5. Exposed nails are permissible only in top courses where unavoidable, but covered with elastic cement. 6. Hip slates and ridge slates shall be laid in elastic cement spread thickly over unexposed surface of under courses of slate, nailed securely in place and pointed with elastic cement. D. Vertical Surfaces: Fit slate neatly around pipes, ventilators, chimneys and other vertical surfaces. E. Hips: Hips shall be laid to form a saddle hip as shown. SLATE ROOFING APR 2011

143 F. Ridges 1. Ridges shall be laid to form saddle ridges. 2. Combing slate nails shall pass through joints of slate below. 3. Lay combing slate with the same exposure as next course down. 4. Combing slates sloping away from the direction of the prevailing storms shall project 1 inch (25 mm) above combing slate on the opposite side of ridge. G. Valleys 1. Valleys shall be laid to form open valleys. 2. Open-type valleys shall be formed with the main roof at cricket areas. 3. Cricket size is largely determined by roof condition. 4. Unless noted otherwise, cricket slope shall be same as roof slope. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Correction of Non-Conforming Work per SECTION CLEANING A. Comply with construction waste management and disposal requirements of SECTION END OF SECTION SLATE ROOFING APR 2011

144 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION WOOD SHINGLES A. Work of this Section includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Factory finished wall shingles 2. Wood trim 3. Rainscreen 4. WP barrier 5. Accessories as needed for a complete wood shingles system installation C. Related Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including GENERAL and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and SECTION , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to this Section. 1. SECTION , ROUGH CARPENTRY: Wall framing support system. 2. SECTION , FINISH CARPENTRY: Shingles and trim installation. 3. SECTION , JOINT PROTECTION 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Alternate No. 2: Work of this Section is affected by SECTION , Alternates 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Referenced Standards per SECTION , and current editions of the following: 1. ALSC. American Lumber Standard Committee; a. Lumber Grading Rules 2. ASTM. ASTM International; 3. NeLMA. Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. a. Standard Grading Rules for Northeastern Lumber PS. Public Standard - United States Department of Commerce Standard PS20 a. Procedures for the Development of Voluntary Product Standards 5. SPIB. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; 6. WWPA. Western Wood Products Association; a. WWPA G5, Grading Rules SUBMITTALS A. See SECTION , for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data sheets for each type of product indicated to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations 3. Installation methods C. Initial for Selection: Submit printed color charts or sample chains indicating manufacturer s complete range of standard and custom colors. D. Final Selection: Submit a minimum three (3) 12 inch (300mm) long full-sized shingles samples of each different profile (grain and species for clear finishes) for each different proposed finish. 1. Provide three (3) samples of each fastener proposed for use. WOOD SHINGLES APR 2011

145 E. Certificates: Certificates of Grade and kiln drying (KD); FSC chain-of-custody certificates. F. Closeout Submittals per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Including, but not limited to, methods for maintaining installed products and precautions against cleaning materials with methods detrimental to finishes and performance. 2. Extra Materials Stock: Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. a. Furnish full lengths of shingles and trim in a quantity equal to 2 percent of amount installed. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Industry Standard Requirements 1. Lumber Grading Rules: Per WWPA G5 or an ALSC acceptable equivalent by NeLMA or SPIB B. Sustainability Standards and Certifications: Wood timber and milled wood products shall be sourced from wood legally harvested from forests in compliance with the U.S. Lacey Act. 1. Certified Wood Materials: Provide wood shingles and trim meeting FSC-STD chainof-custody requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery, Storage and Handling per industry and fabricator guidelines, SECTION , and as follows: 1. Deliver materials to Project site in an undamaged condition, in original bundles and bearing intact labels. 2. Protect wood materials and accessories from soiling, damage, and deterioration, handling with proper care in proportion to the fragility and hazard of each item and its finished surfaces. 3. Store wood in ventilated areas with a constant minimum temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C), and a maximum RH of 55 percent. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS / FABRICATORS A. Wood Shingles Manufacturer / Fabricator List. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. FSC Certified Eastern White Cedar Shingles: a. F.D. Sterritt Lumber Co., Watertown, MA; b. Maibec Shingles, Saint-Romuald QC, Canada; c. White Cedar Shingles & Lumber, Duluth, MN; 2. Eastern White Cedar Shingles (subject to requirements): a. FSP Frazer Specialty Products / Frazer Wood Siding, Edmundston NB, Canada; / b. Maine Timber Works, Rome, ME; c. Dow's Eastern White Cedar Shingles, Corinth, ME; d. Waska, Clair NB, Canada; e. Loyalist Forest Products Inc., Erinsville, ON, Canada; 3. Substitution Limitations: See Section MATERIALS A. Shingles: WOOD SHINGLES APR 2011

146 1. Species: Eastern white cedar (Thuja occidentalis) 2. Thickness: 15/32 inch+ (12mm) thick butt; 3/16+ inch (4.8mm) thick tip 3. Height: 16 inch (127mm) high with 6 inch (25mm) exposure 4. Surface Texture: Re-squared and Rebutted B. Wood Trim: 1. Species: Eastern white cedar 2. Thickness, height and profile per Drawings 3. Surface Texture: Sanded 4. Cut Edges: Prime sealed C. Joint Protection: Provide elastomeric joint sealant with backer rod for exterior joints per SECTION ACCESSORIES A. WP (Waterproof) Barrier - Provide one of the following: 1. Building Paper: Per ASTM D226, Type II, No. 30 unperforated asphalt saturated felt 2. Waterproof Air Barrier Sheet: a. Basis of Design Product by Manufacturer: WrapShield by VaproShield; ( or an Architect acceptable equivalent per SECTION B. Rainscreen / Drainage Plane Mat: Place directly over the WP barrier. 1. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: a. Sure Cavity Drainage Mat by Masonry Technology, Inc.; b. Driwall Rainscreen 020-1; c. Architect acceptable equivalent per SECTION C. Nail Fasteners: Stainless steel; sized correctly for depth of embedment and substrate. D. Metal Flashing: Per SECTION E. Putty: Color to match color of stain selected 2.4 FINISH A. Finish Coating: Two (2) coats factory finish, and one (1) field applied coat 1. Basis of Design Paint Coating: Cabot OVT Solid Color Oil Stains #6700 Series ( or an Architect acceptable equivalent per SECTION PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verification of Conditions. Examination per SECTION B. Coordinate work with related trades; scribe and cope trim boards for accurate fit. Allow installation of related work to avoid cutting and patching. C. Select shingles boards of longest possible lengths. Discard boards that are warped, twisted, bowed, crooked or otherwise defective. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install trim as follows: 1. Allow for expansion and contraction shrinkage. 2. Arrange for an orderly nailing pattern. Blind nail when practical. 3. Sand cut edges smooth, clean, and seal. Position end cuts over bearing surfaces. WOOD SHINGLES APR 2011

147 B. Fasten shingles in place, level and plumb. 1. Allow for expansion and contraction shrinkage. 2. Arrange for an orderly nailing pattern. Blind nail except on over trim. 3. Install shingles to naturally shed water. 4. Sand cut edges smooth, clean, and seal. C. Install shingles lapping upper course over lower course. 1. Allow for expansion and contraction shrinkage 1/8 inch joint spacing. 2. Blind nail. 3. Miter horizontal joints tight at 45 degrees. Miter external and miter internal corners. D. Sand work smooth, set exposed nails, and putty holes. E. Apply field finish third coat per SECTION F. Tolerances: 1. Maximum Variation from Plumb and Level: 1/4 inch per 10 ft (6mm per 3m) 2. Maximum Offset from Joint Alignment: 1/16 inch (0.8mm) 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Correction of Non-Conforming Work per SECTION CLEANING, MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION A. Provide Progress Cleaning, Waste Management, and Provide Final Cleaning per SECTION requirements. B. Provide Initial Maintenance per manufacturer s recommendations. 3.5 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Substantial Completion Requirements per SECTION requirements. END OF SECTION WOOD SHINGLES APR 2011

148 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION SYNTHETIC SLATE ROOFING A. Fabricating, furnishing, delivering, erecting and installing the following Composite Slate Roofing work: 1. Synthetic slate shingles 2. Integral flexible flashings 3. Waterproof underlayment 4. Fasteners and other accessories as needed to provide a complete watertight installation meeting requirements B. Products furnished and installed by this Section BUT specified under other sections: 1. Metal flashings, gutters and downspouts specified under SECTION FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. The Conditions of the Contract and General Requirements of the Project Manual apply to this Trade Contractor, material suppliers, and all other persons furnishing labor and materials under this Section. General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and applicable parts of DIVISION 01 are included as part of this Section. 1. SECTION , ROUGH CARPENTRY: Wood underlayment and support framing 2. SECTION , FINISH CARPENTRY: Wood fascia and trim 3. SECTION , THERMAL INSULATION: Foamed-in-place insulation 4. SECTION , FLASHING AND SHEET METAL: Metal flashing, gutters and downspouts. 1.3 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Alternate No. 1: Work of this Section is affected by SECTION , Alternates 1.4 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards per Section , and current editions of the following: 1. ASTM. ASTM International; 2. ICC. International Code Council; 3. TAS Florida Building Code (Testing Application Standard) Test for Uplift Resistance on Roof Assemblies 4. NRCA. National Roofing Contractors Association; a. NRCA MS104 - The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual b. NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual 5. SMACNA. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; a. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual 6. UL. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; a. UL Wind Resistance of Prepared Roof Covering Materials b. UL Impact Resistance of Prepared Roof Covering Materials 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Procedures: See SECTION SYNTHETIC SLATE ROOFING APR 2011

149 B. Product Data - Submit manufacturer s published literature of product data on each product to be used including: 1. Composite shingles, underlayment, flashings, fasteners, and accessories indicating composition, properties, and dimensions a. Provide data showing compliance with specified requirements 2. Preparation instructions and recommendations 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations 4. Installation methods C. Shop Drawings - Flashing: Submit composite slate installation and appearance detail drawings of each different detail condition including, but not limited to, shingle layout, method of attachment, flashings, trim, conditions at eaves, intersections with adjacent materials, penetrations, windows, hips, valleys, walls, flashings, and nailing patterns for the slates. D. Selection Samples: Two (2) complete sets of composite slate shingles, fasteners, flashings, and underlayment. E. Verification Samples: Two (2) samples of each finish product specified representing actual product, color, and texture. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturer of synthetic shingles. B. Installer Qualifications: Provide workers, trained and experienced in installing composite slate roofing systems of this configuration, and submit documentation of three (3) consecutive years of work of this type. 1. Show familiarity with and perform work in accordance with SMACNA (ASSM) and NRCA C. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish composite slate system materials from one manufacturer for entire Project, unless otherwise approved by Architect. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, NRCA MS104, SECTION , and as follows: 1. Ship in bundles of shingles. Collate shingles in sequence of widths and colors as required for selected color blend. Bundles shall be assembled such that sorting at job site is not required. 2. Deliver shingles to site in manufacturer's unopened, labeled bundles. Promptly verify quantities and condition. Immediately remove damaged products from site. 3. Store products in protected environment, clear of ground and moisture, and protected from traffic and construction activities. Store shingles flat. Do not store on site for prolonged period. 4. Store synthetic slate products at temperature between 40 and 120 deg F (4 degrees C and 49 deg C). 5. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Anticipate and observe environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and moisture) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1. Roofer shall proceed with roofing system installation only after all penetrating work has been completed correctly, the substrate is dry, and weather conditions are favorable. B. Provide temporary protection materials maintained on the site at all times for temporary roofing, flashing, and other protection when delays and/or changed weather conditions do not permit SYNTHETIC SLATE ROOFING APR 2011

150 completion of each unit of work prior to the end of each working day. Remove and discard materials that have been used for temporary roofing, flashing and other protection. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer / Special Warranty: Prepare and submit in accordance with SECTION Composite Slate Roofing System Material: Provide written fifty (50) year material warranty against breakage and deterioration that causes leaks under normal weather and use conditions, issued by the manufacturer upon completion of the work and beginning on the date of Substantial Completion. B. Installer s Warranty: Prepare and submit in accordance with SECTION Total Composite Slate Roofing System: Provide written two (2) year system warranty including underlayment, flashings, trim, and other roof components against water penetration, issued by the manufacturer upon completion of the work and beginning on the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product and Manufacturer: Multi-Width DaVinci Synthetic Slate by DaVinci Roofscapes, LLC ( or an Architect acceptable equivalent product subject to compliance with requirements from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Ecostar Synthetic Slate by Carlisle; 2. Lamarite Composite Slate Shingles by TAMKO; Default.aspx 3. Substitution Limitations: See SECTION PERFORMANCE / DESIGN CRITERIA A. Composite Slate Roofing System: Slate roof system to consist of manufactured synthetic slates attached to structural substrate to form weather tight roof envelope with no measurable water penetration. 1. Wind-Resistance shall pass ASTM D3161 B. Composite slate roof system to consist of manufactured synthetic slate shingles attached to structural substrate to form weather tight roof envelope with no measurable water penetration. C. Tiles shall be manufactured with variations in color and size, textured faces and edges, and sufficient thickness to provide a realistic installed appearance. D. Method of attachments shall be designed to adequately resist wind uplift for roof configuration and project location. Roof assembly shall meet minimum uplift resistance of 186 psf or 93 psf with a 2:1 safety patch in accordance with TAS MATERIALS A. Submit certificates of compliance attesting that the materials meet specification requirements. B. Composite Slate Shingles: Lightweight, synthetic slate shingles with the appearance, color, texture, and thickness of natural quarried slate. 1. Material: Engineered polymer formulated from 100 percent virgin plastic resins. 2. Attributes: a. Fire Resistance (ASTM E108): Class A when installed over one ply 30# ASTM D226 asphalt saturated felt. b. Water Absorption (ASTM D471): 0.18 percent by weight c. Impact Resistance (UL 2218): Class 4 to withstand two drops of 2 inches (52 mm) diameter, 1.2 pounds (0.54 kg) steel ball dropped from 20 feet (6 m). d. Nail Pull Through Resistance (ASTM D3462): 138 foot-pounds at 72 deg F (187 joules SYNTHETIC SLATE ROOFING APR 2011

151 at 22 deg C) and 166 foot-pounds at 32 deg F (225 joules at 0 deg C). e. Freeze-Thaw Resistance: No crazing, cracking, delamination of coating, or other deleterious surface changes after one month exposure with temperature cycled from - 40 to +180 deg F (0 degrees to 82 deg C) in 22 hours tested in accordance with International Code Council (ICC) - ES Acceptance Criteria AC07 Section 4.9. f. Accelerated Weathering: Little change after 2,500 hours exposure to ultraviolet (UV) radiation, elevated temperature, moisture, and thermal shock. g. Fungus Resistance (ASTM G21): No algae growth when inoculated with blue green algae in warm, damp environment for 4 to 6 weeks. 3. Installed Weight: a. At 6 inches (152 mm) exposure: 342 pounds per square (16.5 kg/m 2 ) b. At 7 inches (178 mm) exposure: 293 pounds per square (14.3 kg/m 2 ) c. At 7-1/2 inches (191 mm) exposure: 273 pounds per square (13.3 kg/m 2 ) 4. Profile: Rectangular shape with exposed to view upper surface and edges textured to resemble natural slate. Underside formed with reinforcing ribs for added strength and stability. a. Exception: Provide solid bodied shingles for use at roof edges and valleys. 5. Sizes: a. Thickness: Varies from 1/8 inch (3 mm) at top to 1/2 inch (13 mm) at bottom b. Length: 18 inches (457 mm) c. Variable Widths: 6, 7, 9, 10, and 12 inches (152, 178, 229, 254 and 305 mm) to create appearance of random sized natural slate 6. Starter Shingles: Provide 12 inches (305 mm) wide by 12 inches (305 mm) long shingles to install as first course at eaves. 7. Markings: Form shingles with markings on upper surface to indicate nailing locations and provide alignment guidelines for different exposure lengths. 8. Shingle Color: Provide shingles in multiple colors comparable to natural slate with Ultraviolet (UV) protection consisting of internal stabilizer to provide durable colorfast finish. a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer s full range of standard and custom blends. 9. Shingle Pattern: Provide shingles factory blended in multiple colors and widths to create installed appearance designated. C. Accessories: 1. Roofing Felt: Roofing felt shall be asphalt-saturated rag felt, Type II, No. 30 asphalt felt in accordance with ASTM D226 / D226M. 2. Elastomeric Membrane Underlayment: Membrane shall be a cold applied composite selfadhering membrane of high strength polyethylene film with slip resistant embossing, coated on one side with a thick layer of adhesive-consistency rubberized asphalt, interwound with a disposable silicone coated release sheet. 1). Thickness: 40 mils (1 mm) 2). Low Temperature Flexibility: Unaffected at minus 32 deg F (-36 deg C) 3). Minimum Tensile Strength: 250 psi (1724 kpa) 4). Minimum Elongation: 250 percent 5). Permeance: 0.05 perms maximum b. Basis of Design Product and Manufacturer: Ice & Watershield by Grace Construction Products, or an Architect acceptable equivalent from one of the following: 1). 640 Ice-O-Late by Polyken Technologies, Div. of Kendall Co. SYNTHETIC SLATE ROOFING APR 2011

152 2). Weather Watch Ice & Water Barrier by GAF Building Materials, Corp. 3). Substitution Limitations: See Product Requirements in SECTION Elastomeric Membrane Accessories: Two component urethane, mastic and primer shall be as approved by the membrane manufacturer. Flashing, expansion joint covers, temporary UV protection and corner fillets shall be as recommended by the membrane manufacturer. 4. Sheet Metal Flashing: Fabricate from sheet to profiles and dimensions indicated on Drawings and approved shop drawings and in accordance with general requirements specified in SECTION a. Material: 16 oz. terne coated copper / stainless steel b. Linear Components: Form in longest possible lengths with 8 feet (2.5 m) as minimum. c. Counter Flashings: Extend 4 inches (102 mm) minimum up vertical surfaces and 4 inches (102 mm) minimum under shingles. d. Valley Flashings: 24 inches minimum width and extending 10 inches (254 mm) minimum from valley center line. e. Eave Flashings: Fabricate with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form drip. 5. Fasteners: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) flat head nails 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) long. a. Material: Copper or Stainless steel to match base sheet metal material 6. Sealants: Where required, shall be in accordance with the composite slate system manufacturer's recommendations. See SECTION Crickets or Saddles: Provide crickets of light rafter construction covered with sheathing, underlayment, and copper sheet metal specified in SECTION If the cricket area is large and exposed to view, it shall be slated the same as other roof areas. 8. Snow Guards: Provide nonferrous metal snow guards, as indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions. Examination per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Roof Surface Protection: Use equipment (such as padded ridge ladders) and techniques to prevent damage to roof as a result of foot or material traffic. B. Surface Preparation: 1. Roof deck surfaces shall be smooth, clean, firm, dry, and free from loose boards, large cracks, and projecting ends that might damage the roofing. 2. Foreign particles shall be cleaned from interlocking areas to ensure proper seating and to prevent water damming. 3. Prior to installation of slate, vents and other projections through roofs shall be properly flashed and secured in position, and projecting nails shall be driven firmly home. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install according to manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, SMACNA (ASSM), NRCA MS104, and the following: 1. Roofing Felt Installation: a. Lay felt in horizontal layers with joints lapped toward eaves and at ends at least 4 SYNTHETIC SLATE ROOFING APR 2011

153 inches (102 mm), and secured along laps and at ends as necessary to hold the felt in place and protect the structure until covered with the slate. b. Felt shall be preserved unbroken, tight and whole. 2. Membrane Underlayment Installation: a. Install waterproof sheet membrane over hips and ridges, at vertical surfaces, around penetrations, and in valleys. Apply underlayment membrane in fair weather at temperatures of 40 deg F (4 deg C) or higher. Adhere and attach as recommended by manufacturer of underlayment. b. Do not leave underlayment membrane exposed for lengthy period of time. Exercise care not to puncture or tear underlayment barrier with subsequent roofing operations. 3. Flashing Installation: a. Install overhanging drip edge on eaves and gable ends and metal flashings at valleys, ridges, hips, roof curbs, penetrations, and intersections with vertical surfaces in accordance with SECTION , and as detailed on Drawings and approved shop drawings. b. Weather lap joints 2 inches (52 mm) minimum and seal with sealant as specified in SECTION c. Secure in place with clips, nails, or other fasteners. 4. Shingle Installation - General: a. Accurately layout shingles and ensure that edges are parallel and perpendicular to roof eaves. b. Cutting: Layout work to avoid cutting shingles. 1). At gables and vertical intersections, vary combination of shingle widths and spacing of shingles to avoid cutting. 2). If cutting is required, place shingle such that cut edge is not exposed. 3). Use circular saw or straight edge and utility knife if cuts are necessary. 5. Slate Shingle Installation: a. Install shingles so that breaks between shingles in adjacent courses are offset by a minimum of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Exercise care not to install shingles of the same color in contact or shingles of the same width side by side. b. Exposure: Install shingles in straight pattern with exposure specified and bottom shingle edges evenly aligned. c. Spacing: Provide 3/16-3/8 inch ( mm) gap between shingles to allow for expansion and contraction. d. Stagger shingle joints in one course 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) minimum from joints in course below. e. Eaves: Install row of starter shingles at eaves as base layer. Project eave shingles approximately 1 inch or as required to allow water to drain into gutter or off eave or 1/8 inch (3 mm) past overhanging drip edge as indicated or required. f. Gables: Project shingles approximately 3/4 inch (19 mm) beyond gable rakes or 1/8 inch (3 mm) past overhanging drip edge. g. Ridges and Hips: After field shingle installation is complete, install double row of shingles over 6 inches (152 mm) wide metal flashing. 1). Ridges: Use 7 inches (178 mm) wide shingles with 6 inches (152 mm) exposure. Start ridge shingles at leeward end. Face shingle laps away from prevailing wind. 2). Hips: Use 7 inches (178 mm) wide shingles with 6 inches (152 mm) exposure. Start hip course at eave. h. Fastening: Attach each shingle to wood deck with two (2) nails using hammer or pneumatic nail gun. 1). Place nails at locations indicated on shingles. 2). Ensure good penetration but do not overdrive nail. Do not nail at angle. Ensure head is flush with shingle surface to avoid creating craters. 3). At valleys do not nail shingles within 5 inches (127 mm) of valley center line. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL SYNTHETIC SLATE ROOFING APR 2011

154 A. Field Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect units as they are installed. Do not install cracked, broken, twisted, curled, or otherwise damaged units. 2. As work progresses, exercise care not to scratch or mar installed units. Units damaged during installation shall be immediately removed and discarded. 3. After approximately 200 units have been installed, inspect roof from ground. Verify proper layout and appearance. Repeat inspection every 200 shingles. 4. Visually inspect complete installation to ensure that the roof system is weather tight. B. Correction of Non-Conforming Work per SECTION CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with construction waste management and disposal requirements of SECTION , and as follows: 1. Remove excess materials and debris from finished surfaces and adjacent roof areas. B. Do not allow work force on completed roof. C. Protect installed products until completion of project. D. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION SYNTHETIC SLATE ROOFING APR 2011

155 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING A. Work of this Section consists of TPO membrane roofing system, and includes but is not limited to the following: 1. TPO membrane 2. Substrate boards, mats, and fasteners 3. Accessories as required for a complete warrantable installation B. Related Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including GENERAL and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and Section , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to this Section. 1. SECTION , ROUGH CARPENTRY: Wood decking, sleepers, and plywood underlayment. 2. Items furnished by other Sections but installed under this Section. a. SECTION , FLASHING AND SHEET METAL: Sheet metal flashing. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Abbreviations and Acronyms per SECTION B. Definitions per SECTION , and as follows: 1. TPO Roofing Membrane. A sheet good membrane typically based on polymerized polypropylene or polyethylene and EP (ethylene-propylene) rubber. TPO membranes are flexible at low temperatures without the use of polymeric or liquid plasticizers, does not contain chlorine, a halogen, and no chlorinated or halogenated ingredients are added during sheet production. C. Reference Standards per SECTION , and as follows: 1. ASTM. ASTM International; a. ASTM D5538, Practice for Thermoplastic Elastomers Terminology and Abbreviations b. ASTM D6878, Specification for Thermoplastic Polyolefin Based Sheet Roofing 2. NRCA. National Roofing Contractors Association; a. NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual 3. SMACNA. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; a. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting per SECTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Procedures: See SECTION B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer s published literature of product data, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations. C. Shop Drawings: Submit all necessary plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work to indicate the following: 1. Base flashings and membrane terminations THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING APR 2011

156 2. Membrane seaming and fastener patterns D. Samples for Verification for the following products: by 12 inch (300 by 300mm) square of: a. Sheet roofing, of color specified including T-shaped side and end lap seam b. Geotextile membrane inch (300mm) length of: a. Metal termination bars b. Battens 3. Three (3) fasteners of each type, length, and finish to anchor: a. Substrate board E. Test and Evaluation Reports: For components of membrane roofing system. F. Manufacturer Representative s Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed roofing installation. G. Qualification Statements: For Manufacturer and Installer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Approvals: 1. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide membrane roofing materials with the fire-testresponse characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to AHJ. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. a. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A, ASTM E108, for application and roof slopes indicated. b. Fire-Resistance Ratings of Roof Assemblies: ASTM E119 B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company with a minimum of ten (10) years successful experience that has UL listing for membrane roofing system identical to that used for this Project. C. Installer Qualifications: Company with a minimum of three (3) years experience that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each component for membrane roofing system from roofing membrane manufacturer or its designated distributor. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, and SECTION WARRANTY A. Manufacturer / Special Warranty: Prepare and submit written warranty signed by manufacturer of roofing materials and his authorized installer, without monetary limitation, agreeing to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failure includes, but is not limited to, leaking roof, membrane delaminating, fastener pullout, improperly heat-welded seams, improper terminations. 2. System warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, roofing membrane accessories, roof insulation, fasteners, geotextile separation board and other components of roofing system. 3. Warranty Period: Fifteen (15) years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements, and as follows: THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING APR 2011

157 1. Weather Conditions: No rain, fog and/or frost, and none in the immediate forecast. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS / FABRICATORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Carlisle SynTec; Phone: SYNTEC; Web: 2. Firestone Building Products; Phone: Web: 3. Stevens Roofing Systems; Phone: ROOF; Web: 4. Versico Incorporated; Phone: ; Web: 5. For Substitution Limitations see SECTION , and as follows: a. Note: PVC Vinyl roofing membranes are not acceptable equivalents. 2.2 DESCRIPTION A. Regulatory Requirements: Membrane fire retardant additive shall be non-halogenated type. B. Exposed Membrane System: Wood decking on sleepers on geotextile drainage mat on reinforced TPO membrane with heat-welded seams, mechanically fastened through substrate board into exterior plywood roof deck. Refer to Drawings. 2.3 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure. B. Provide an exposed TPO roof membrane system capable of achieving a FM 1-90 rating. 1. Maximum wind velocity: 55 mph (88.5 kph) 2.4 MATERIALS A. TPO Membrane Semi-Exposed: 1. Description: 60 mil / inch (1.5mm) thick, TPO (Thermoplastic Polyolefin) membrane, with a scrim fabric reinforcing layer, hot-air welded and mechanically fastened roofing system including flashings as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings in accordance with the manufacturer's most current specifications and details. 2. Protected Membrane Face Color: Grey or Tan or a darker color to be selected by Architect from full range offered. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials as recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing, and as follows: 1. Flexible Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced TPO sheet flashing, 55 mils (1.4mm) thick, minimum, of same color as sheet membrane. 2. Vapor Retarder: Minimum 6 mil / inch polyethylene with taped seams and punctures. 3. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip-sheet, of type required for application. 4. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3mm) thick; with anchors. 5. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet, approximately 1 inch (25mm) wide by 0.05 inch (1.3mm) thick, prepunched. 6. Fasteners: Stainless or factory-coated steel fasteners and plastic plates meeting corrosionresistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. 7. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING APR 2011

158 flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, termination reglets, cover strips, and other accessories. 2.6 SUBSTRATE BOARD A. Substrate Board: ASTM C1177/ ASTM C1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, Type X, 5/8 inch (16mm) thick. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide DensDeck Type X Roof Board by Georgia-Pacific Corporation, or substitution per SECTION GEOTEXTILE / PROTECTION MAT A. Geotextile / Protection Mat: Woven or non-woven polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fabric mat, water permeable and resistant to ultraviolet degradation, type and weight as recommended by roofing system manufacturer for application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions. Examination per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation. Refer to manufacturer s instructions and recommendations for preparation of substrates, and as follows: 1. Clean substrates of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no Work is taking place and when rain is forecast. C. Complete terminations and base flashings, providing temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning Work on adjoining roofing. 3.3 SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together. 3.4 MECHANICALLY FASTENED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install roofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions, NRCA 0405, SMACNA (ASMM), and as follows: 1. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before beginning installation. 2. Time membrane material installation to design for best situation to contend with expansion and contraction forces. 3. Adjoining sheets of TPO membrane are overlapped to cover fasteners and plates, and joined together with a minimum 1 1/2 inch (40mm) wide hot air weld. a. Single-weld 60 psf (2.87 kpa) b. Double-weld 90 psf (4.31 kpa) 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections: 1. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. a. Notify Architect and Owner forty-eight (48) hours in advance of date and time of inspection. THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING APR 2011

159 2. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional Work with specified requirements. B. Correction of Non-Conforming per GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, and SECTION C. Manufacturer Services: Roof membrane system manufacturer s field representative(s) shall give product use recommendations, and perform site visits to inspect product installation in accordance with instructions and warranty requirements. 1. Final Roof Inspection: Manufacturer to perform a warranty inspection of the roofing installation upon completion, and submit a copy of the report to the Architect. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with construction waste management and disposal requirements of SECTION Clean roof area before beginning work and at the end of each workday. 2. Prior to laying roofing membrane perform a close check to ensure no sharp objects are present on the substrate. B. Protect installed work from construction operations until date of Final Completion or Owner occupancy, whichever occurs first. 1. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING APR 2011

160 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION FLASHING AND SHEET METAL A. Work of this Section consists of flashing and sheet metal, and includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Manufactured through-wall flashing 2. Formed wall and roof flashing and trim 3. Standing seam metal roofing system 4. Gutter system 5. Formed equipment support flashing 6. Formed overhead-piping safety pans 7. Accessories as needed to provide a complete installation B. Related Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including GENERAL and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and SECTION , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to this Section. 1. SECTION , ROUGH CARPENTRY: Wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. SECTION , SLATE SHINGLES: Integrating flashing into roofing transitions. 3. SECTION , WOOD SHINGLES: Integrating flashing into roofing transitions. 4. SECTION , SYNTHETIC SLATE ROOFING: (Alternate) Integrating flashing into roofing transitions. 5. SECTION , THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING: Integrating flashing into roofing transitions. 6. SECTION , JOINT PROTECTION: Field-applied sealants. 7. SECTION , WOOD FRENCH DOORS: Integrating flashing around exterior openings. 8. SECTION , STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS: Integrating flashing around exterior openings. 9. SECTION , SECTIONAL DOORS: Integrating flashing around exterior openings. 10. SECTION , WOOD WINDOWS: Integrating flashing around exterior openings. 11. DIVISION 15/ MECHANICAL DRAWINGS: Integrating sheet metal flashing around exterior envelope openings and penetrations; Overhead piping. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Referenced Standards per SECTION and as follows: 1. ASCE. American Society of Civil Engineers; a. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures 2. ASTM. ASTM International; 3. NRCA. National Roofing Contractors Association; a. NRCA (SRM) Steep Roof Manual 4. SMACNA. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; a. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual 5. UL. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; FLASHING AND SHEET METAL APR 2011

161 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leak-proof, secure, and non-corrosive installation. Coordinate envelope seal with spray foam insulation. B. Preinstallation Meeting: See SECTION , SECTION , SECTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Procedures: See SECTION B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer s printed product literature for each product including metal types and characteristics, finishes, substrate preparation, installation instructions, use limitations, sample warranties meeting requirements, and recommendations. C. Shop Drawings - Flashing: Show layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans and elevations. Distinguish between shop and field-assembled Work. Include the following: 1. Contractor may provide Prototypes for A/E review in place of Shop Drawings. 2. Identify material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. 3. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 4. Details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and trim, including gutters, fasteners, clips, cleats, and attachments to adjoining Work. 5. Details of expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and contraction. D. Shop Drawings Sheet Metal Roofing: Provide shop drawings for fabrication, installation and erection of all parts of the work. Provide details of anchorages, connections and accessory items. Include layout of fasteners and joints in roofing sheets. Include thickness of materials and details of all penetrations. Distinguish between factory and field assembly work. Include the following details for: 1. Contractor may provide Prototypes for A/E review in place of Shop Drawings. 2. Forming sheet metal roofing, including seams and dimensions. 3. Joining and securing sheet metal roofing including layout of fasteners, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 4. Termination points and assemblies including fixed points. 5. Expansion joints, including showing direction of expansion and contraction 6. Roof penetrations 7. Edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and counterflashings. 8. Special conditions 9. Connections to adjoining work 10. Required accessory items 11. Sheet metal roofing and attachments 12. Roof-mounted items including roof hatches, equipment supports, pipe supports and penetrations, lighting fixtures, snow guards, and items mounted on roof curbs. E. Samples: NOTE - Prototype Samples for A/E review may be in place of that specified below. 1. For Initial Selection: Submit for each type of sheet metal indicated with factory-applied color finishes. a. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection. 2. For Verification: Submit for each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: a. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 x 12 inch in size. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments mounted on plywood backing illustrating typical seam of the FLASHING AND SHEET METAL APR 2011

162 roof system. b. Trim: 12 inches (300mm) long by indicated width. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories. c. Sheet Metal Roofing: Mount sample on plywood backing illustrating typical seam of the roof system, and exposed finish; minimum 12 x 12 inch in size. d. Fastening Devices and Other Exposed Accessories: 12 inches (300mm) long or actual size. F. Test Reports. Submit test reports showing that metal panels have been tested in accordance with ASTM E1646 and ASTM E1680. G. Closeout Submittal Procedures per SECTION , and submit the following documents: 1. Warranty Documentation: Executed roofing warranty. 2. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit requirement to maintain warranty; and operating, cleaning and maintenance guidelines and schedule recommendations. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Approvals: 1. Installation and fabrications shall meet requirements of ASTM E1592 (1994) performance test and UL Roofing system, anchorage and accessories shall be fabricated and constructed to resist wind loads in accordance with local building codes. Shall also meet Design Code: ASCE 7-98, Method 2 for components and cladding B. Fabricator / Installer Qualifications: Perform fabrication and installation with skilled, experienced and trained workmen supervised by trained personnel who shall have a minimum seven (7) years successful experience in project installations of similar size and scope. C. Single Source Responsibility: Provide roofing system materials that are the products of one manufacturer. Provide secondary materials that are required by or as acceptable to the roofing system manufacturer. D. Prototypes. In lieu of Shop Drawings and Samples, provide material assemblies of each sheet metal type for review and approval prior to benchmarking, manufacturing or fabrication production indicating each different: 1. Joint connection detail 2. Support and fastener 3. Bend, angle and corner 4. Finish E. Mockups: Before installing sheet metal roofing, construct mockups for each form of construction required to verify selection made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using exposed and concealed materials and forming methods indicated for completed work. 1. Locate mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by the Architect. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. F. Sustainability Standards Certifications: Lead-free sheet metals; Lead-free welding solder of type to suit application 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery, Storage and Handling per manufacturer s recommendations, SMACNA (ASMM), FLASHING AND SHEET METAL APR 2011

163 NRCA (SRM), and SECTION Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Cover metal sheets, allow for ventilation, and slope to ensure drainage. Coil materials shall be stored in a climate controlled environment. 2. Prevent terne coated material contact with moisture, humidity, dissimilar metals, and other materials that could cause discoloration or staining. 3. Maintain temperature sensitive materials as recommended by each product manufacturer. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient and Weather Conditions: 1. Install roofing materials only when ambient and substrate conditions are dry, with no immediate wet weather forecasted. 2. Seal incomplete roofing work against inclement weather and wind borne dust, at the end of each working day and, should it be necessary, immediately prior to oncoming inclement weather. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer / Special Warranty: Prepare and submit in accordance with the closeout submittals article in SECTION Roofing System: All materials and work of this section shall be covered by manufacturer s twenty-five (25) year non-pro-rated, no dollar limit weathertightness warranty, including materials and workmanship coverage for all roofing materials trim, flashings, and penetrations. B. Roofing Contractor Warranty: 1. Applicator shall supply the Owner with a separate three (3) year workmanship warranty covering the entire roofing on this project. a. In the event any work related to roofing, flashing, or metal is found to be defective, installed improperly or otherwise not in accordance with the Contract Documents within this warranty term, the Contractor(s) shall repair that defect at no cost to the Owner. b. This warranty obligation shall run directly to the Owner, and a copy shall be sent to the manufacturer and Architect. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Product and Manufacturer List. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ZT Alloy Coated Steel (Terne II) by Follansbee Steel; 2. Freedom Grey by Revere Copper; 3. Petersen Aluminum Corporation; 4. Substitution Limitations: See SECTION DESCRIPTION A. Regulatory Requirements: Work shall conform to ASTM, standard specifications and methods of testing and listed reference manuals. 1. Flashing and Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA (ASMM) and conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 2. Sheet Metal Roofing: Comply with NRCA (SRM) and SMACNA (ASMM) requirements, except as otherwise noted. 3. Fire Hazard Classification: UL (Underwriters Laboratories) Class B rating. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL APR 2011

164 4. Wind Load Resistance: Meet or exceed IBC Zone 2, Exposure B, and a basic wind speed of 90 mph, and ASCE 7, Method 2 for components and cladding. 2.3 PERFORMANCE / DESIGN CRITERIA A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. B. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal and trim thermal movements. 2. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 3. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. C. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal roofing, flashing and trim that when tested indicates no evidence of water penetration at an inward static air pressure differential of not less than 6.24 psf (43 kpa) and not more than 12.0 psf (83 kpa) as per ASTM E 331/ ASTM E D. Design Wind Pressure: Roofing systems shall safely withstand wind and snow prescribed by codes and AHJ. Loads shall be resisted in both positive and negative directions. 1. Wind-Uplift: Roof panel assembly shall comply with UL 580 for UL 90 rated assemblies and meet requirements of ASTM E Static Air Infiltration: Completed roof system shall have a maximum of 0.06 cfm/sf with 6.24 kpa air pressure differential per ASTM E 283/ ASTM E E. Oil Canning: There shall be no oil canning, warping or buckling on roofing panel sheets, including when panels are under full design loads required. F. Design Criteria Sheet Metal Roofing: 1. Panel: U-shaped sheet-pans a. Stainless Steel: 25 ft max. lengths b. Copper: 8 ft max. lengths 2. Sheet S.Stl. Thickness: 28 gage (0.67 psf), 26 gage (0.77 psf), or 24 gage (1.02 psf), as indicated 3. Sheet Copper Thickness: 16-oz. ( inch), or 20-oz. (0.027 inch), as indicated 4. Texture: Micro-embossed 5. Panel Width: 20 inches (508 mm), 24 inches (610 mm), or 36 inches (914 mm), as indicated 6. Standing Seam Height: 1-1/2 inch (38mm) finish height 7. Standing Seam Type: Field formed double lock seam 8. Clips: One piece type allowing for unlimited thermal movement 9. Fasteners: Concealed, type 304 stainless steel, unless otherwise approved by the Architect 2.4 SHEET METALS A. Terne-Coated Stainless Steel (Terne II): ASTM A625 single reduced black type 304 (Non- Magnetic) dead soft stainless steel plate coated both sides with a minimum alloy (50% zinc/ 50% tin) to a thickness of 20 microns. B. Terne-Coated Copper (Revere): ASTM B370 H00 cold rolled copper coated sheet and coil with mils thick 50% zinc/ 50% tin alloy with a factory-applied pre-weathered finish. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL APR 2011

165 C. Fasteners: Minimum 7/8 inch Series 300 stainless steel or galvanized ring shank nail or equal screw type fastener. D. Joint Sealers: See SECTION E. Solder: ASTM B32, lead free 2.5 UNDERLAYMENTS A. Felts: ASTM D226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, non-perforated. B. Polyethylene Sheet: 6 mil (0.15mm) thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D4397. C. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized paper, minimum 3 lb/100 sf (0.16 kg / m 2 ). D. High Temperature Grade (HT) Water Barrier Underlayment: Cold applied, self-adhering membrane composed of a high density, cross-laminated polyethylene film coated on one side with a layer of butyl rubber or high temperature asphalt adhesive. No sand finish. Provide substrate primer when recommended by water barrier manufacturer. 1. Minimum Thickness: 30 mil 2. Tensile Strength per ASTM D 412 (Die C Modified): 250 psi 3. Membrane Elongation per ASTM D 412 (Die C Modified): 250 percent 4. Permeance (Max) per ASTM E96: 0.05 perms 5. Acceptable Products and Manufacturers: a. Ultra by Grace Construction Products b. CCW MiraDRI WIP 300 High Temperature by Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing c. Blueskin PE 200 HT by Henry (Bakor) 6. Do NOT use with TPO roofing. 2.6 ROOF INSULATION A. General: Provide Nailbase over minimum 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) roof insulation. 1. Total thickness for rigid insulation and insulated sheathing shall achieve minimum R-value indicated by the Drawings. B. Insulation Sheathing (aka Nailbase): Oriented Strand Board (OSB) and Rigid Insulation. APA rated 1/2 inch OSB sheathing, exterior. The insulation sheathing panel shall be an approved tested assembly meeting the following requirements: 1. Insulation System: Provided under SECTION Roof Covering Fire Resistance: ASTM E108/ UL Roof Assembly Fire Resistance: ASTM E119/ UL Insulation Density: 20 psi 5. Size: 48 inch (1220 mm) x 87-3/4 inch (2230 mm) 6. Physical Properties: Property Test Method a. Thermal Performance* ASTM C518 b. Compressive Strength ASTM D1621 c. Dimensional Stability ASTM D2126 d. Moisture Vapor Transmission ASTM E96 e. Water Absorption ASTM C209 f. Flame Spread (foam core) ASTM E84 g. Smoke Developed (foam core) ASTM E VAPOR RETARDER * Thermal values shall be conditioned and determined per PIMA Tech. Bulletin #101. A. Vapor Retarder (VR): Low density polyethylene (LDPE) reinforced 3 ply general all-purpose fire retardant vapor barrier 1. Perm Rating (ASTM E96): Maximum nominal perm FLASHING AND SHEET METAL APR 2011

166 2. Puncture Strength (ASTM D4833): Minimum nominal 29 lb 3. Fire Resistance (UL 723): UL Class I 4. Joint Tape: Compatible with vapor barrier meeting perm and UL ratings. 2.8 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation. B. Roofing Installation Clips: Manufacturer's standard single clips for concealed attachment of panels. C. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable type 304 stainless steel fasteners designed to withstand design loads. 1. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex washer head. 2. Blind Fasteners: High-strength stainless-steel rivets. D. Snow Guard Management System: Prefinished aluminum, standard bracket, single pipe style for standing seam metal roof; type(s) as indicated on the Drawings; if indicated, bend to match building radius. 1. Type 1: 24 inch O.C. spacing 2. Type 2: 12 inch O.C. spacing 3. Finish: Standard aluminum 4. Basis of Design Product and Manufacturer: Model 2000 by Alpine Snow Guard, or an Architect acceptable equivalent product meeting requirements. E. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, non-sag, nontoxic, non-staining tape. F. Elastomeric Sealant: Per SECTION Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15 mil (0.4mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type non-corrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. H. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D4586, Type 1, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. 2.9 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Custom fabricate to comply with recommendations in SMACNA (ASMM) that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. 1. Shop fabricate items to the maximum extent possible and practicable. 2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. 4. Fabricate without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. a. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. 5. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric or butyl sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL APR 2011

167 6. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25mm) deep, filled with elastomeric or butyl sealant concealed within joints. 7. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated. 8. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, non-corrosive metal. a. Thickness: As recommended by SMACNA (ASMM) for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured. B. Soldering: Clean and tin materials. Completely fill seams with solder. Soldering on exposed finished surfaces shall be neat, full flowing, and smooth. After soldering, remove flux and wipe and wash joints clean WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96 inch (2400mm) long, but not exceeding 12 foot (3.6m) long, sections, under copings, at shelf angles, and where indicated. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches (150mm) beyond each side of wall openings. Form with 2 inch (50mm) high end dams. 1. Refer to SECTION for elastomeric through-wall flashing. B. Openings Flashing in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches (100mm) beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2 inch (50mm) high end dams SHEET METAL ROOFING FABRICATIONS A. General - Sheet Metal Roofing: 1. Provide factory formed pans, using forming machines with minimum 10 rollers to create pan profiles up to a maximum 40 feet long. 2. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. 3. Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, same gage as roofing sheet, width as recommended by manufacturer, interlockable with sheet. 4. Fabricate starter strips, interlockable with sheet. 5. Form pieces in longest practical lengths. 6. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. 7. Form material with standing seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams. 8. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. 9. Fabricate for waterproof and weather-resistant performance with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage, or deterioration of the work. 10. Form work to fit substrate. Comply with material manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for forming material. 11. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 12. Intersections: Cope to fit accurately and solder. 13. Layout so cross seams, when required, will be made in the direction of flow with higher pans overlapping the lower pans. Keep field cutting to a minimum. 14. Cross Seams: Provide staggered transverse seams. 15. Edges: Turn back all exposed edges to form 1/2 inch (13 mm) hem. 16. Provide expansion cleats on standing seam pans 30 feet (9.1 m) or more in length. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL APR 2011

168 17. Provide expansion joints as required. Verify location and detail with Architect. 18. Penetrations through the roof are to be fabricated and installed to allow for expansion and contraction of the roof sheet without buckling. B. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrate by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from stainless steel, inch (0.5mm) thick. B. Overhead-Piping Safety Pans: Fabricate of one type from the following material: 1. Stainless Steel: inch (0.65mm) thick. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: inch (0.7mm) thick FACTORY FINISHES A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. 1. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. 2. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions. Examination per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Verify that each substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. 2. Inspect roof deck to verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped to drains. Verify deck is dry and free of snow or ice. Verify joints in deck are solidly supported and fastened. 3. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, reglets are in place, and nailing strips located. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate provision of roof drainage sheet metal with type and installation of exterior walls and parapets, roof deck and membrane, wood blocking and nailers, exterior wall finishes, and other work related to sheet metal. B. Deliver sheet metal to site in time for accurate placement and coordination with other work. C. Verify roof membrane terminations and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. Coat dissimilar materials in contact with sheet metal a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil: 1. Concrete & Masonry: One coat bituminous paint 2. Wood: 2 coats aluminum paint D. Verify that all work of related sections are complete and installed properly ready to receive work of this section. 1. Installation of treated wood blocking at roof perimeter, penetrations, and other areas as indicated by the Drawings and per SECTION a. Provide a separation layer or coating between terne coated metal and ACQ treated wood blocking, and other dissimilar/ reactive materials. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL FLASHING AND SHEET METAL APR 2011

169 A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals. C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and elastomeric or butyl sealant. E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25mm) deep, filled with elastomeric or butyl sealant concealed within joints. G. Fasteners: Use appropriate fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches (32mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19mm) for wood screws. H. Seal joints with elastomeric or butyl sealant as required for watertight construction. I. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38mm) except where pre-tinned surface would show in finished Work. J. Aluminum Flashing: Rivet or weld joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for strength. 3.4 INSTALLATION - WALL FLASHING A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. B. Openings Flashing in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches (100 mm) beyond wall openings. 3.5 INSTALLATION ROOFING UNDERLAYMENT A. Roofing Insulation provided under SECTION B. Insulation Nailbase: Install as recommended by NRCA (SRM), and APA recommendations. C. Water Proof (WP) Underlayment: Apply over entire roof area on sheathing, laying parallel to slope with joints lapped 6 inches. 1. Verify underlayment is contiguous with penetrations sealed and perimeter edges tied into adjacent water barrier system. 3.6 INSTALLATION - ROOF FLASHING A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing to intercept, divert, and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual recommendations, and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof flashing with installation of roof components such as asphalt shingles, solar light-tubes, solar hot water equipment, and solar PVA arrays. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set flashing true to line, and level as indicated. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight. 3.7 INSTALLATION - STANDING SEAM ROOFING A. General: Install Roofing and Flashing according to the Drawings, approved submittals, manufacturer's instructions, SMACNA (ASMM), NRCA (SRM), SECTION , and as FLASHING AND SHEET METAL APR 2011

170 follows: 1. Cut, bent, formed and install terne coated copper roofing using the same tools and techniques as with mill-finished copper. 2. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before beginning sheet metal roof installation. a. Nail cleats a maximum of 12 inches (305 mm) on center; turn tabs over nail or use appropriate stainless steel fasteners. 3. Secure sheet metal in place using concealed fasteners unless shown otherwise. Lap and seal all joints. Exposed fasteners shall be covered with sealant. 4. Do not install bent, twisted, scratched, or otherwise damaged sheet metal fabrications. Remove from site and replace. 5. Install the panel so that it is weather-tight and allows for thermal movements. Do not allow sheet metal to come in contact with dissimilar materials. 6. Lay sheet-pans with long dimension perpendicular to eaves. Apply pans beginning at eaves. Erect sheet metal plumb and level without bulges or waves. Fit sheet metal fabrications tight in place. Make corners square, and surfaces true and straight in planes. 7. Complete seaming of standing seam panel by automatic seaming machine or other accepted and approved method designed to obtain the proper seam dimension and height. Lock cleats into seams and flatten. 8. Stagger transverse joints of roofing sheets. 9. At eaves and gable ends, terminate roofing by hooking over edge strip. 10. Avoid placing pipe penetrations through panel seams. 11. Do not allow panels or trim to come into contact with dissimilar materials. 12. Field cutting of panels, trim, and/or flashing shall be accomplished by hand or electric shears. At no time shall a hot saw be used. 13. Installing Field-Formed Double Lock Seam: a. Bend up one side edge 1-1/2 inches and other edge 1-3/4 inches. b. Make first fold 1/4 inch wide single fold and second fold 1/2 inch wide, providing locked portion of standing seam, 5 plies in thickness. c. Fold lower ends of seams at eaves over at 45 degree angle. 14. Soldering: Remove shop coat around edges to be soldered with lacquer thinner. a. To facilitate soldering, it is recommended that the edges of the sheet be pre-tinned. b. Use pure tin solder with rosin flux. c. Flux residues must be neutralized with soda water and removed. d. Use soldering irons only. e. Do not use abrasives in preparing the surface for solder. 15. Protect finishes of exposed to view sheet metal fabrications. Avoid gouging, scratching, and denting. Use cotton gloves when handling and installing unprotected sheet metal in order to avoid soiling exposed to view surfaces. 16. Field paint terne metal roofing when conditions permit. Prime underside prior to laying pans down. 3.8 GUTTER INSTALLATION A. Install gutters with required slope drainage of not less than 1/4 inch per foot. B. Flash and seal gutter to downspout. Fit gutters to downspouts and flashings for watertight connections. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. C. Miter, lap seam and close corner joints with solder. Seal seams and joints watertight with solder. Unless gutter and downspout system provides a watertight seal using a different method. D. Provide expansion joints at maximum 40' - 0", not more than 24 feet from corners, and as otherwise indicated. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL APR 2011

171 E. Secure gutters and downspouts in place using concealed fasteners, spacing as required to handle system loads, but not less than 30 inch on center. F. Integrate gutter flashing conditions with requirements of adjacent roofing for watertight installation. G. Install counterflashing to prevent water from migrating behind gutter system. 3.9 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Overhead-Piping Safety Pans: Suspend pans from pipe and install drain line to plumbing waste or drain line. B. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric or butyl sealant to equipment support member FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections: 1. Flood Test: If requested by Architect, roofing shall be flood tested for leakage, and/or shall have test cut-outs taken to determine compliance with requirements of this section. All costs shall be borne by the Contractor. a. Roofing system work identified to not be in compliance with requirements shall be removed and replaced at no cost to the Owner. B. Correction of Non-Conforming Work per SECTION CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with construction waste management and disposal requirements in SECTION B. Remove protective film or coverings immediately after installation. C. Clean exposed panel surfaces promptly after installation in accordance with recommendations of panel and coating manufacturers. 1. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant manufacturer. 2. Exercise care in removing mortar, cementitious materials, and sand from roof drainage sheet metal. Do not wipe surfaces in order to avoid scratching. 3. Wash exposed surfaces with solution of mild detergent applied with soft cloth. Wipe surfaces clean. D. Do not permit unnecessary traffic over or other loading of unprotected roof surfaces. Require all personnel to wear rubber-soled shoes when installing or walking on a finished roof. END OF SECTION FLASHING AND SHEET METAL APR 2011

172 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION FIRESTOPPING A. Section includes, but is not limited to, furnishing application of firestopping perimeter of and penetrations through fire and smoke rated assemblies. B. Related Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including GENERAL and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and Section , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to this Section. 1. DIVISION 15, MECHANICAL: Mechanical penetration through fire-rated systems. 2. DIVISION 16, ELECTRICAL: Electrical penetration through fire-rated systems. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Reference Standards per Section , and as follows: 1. ASTM. ASTM International; 2. FICA. Firestop Contractors International Association; 3. FM. Factory Mutual; 4. FM Approval Standard of Firestop Contractors Class ICC. International Code Council; a. ICC Evaluation Services ES Report (ESR-1092) 6. IFC. International Firestop Council; a. Ref. 1, Recommended IFC Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop Systems Engineering Judgments 7. NFPA. National Fire Protection Association; 8. UL. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meetings: See SECTION B. Sequencing and Scheduling per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that throughpenetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements. Coordinate sequence of work with the work of other trades. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Procedures: See SECTION B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer s printed product literature including products standards, identifying materials, substrate preparation, installation instructions, use limitations, recommendations. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Approvals: 1. Provide firestopping products containing no detectable asbestos as determined by the method specified in 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart F, Appendix A, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy." 2. Fire-Resistance: Provide materials and construction identical to fire-rated assemblies tested in compliance with ASTM E119, ASTM E814, UL 263, or NFPA 251, by independent agencies acceptable to Architect and AHJ. 3. Burning Characteristics: Provide products with maximum ASTM E84 surface burning FIRESTOPPING APR 2011

173 characteristics of flame spread 25 and smoke developed 25. a. Firestop systems shall have been tested in accordance with ASTM E814 or UL 1479 under a minimum positive pressure of 1 inch (2.5mm) of water. B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain firestop materials from single manufacturer for each different product required. Manufacturer shall instruct applicator in procedures for each material. C. Sustainability Standards Certifications: 1. All materials shall be asbestos free and non-carcinogenic. 2. Firestop materials shall contain no flammable or toxic solvents and shall not produce toxic or flammable out gassing during the drying or curing process. 3. Firestop materials used shall not require solvent base chemicals for clean-up purposes. 4. If required, hazardous disposal of firestop materials shall be strictly observed as noted on the individual MSDS. 5. Water-based firestop materials shall be considered preferable over silicone or solvent based materials. 6. Maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) content as follows: a. Sealers: 250 grams per liter b. Primers for Non-porous Substrates: 250 grams per liter c. Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 grams per liter 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, and SECTION FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: Do not apply sealants, mortars, or putties when temperature of substrate material and surrounding air is below 40 deg F or is anticipated to drop below that temperature within 24 hours after installation. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer / Special Warranty: Prepare and submit written warranties against material failure in accordance with SECTION Manufacturer s standard warranty covering firestop materials. 2. Applicator s standard warranty covering workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer List. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. 2. Firestop Systems Inc. 3. Hilti Firestop Systems; ; 4. Isolatek International 5. 3M Fire Protection Products; ; 6. Nelson Firestop Products; ; 7. Specified Technologies, Incorporated (STI); ; 8. The Rectorseal Corporation; ; 9. Tremco Firestop System; ; Substitution Limitations: See SECTION DESCRIPTION A. Regulatory Requirements: Product / System Testing: UL Fire Resistance Directory, Fill, Void or FIRESTOPPING APR 2011

174 Cavity Materials (XHHW) and Firestop Devices (XHJI) for listed products/systems. 2.3 PERFORMANCE / DESIGN CRITERIA A. Performance Requirements: Provide firestop systems that have been manufactured and installed to maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, damage or failure. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Firestopping - General: 1. Compatibility: Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Materials shall conform to UL and ASTM Standards. 3. Self-extinguishing damming materials shall be used, as specified by the manufacturer, as part of the designated firestop system. 4. Firestop materials used shall be suitable and compatible with the joint, opening, penetrating item(s) and including the surrounding materials. B. Firestopping Fill Materials Provide one or more of the following: 1. Silicone elastomer compound: Single or multiple component, low modulus, moisture curing silicone sealant. 2. Ceramic sealant: Single component, moisture curing ceramic sealant. 3. Intumescent sealant: Single component, water based intumescent sealant. 4. Acrylic sealant: Single component acrylic sealant, suitable for painting. 5. Putty: Single component ceramic fiber base putty or intumescent elastomer putty that expands on exposure to surface heat gain. 6. Mortar: Hydraulic cementitious mortar. 7. Pillows or blocks: Formed intumescent or mineral fiber pillows or blocks. 8. Intumescent strips: Solvent free intumescent wrap strips. 9. Mechanical devices: Incombustible fillers or silicone elastomer covered with sheet stainless steel jacket, joined with collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops. 10. Cast-in-place devices: Containing intumescent material and smoke/water seals. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Forming and Damming Materials: As recommended by firestopping manufacturer for intended use. 1. Permanent: Mineral fiberboard, mineral fiber matting, or mineral fiber putty. 2. Temporary: Plywood, particleboard, or other. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions. Examination per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Carefully examine installation areas with Installer/Applicator present, for compliance with requirements affecting Work performance. 2. Correct each detrimental condition that will adversely affect the execution, permanence or quality of the work of this Section. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION FIRESTOPPING APR 2011

175 A. Surface Preparation: Refer to manufacturer s instructions and recommendations for preparation of substrate surfaces and openings to receive firestopping. B. Coordinate with fire protection, plumbing, mechanical, electrical and other trades to assure that all pipe, conduit, cable, and other items that penetrate fire rated construction have been permanently installed prior to installation of firestops and smoke seals. 3.3 INSTALLATION / APPLICATION A. Regulatory Requirements: Install firestop materials in accordance with published Through- Penetration Firestop Systems in UL s Fire Resistance Directory or the publication of another approved independent laboratory. B. Manufacturer s Instructions: Comply with regulatory and manufacturer s instructions for installation of firestopping materials. 1. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and water resistant seal. 2. Consult with mechanical engineer, project manager prior to installation of UL firestop systems that might hamper the performance of fire dampers as it pertains to duct work. 3. Strictly adhere to manufacturer s handling and installation safety requirements for items. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by firestop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur, nor reduce the fire rating below that required, and meet VOC requirements. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION FIRESTOPPING APR 2011

176 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION JOINT PROTECTION A. Furnishing, delivering, and installing the following work: 1. Elastomeric sealants 2. Precompressed foam sealers 3. Accessories: a. Backer rods b. Primers c. Bond breaking tapes 4. Equipment as needed to provide a warrantable installation a. Scaffolding: Provide and maintain interior and exterior scaffolding up to 8 feet in height as required for the execution of the work of this section. B. Related Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including GENERAL and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and SECTION , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to this Section. 1. SECTION , FIRESTOPPING: Firestopping sealants 2. DIVISION 15, MECHANICAL 3. DIVISION 16, ELECTRICAL 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Referenced Standards per SECTION , and current editions of the following: 1. ASTM. ASTM International; 2. SCAQMD. South Coast Air Quality Management District; SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Procedures: See Section B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer s printed product literature including products standards, identifying materials, chemical characteristics, substrate preparation, installation instructions with special procedures, use limitations, and recommendations. C. Samples: Submit three (3) representative samples of sealant colors for selection, 1/4 x 2 inch in size. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS: A. Submittal Procedures: SECTION Warranty Documentation: Copy of executed warranties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten (10) years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three (3) years experience. C. Mock-ups per Section , and as follows: Provide full-scale three-dimensional assembly of the typical exterior wall and roof assembly utilizing final specified materials and final production techniques. 1. Build Mock-up in location and size acceptable to Architect of type specified. JOINT PROTECTION APR 2011

177 a. Demonstrate the anticipated range of materials, workmanship and finish expected. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, and SECTION FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. B. Apply sealant only to dry surfaces on a dry day, at temperature of 40 deg F. and rising, and 8 mph winds or less, unless work area is enclosed, protected, and meets ambient requirements. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer / Special Warranty: Prepare and submit in accordance with SECTION Product: Provide written five (5) year material and labor warranty to correct defective work issued by the Manufacturer and Installer / Applicator upon completion of the work and beginning on the date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories that fail to achieve airtight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SEALANTS A. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide only products having volatile organic compound (VOC) content meeting requirements of SCAQMD Rule B. General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, G, and A; multi- component. 1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard and custom colors. 2. Applications. Use for joints < 5/8 inch: a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry b. Joints between concrete and other materials c. Joints between metal frames and other materials d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated C. Exterior Expansion Joint Sealer: Precompressed foam sealer; urethane with water-repellent; 1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer s standard color chart 2. Size as required to provide weathertight seal when installed. 3. Applications. Use for joints > 3/4 inch: a. Exterior wall expansion joints 4. Product / Manufacturer List. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: a. Emseal / Emseal U.S.A., Inc., Stamford, CT b. Compriband / Progress Unlimited, New York, NY c. Will-Seal / Will-Seal Construction Foams, Troy, MI D. Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: Butyl or polyisobutylene, nondrying, nonskinning, noncuring. 1. Applications. Use for: a. Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work b. Under thresholds E. General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade NF single component, paintable. 1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard and nonstandard colors. JOINT PROTECTION APR 2011

178 2. Applications. Use for: a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated F. Acoustical Sealant: Butyl or acrylic sealant; ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A; single component, solvent release curing, non-skinning. 1. Applications: Use for concealed locations only. a. Sealant bead between top stud runner and structure and between bottom stud track and floor G. Concrete Paving Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C920, Class 25, Uses T, I, M and A; single or multi-component. 1. Color: to be selected from manufacturer's full range of standard and non-standard colors.. 2. Applications: Use for Joints in sidewalks and vehicular paving. H. Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, A, G, M, O; single component, solvent curing, non-sagging, non-staining, fungus resistant, non-bleeding. 1. Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces 2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent 3. Service Temperature Range: -65 to +180 deg F. 4. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to Applications: Use for Joints in interior wet areas and around plumbing penetrations. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application B. Joint Backing: Round closed cell plastic foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D1667; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. C. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions. Examination per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Verify that surfaces, substrates, tolerances, humidity, moisture content level, ph level, cleanliness and other conditions are as required by the manufacturer, and ready to receive Work. 2. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protection of In-Place Conditions: Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement. B. Surface Preparation: In accordance with manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, and ASTM C Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. 2. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION / APPLICATION A. General: Install sealer systems as indicated by the Drawings, in accordance with sealant manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, and ASTM C Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919. JOINT PROTECTION APR 2011

179 B. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific dimensions are indicated. C. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. D. Apply primer to joints as necessary. If primer is applied to exposed surfaces outside sealed joints, remove it immediately using methods and materials recommended by primer manufacturer. E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. G. Apply joint backer rod to joints open in back or over 1/2 inch deep. Compress backing so as to form a firm stop, which will resist sealant pressure. If joint is not open in back, apply bond breaker tape. 1. Sealant joint dimensions shall be as follows unless indicated otherwise: a. For joints up to 1/2 inch wide, depth = 1/4 inch deep. b. For joints wider than 1/2 inch, depth = 1/2 inch deep or depth = 1/2 width, whichever is smaller. c. For fillet beads at joints with little anticipated movement, width = 1/2 inch diagonally. 2. Use gauge for inserting joint backing to proper depth. H. Drive sealant into joints, filling from the bottom up. I. Tool joints concave to match approved mock-up(s), and to produce neat, tightly adhering beads. J. Precompressed Foam Sealant: Do not stretch; avoid joints except at corners, ends, and intersections; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Correction of Non-Conforming Work per SECTION CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with construction waste management and disposal requirements of SECTION B. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces immediately with methods and materials recommended by the sealant manufacturer. C. Protect sealants until cured. END OF SECTION JOINT PROTECTION APR 2011

180 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION WOOD FRENCH DOORS A. Fabricating, furnishing, delivering, erecting and installing aluminum clad wood straight and arch top French doors and frames, inswing / outswing, sliding, and lift+slide operation as specified, as scheduled, and as shown in the contact drawings, complete with: 1. Glazing 2. Weather strip 3. Hardware 4. Insect screen 5. Simulated divided lite 6. Stationary sidelite 7. Stationary transom 8. Jamb extension 9. Anchors and fasteners 10. Trim 11. Attachments B. Related Sections: The Conditions of the Contract and General Requirements of the Project Manual apply to this Trade Contractor, material suppliers, and all other persons furnishing labor and materials under this Section. General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and applicable parts of Division 01 are included as part of this Section. 1. SECTION , FINISH CARPENTRY: Millwork wood trim other than furnished by door and frame manufacturer 2. SECTION , JOINT PROTECTION: Sill sealant and perimeter caulking 3. SECTION , DOOR HARDWARE: Hardware other than furnished by door and frame manufacturer 4. SECTION , PAINTING AND COATING: Paint or stain other than factory applied finish 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Alternate No. 2: Work of this Section is affected by SECTION , Alternates 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards per SECTION , and current editions of the following: 1. AAMA. American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2. ANSI. American National Standards Institute; 3. ASTM. ASTM International; 4. CPSC. U.S. Consumer Products Safety Commission; 5. Energy Star; 6. NFRC. National Fenestration Rating Council; 7. SIGMA / IGCC. Sealed Insulating Glass Manufactures Association / Insulating Glass Certification Council; 8. WDMA (or NWWDA.) (North American) Window and Door Manufactures Association; WOOD FRENCH DOORS APR 2011

181 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data per SECTION , and as follows: Submit manufacturer's printed descriptions of materials, components, adhesives, fasteners, and treatment systems; performance criteria; use limitations; preparation instructions and recommendations; storage and handling requirements and recommendations; and installation methods including: 1. Construction details and fabrication methods 2. Profiles and dimensions of individual components 3. IGU, hardware, accessories and finishes 4. Installation, site finishing, maintenance and cleaning B. Shop Drawings per SECTION , and as follows: Submit location plan with elevation, section, and detail drawings showing extent of wood door assembly, with keyed detail drawings indicating expansion, material transition, specific attachments and attachment requirements including the following: 1. Field Measurements: Indicate rough (R.O.) or masonry opening (M.O.) field measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Drawings: a. Elevations of Each Door: 1). Scale: Minimum 3/4" = 1'-0 (1:20) 2). Overall dimensions for each unit (width & height) clearly indicated as required, including; a). (M.O.) Masonry openings b). Trim width & height (complete finish perimeter, as assembled or knocked down by window manufacturer.) c). (R.O.) Rough opening d). Frame (jamb) width & height 3). Visible Glass Opening per pane and per door opening 4). Total door opening 5). Stile & rail widths (face dimensions) 6). Section references b. Door Section Details: 1). 3 = 1-0 scale (1:4) for typical frame/jamb sections and typical member components. 2). Head trim, jamb, and glass 3). Side trim, jamb, and glass 4). Door sill 5). Meeting (check) rails at swing & sliding units; astragal rails at swinging pairs. 6). Mullions (vertical trim, jamb, sash, & glass members between window units) 7). Sill-to-header mullions (horizontal trim, jamb, & glass members between French door units) 8). Bars and muntins (including, but not limited to, profile and glazing dimensions) c. Hardware and accessory systems 1). Weather-strip systems d. Glazing details C. Door Schedule: Submit indicating each door in project, referencing each unit to a specific elevation and style. D. Samples per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Initial for Selection: Submit printed color charts or sample chains indicating manufacturer s complete range for each type of material finish exposed to view that is not yet selected by Architect or specified. 2. Final Selection: Submit minimum 6 inch (150mm) long samples of each different profile (grain and species for clear finish) with proposed finishes, and fasteners including final aluminum finish for approval. a. Glazing system, quality of construction, and specified finish. WOOD FRENCH DOORS APR 2011

182 1). Submit minimum 12 x 12 inch sample for each different glazing system b. Molding Profiles: Custom or standard 1). Door stiles, rails and muntins with glazing stops 2). As applied to jamb/frame 3). As applied to trim c. Visible Components including, but not limited to: 1). IGU 2). Screen fabric d. Hardware escutcheons including, but not limited to: 1). Handles 2). Catches e. Each wood species to be used with selected finish indicating full range of expected variations. E. Quality Assurance Submittals per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Quality Control Submittals: Certificates: Submit manufacture s certifications indicating compliance with specified performance and design requirements 2. Test and Evaluation Reports: Submit certified test results by a recognized testing laboratory in accordance with specified test methods for each product and/or system indicating physical, chemical and performance characteristics. a. Rot-resistant preservative-treated wood and wood composites that comply with standards and other requirements. b. Indicate fire-retardant-treated wood and wood composites that comply with building code in effect for Project. 3. Qualification Statements: Submit a letter, on printed letterhead and signed by an officer of the firm, for each listed quality assurance qualification listed, attesting to meeting each requirement called out. F. Closeout Submittals per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Including, but not limited to, methods for maintaining installed products. 2. Executed Warranty Documentation: Manufacturers material warranties and installers workmanship warranty. 3. Record Documents: Drawings, Specifications, and Product Data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Approvals: 1. Emergency Egress or Rescue: Comply with requirements for sleeping units of NFPA 101 and IBC International Building Code with Vermont modifications. 2. Energy Star qualified High Performance Doors B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company with a minimum of fifteen (15) years experience specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section. C. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish system materials from one manufacturer for entire Project, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 1. Exception: Lift and Slide units may be by other manufacturers. D. Sustainability Requirements: 1. Wood Materials: FSC Certified meeting FSC-STD chain-of-custody requirements. 2. Adhesives: NO added urea formaldehyde. 3. Wood Field Finish: VOC limits per SCAQMD Rule 1168 a. < 100 g/l for Stains b. < 275 g/l for Clear Varnishes, Sanding Sealers, Clear Lacquers, Pigmented Lacquers c. < 550 g/l for Pigmented Shellac d. < 730 g/l for Clear Shellac WOOD FRENCH DOORS APR 2011

183 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, provisions of SECTION , and as follows: 1. Deliver in original packaging and protect from weather. 2. Prime or seal wood surfaces, including surface to be concealed by wall construction, if more than thirty (30) days will expire between delivery and installation. a. Seal unfinished top and bottom edges of door panels if door panels are stored at the job site more than one (1) week. 3. Store door panels flat on a level surface in a clean and dry storage area. 4. Condition doors to local average humidity before hanging. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer / Special Warranty: Prepare and submit in accordance with Closeout Submittals requirements of SECTION Wood Door System: Provide written ten (10) year material warranty for wood door system to be free from defects in manufacturing, materials, and workmanship as issued by the manufacturer upon completion of the work and beginning on the date of Substantial Completion. 2. Insulating Glass Provide written twenty (20) year warranty against visible obstruction through the glass caused by a failure of the insulating glass air seal as issued by the manufacturer upon completion of the work and beginning on the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Basis-of-Design Product and Manufacturer: Factory assembled Wood Ultimate and Arch Top Inswing French Doors, (and related stationary units) by Marvin Windows and Doors (Ripley, TN), or an Architect acceptable equivalent product subject to compliance with requirements from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Lowen 2. No Substitution. B. Basis-of-Design Product and Manufacturer: Factory assembled Wood Sliding French Doors by Marvin Windows and Doors (Ripley, TN), or an Architect acceptable equivalent product subject to compliance with requirements from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Lowen 2. No Substitutions C. Basis-of-Design Product and Manufacturer: Factory assembled Wood Lift + Slide French Doors by Hirschmann, or an Architect acceptable equivalent product subject to compliance with requirements from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Lowen 2. No Substitutions 2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Swinging French Door Design and Performance Requirements: Individual Unit Design Pressures / Performance Grade. DP40 / PG Energy Star: Meets requirements a. > 1/2-Lite b. U-Factor: < 0.32 c. SHGC: < NFRC Unit Factors: Wood Ultimate Inswing Arch Top (IG LoE II Argon) a. U-Factor: 0.30 WOOD FRENCH DOORS APR 2011

184 b. SHGC: 0.24 c. VLT: 0.40 d. CR: NFRC Unit Factors: Wood Ultimate Inswing (IG LoE II Argon) a. Door Sidelite Transom b. U-Factor: c. SHGC: d. VLT: B. Sliding French Door Design and Performance Requirements: DP40 (PG40) 1. Door units shall be designed to comply with ANSI / AAMA / NWWDA 101 / I.S.2-97 and 101 / I.S. 2/ NAFS-02, SGD-LC Air leakage shall not exceed the following when tested at 6.24 psf according to ASTM E283: 0.30 cfm per square foot of frame. 3. No water penetration when tested at the following pressure according to ASTM E547: 6.00 psf. 4. Assembly shall withstand a positive or negative uniform static air pressure difference of 60 psf without damage when tested according to ASTM E Energy Star: Meets requirements a. > 1/2-Lite b. U-Factor: < 0.32 c. SHGC: < NFRC Unit Factors: Door (IG LoE Argon) a. U-Factor: 0.31 b. SHGC: 0.27 c. VLT: 0.45 d. CR: NFRC Unit Factors: Transom (IG LoE Argon) a. U-Factor: 0.31 b. SHGC: 0.27 c. VLT: 0.45 d. CR: NFRC Unit Factors: Door (IG LoE Argon) a. U-Factor: 0.30 b. SHGC: 0.18 c. VLT: 0.40 d. CR: NFRC Unit Factors: Transom (IG LoE Argon) a. U-Factor: 0.31 b. SHGC: 0.18 c. VLT: 0.41 d. CR: 58 C. Lift + Slide French Door Design and Performance Requirements: DP40 / PG Energy Star: Meets requirements a. > 1/2-Lite b. U-Factor: < 0.32 c. SHGC: < NFRC Unit Factors: (IG LoE II Argon) 2.3 FRAME DESCRIPTION A. Swinging French Doors: Finger jointed, edge-glued white oak core with clear white oak veneer. B. Sliding French Doors: Finger jointed, edge-glued white oak core with clear white oak veneer. 1. Kiln dried to moisture content no greater than twelve (12) percent at the time of fabrication. WOOD FRENCH DOORS APR 2011

185 2. Water repellent, preservative treated in accordance with ANSI/NWWDA I.S.4. C. Frame width: 4-9/16 inches (116 mm); 6-9/16 inches (167 mm) D. Swinging French Door Frame Thickness: 1-3/32 inches (28 mm) E. Sliding French Door Frame Thickness: 1-1/16 inches (27 mm) F. Swinging French Doors: Beige, Bronze fiberglass reinforced pultruded sill inch (3.0 mm) thick. 1. White oak interior sill liner 2. White oak interior radius trim G. Sliding French Doors: Beige, Bronze fiberglass reinforced pultruded (FRP) sill inch (3.0 mm) thick, with a inch (1.3 mm) thick polycarbonate thermoplastic roller track. White oak, interior sill liner. (Interior doors to have 11/16 inch (17 mm) thick flat white oak sill with solid aluminum track). 2.4 PANEL DESCRIPTION A. General Door Panels: 1. Kiln dried to a moisture content no greater than twelve (12) percent at time of fabrication. 2. Water repellent, preservative treated in accordance with ANSI/NWWDA I.S Panel Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) 4. Top Rail and Stile Width: 4-3/4 inches (122 mm) 5. Bottom Rail Height: 8-1/8 inches (206 mm), edge glued. 6. Panel corners glued and fastened with 5/8 inch X 4 inch (16 mm by 102 mm) fluted hardwood dowels. a. Removable interior vinyl glazing stops with clear wood covers b. No visible fasteners B. Swinging French Door Panels: 1. Finger jointed, edge glued white oak cores with clear white oak veneer. a. Locking stiles contain LVL core with clear pine veneer 2. Locking stiles contain laminated veneer lumber (LVL) core with clear veneer. a. Panel corners glued and fastened with 5/8 X 4 inch (16 mm X 102 mm) fluted hardwood dowels. b. Removable interior vinyl glazing stops with clear wood covers; no visible fasteners 3. Sidelite Stile Width: 3 inches (76 mm) 4. Panel corners glued and fastened with 5/8 inch by 4 inches (16 mm by 102 mm) fluted hardwood dowels. C. Sliding French Door Panels: 1. Laminated veneer lumber (LVL) cores with white oak veneer. D. Lift + Slide French Door Panels: /4 inch (70mm) thick nominal with doweled fastened corners 2. Panel Style - Traditional: 6 inch (152mm) stiles and top rail with 8-1/8 inch (206mm) Bottom Rail 3. Stiles and Rails are LVL (laminated veneer lumber) core with clear, bare white oak veneer on interior. Preservative treated. 4. Wood glazing cap is applied to interior with vinyl base and connecting barb. Standard profile is ogee with option of square. 2.5 GLAZING A. General Glazing: 1. Select quality complying with ASTM C1036. WOOD FRENCH DOORS APR 2011

186 2. Comply with 16 CFR 1201 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials. 3. Tempered insulating glass SIGMA/IGCC certified to performance level CBA when tested in accordance with ASTM E Glass Type: Low E II Argon gas 5. Glazing seal: Silicone bedding, exterior. 6. Glazing Seal: Wood interior glazing stops fastened with 1-3/8 inch nails, sealed with silicone beads at perimeter. B. Swinging French Door Glazing Method: Laminated annealed interior and tempered exterior. C. Sliding French Door Glazing Method: Tempered insulating glass (Altitude Adjusted). D. Lift + Slide French Door Glazing Method: 1 inch (25mm) thick, tempered insulating glass 2.6 FINISH A. Exterior Aluminum / Interior Pine Wood: Aluminum finish to match windows, see SECTION ; Treated bare wood, latex prime coat, white. 2.7 HARDWARE - SWINGING A. Hinges: Standard adjustable hinges. Three (3) adjustable hinges on 6/5 and 6/8 heights; four on 7/0 and 8/0 heights. 1. Metal Finish: Oil Rubbed Bronze. 4. Butt Hinges / Inswing: Oil Rubbed Bronze B. Handle Set: Multi-point Lever set: 1. Metal Finish: Oil Rubbed Bronze. 2. Dummy Lever for Inactive Panels / Metal Finish: Oil Rubbed Bronze. C. Locking System: 1. Active panel: Concealed multi-point locking system. Stainless steel head and shoot bolts operated from lever set. One inch dead bolt. (Keyed alike) 2. Inactive panel: Manual stainless steel head and shoot bolts. a. Stainless steel head and shoot bolts operated from lever set. b. Multi-point locking system for inactive panel. 2.8 HARDWARE - SLIDING A. Handle Set Finish: 1. Metal Finish: Oil rubbed bronze PVD. B. Locking System: Marvin exclusive multi-point with 2 locking hooks, zinc plated steel mechanism stainless steel keepers. Locking system operated at handle assembly. (Key lock cylinder - for active handles). 1. Three-point locking system with stainless steel keepers and mechanism. C. Rollers: Two (2) adjustable steel (stainless steel) roller assemblies per operating panel. Two (2) ball bearing wheels per roller assembly. Maximum vertical adjustment: 5/16 inch (8 mm). 2.9 WEATHER STRIP A. Swinging French Door: Head jamb and side jambs to have two sets of bulb weather strip maintaining contact with door panels. 1. Threshold to have bulb weather strip maintaining contact with bottom of panel. 2. Fiberglass / Vinyl panel drip (IFD only) applied to bottom rail a. Color: black 3. Painted aluminum watershed and weep system at sill (IFD only) a. Color: bronze B. Sliding French Door: Interlock weather strip between sliding panel and meeting stile on stationary panel. WOOD FRENCH DOORS APR 2011

187 1. Two (2) sets of bulb weather strip on operating jamb. 2. Continuous slip coat weather strip along sill head jamb, and meeting stiles JAMB EXTENSION A. Jamb extension, factory installed or shipped loose at Contractors Option, for wall thickness indicated or required. B. Finish: Match interior frame finish WOOD FRAMED COMBINATION STORM AND SCREEN DOOR (OUTSWING) A. Door Panel: Clear pine or edge glued pine. 1. Kiln dried to a moisture content no greater than 12 percent at time of fabrication. 2. Water repellent preservative treated in accordance with ANSI/NWWDA I.S Panel thickness: 1-1/16 inch (27 mm). 4. Finish: Match exterior finish of frame. B. Screen Panel: - Screen Mesh: 18 by 16, HI-Tran fiberglass screen mesh. 1. Frame Finish: Oil rubbed bronze C. Storm Panel: Clear tempered glass. 1. Frame Color: Match door panel D. Hardware: Solid oil rubbed bronze handle, strike plate and hinges on 6/5 and 6/8 heights; four on 7/0 and 8/0 heights. Oil rubbed bronze flush mounted head and foot bolts with receptacles ALUMINUM FRAMED SCREEN DOOR (INSWING) A. Extruded aluminum sliding frame, top hung roller assembly with stainless steel ball bearings in nylon wheels, top rollers adjustable up to 1/4 inch (6 mm). Frame to have edge mounted wool pile bug strip. B. Screen Mesh: 18 by 16, HI-Tran fiberglass screen mesh. C. Frame Finish: Custom color to match Architect s sample. D. Hardware: Flush mounted zinc die cast handle on both sides of screen. Replaceable bottom glide. (Automatic closer and screen hold) REMOVABLE GRILLES A. Grille Size: 3/4 x 15/32 inch (19 mm x 12 mm); 1-1/8 x 15/32 inch (29 mm x 12 mm) 1. Wood Species: Pine 2. Pattern: Rectangular; Custom lite layout 3. Finish: Match interior panel / sash finish 2.14 SIMULATED DIVIDED LITES (SDL) A. SDL Size: 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide; 1-1/8 inch (29 mm) wide; (swinging door with internal spacer bars). 1. Muntins: Match unit wood. a. Muntins adhered to glass with double coated closed-cell copolymer acrylic foam tape. 2. Pattern: Rectangular; Custom lite layout. 3. Finish: Match panel finish RAISED OR FLAT PANELS A. Extira Panel for wood exterior or interior, utilizes 4-3/4 inch intermediate rail ACCESSORIES AND TRIM A. Installation and Hardware Accessories: 1. Aluminum Drip Cap Finish: Bronze 2. Installation Bracket Size: 6-3/8 inches (162 mm) WOOD FRENCH DOORS APR 2011

188 3. Masonry Brackets: 6 inches (152 mm) 4. Marvin SillGuard B. Exterior Wood Molding: 1. Profile: a. Brick mould casing b. Flat casing c. As indicated on drawings 2. Finish: Match exterior frame finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions per SECTION , and as follows: Before Installation, verify openings are plumb, square, and of proper dimension. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Beginning of installation confirms acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install Wood French Door systems according to the Drawings, approved submittals, manufacturer's instructions, SECTION , and as follows: 1. Assemble and install doors and frames according to the manufacturer s instructions and reviewed shop drawings. 2. Set door sills in full bed of sealant, install backing material, and sealant at head, side jambs, and as specified in SECTION Do not use expansive foam sealant. 3. Install frames and stationary panels as required. 4. Install accessory items as required. 5. Use finish nails to apply wood trim and moldings. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections: Blower door testing and infrared imaging per Section B. Correction of Non-Conforming Work per SECTION ADJUSTING A. Adjust door to work freely with hardware functioning properly. Re-adjust at completion of project if directed. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with cleaning, construction waste management, and disposal requirements of SECTION B. Remove visible labels and adhesive residue according to manufacturer s instructions. C. Leave doors and glass in a clean condition. D. Cover doors and frames during painting or other construction operations that may cause damage. E. Protect sill from damage by chemicals, solvents, paint, or construction traffic. END OF SECTION WOOD FRENCH DOORS APR 2011

189 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS A. Section includes, but is not limited to, furnishing and installing the following work: 1. Stile and Rail wood doors with solid wood clear finish 2. Factory pre-fitting, pre-machining for hardware, detailing, and factory prefinishing 3. Glass and glazing 4. Accessories as needed for a complete installation B. Related Documents and Sections: The Conditions of the Contract and General Requirements of the Project Manual apply to this Sub-Bid Contractor, material suppliers, and all other persons furnishing labor and materials under this Section. General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and applicable parts of SECTION , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, are included as part of this Section. 1. SECTION , DOOR HARDWARE 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Alternate No. 2: Work of this Section is affected by SECTION , Alternates 1.3 REFERENCES A. Abbreviations and Acronyms per SECTION B. Definitions per SECTION C. Reference Standards per SECTION , and current editions of the following: 1. AWI. Architectural Woodwork Institute; a. AWI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards, October 1, ). AWI 9 - AWI (AWS) Section 9, Stile and Rail Doors 2. ITS. Interlek/Warnock Hersey; 3. NFPA. National Fire Protection Association; a. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives b. NFPA Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Door Assemblies 4. SCAQMD. South Coast Air Quality Management District; a. SCAQMD Rule 1113 for Architectural Coatings 5. UL. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; a. UL 10B (neutral pressure) - Fire Test of Door Assemblies b. UL 10C (positive pressure) - Fire Test of Door Assemblies 6. WDMA (or NWWDA.) (North American) Window and Door Manufactures Association; SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Procedures: See SECTION B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer s published literature of product data for each type of wood door, including construction data, wood material species and cut, details of core, raised panel and edge construction, trim for lite openings and similar components, finishes, hardware attachment performance data, and door specification and installation instructions, cleaning instructions, and applicable standard warranty(ies). C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, including elevations, sections, and details, indicating door construction, dimensions, tolerances, materials, panels, hardware, glazing, louvers, finish, and as follows: STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS APR 2011

190 1. Door type 2. Door size 3. Fire Rating as applicable: a. Neutral pressure - UL 10B/UBC-43-2 or UBC b. Positive pressure - UL 10C/UBC Hardware types and locations with related door preparration 5. Panel Configuration 6. Lite opening size and location 7. Prefinish system type and approved color(s) D. Samples: Submit three (3) representative samples, minimum 6 x 8 inches, showing each different door wood species, cut and finish for approval. E. Prototype Construction Samples. Provide material assemblies, minimum 12 x 12 inches, of each door type for review and approval prior to benchmarking, manufacturing or fabrication production indicating each different: 1. Door faces 2. Raised Panels 3. Sticking profile 4. Edges 5. Core including hardware support 6. Corner construction and Joint connections 7. Finishes F. Certificates: Submit manufacturer s certification that doors comply with specified requirements and are suitable for intended application. G. Closeout Submittals per SECTION , and as follows: Executed Warranty Documentation 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Approvals: 1. Fire-Ratings Compliance: Fire-rated wood doors to comply with building code standards having local jurisdiction. Doors to be installed in accordance with NFPA-80. a. Neutral Pressure Testing - UBC 43-2 or UBC ; or UL10B b. Positive Pressure Testing UBC or UL10C 2. Identifying Label: Each door shall bear identifying UL or ITS label. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company with a minimum of ten (10) years experience specializing in manufacturing Stile and Rail Wood Doors as specified in this Section. C. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish Stile and Rail Wood Doors materials from one manufacturer for entire Project, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. D. Sustainability Requirements: 1. Wood Materials: FSC Certified meeting FSC-STD chain-of-custody requirements. 2. Adhesives: NO added urea formaldehyde. 3. Wood Field Finish: VOC limits per SCAQMD Rule 1168 a. < 100 g/l for Stains b. < 275 g/l for Clear Varnishes, Sanding Sealers, Clear Lacquers, Pigmented Lacquers c. < 550 g/l for Pigmented Shellac d. < 730 g/l for Clear Shellac 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, SECTION , and as follows: STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS APR 2011

191 1. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements a. Deliver doors to site in manufacturer s original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. b. Package doors individually in opaque plastic bags or cardboard cartons. c. Mark each door on top and bottom edge with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 2. Storage and Handling Requirements a. Store doors in clean, dry area indoors, protected from damage and direct sunlight. b. Store doors flat on level surface. c. Do not store doors directly on concrete. d. Keep doors completely covered. Use covering that allows air circulation and does not permit light to penetrate. e. Store doors between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C) and 25 to 55 percent relative humidity. f. Do not subject doors to sudden changes in temperature or relative humidity. g. Protect doors and finish during handling and installation to prevent damage. h. Handle doors with clean hands or clean gloves. i. Lift and carry doors. Do not drag doors across other doors or surfaces. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer / Special Warranty: Prepare and submit in accordance with SECTION Product: Provide written five (5) year warranty in interior use against warpage, delamination, and defects in materials and workmanship, issued by the manufacturer upon completion of the work and beginning on the date of Substantial Completion. a. Defects noted during warranty period shall be corrected at no cost to Owner. Corrective work shall include labor and material for repair, replacement, refinishing, and rehanging as required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer List. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.; 2. Eggers Industries; 3. Industrial Millwork / Lag Design; 4. The Maiman Company, an Assa Abloy Company; 5. VT Industries, Inc., 6. Substitution Limitations: See SECTION PERFORMANCE / DESIGN CRITERIA A. Compliance: AWI 9, PREMIUM Grade. 2.3 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS A. Stile and Rail Doors: 1. Type(s): As indicated a. Wood Panel b. Glass Panels c. Wood and Louver Panels d. Louver Panels 2. Stiles (Vertical Edges): Hardwood, one piece, matching rails. 3. Rails (Horizontal Edges): Hardwood, one piece, matching stiles. Rails are low-density lumber or structural composite lumber (SCL per WDMA) as specified in core section. STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS APR 2011

192 4. Panel Cores: Solid, 2 or 3 ply lumber; OR Veneered wood on particleboard, MDF, or agrifiber per WDMA - I.S. 1-A / AWI (AWS) PC-5 5. Veneers: 5-ply a. Minimum thickness: 1/20 inch b. Face Grade: Premium c. Cut: Quarter or rift sawn d. Species: White oak e. Match: Book f. Assembly: Joined with both 1/2 inch wooden dowels, and cope and stick joints. 6. Raised Panel Construction: Veneered Flat Panel 7. Panel Thickness: As indicated on the Drawings B. Inner Stile and Rail: Where scheduled 1. Non-Rated Doors and 20-Minute Fire-Rated Doors: Specified wood veneer pressed over structural composite (SCL) lumber core , 60-, and 90-Minute Fire-Rated Doors: Specified wood veneer pressed over noncombustible material core. C. Panels: 1. Specified wood veneer pressed over medium-density fiber core. 2. Specified wood veneer pressed over fire-retardant core. 3. Tempered Glass: ASTM C1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; of class, kind, thickness, and condition indicated. D. Stile and Rail Joints: Doweled construction. E. Hinges and Face Plates: Factory drill pilot holes. F. Sticking Used with Panels or Glass: As indicated by the Drawings. 2.4 HARDWARE A. Factory machine doors in accordance with templates from specified hardware manufacturers and hardware schedule. Refer to SECTION ACCESSORIES A. Acceptable Adhesives: Polyurethane Reactive (PUR) type meeting requirements. B. Glazing Accessories: 1. General: a. Compatibility: Provide materials with proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. b. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. c. Setting Blocks, Spacers: Compatible with TGU sealant. 2. Glazing Compounds: a. Butyl Sealant: Single component; Shore A hardness of 10 to 20; black color; nonskinning. b. Silicone Sealant: Single component; chemical curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color as selected. 3. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C864 Option I. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area 4. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I. Minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS APR 2011

193 self adhesive on one face 5. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; sizes appropriate to application; black color. 6. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM C864 Option I; black color. 7. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Factory Prefit and Bevel Doors (3 deg) to suit frame sizes indicated, with 3/16 inch prefit in width, + 0 / -1/32 inch, tolerances. Prefit top of door 1/8 + 1/16 / -0 inch, and undercut as designated by floor condition. For fire-rated doors comply with NFPA 80 for prefits and undercuts. B. Factory Pre-Machine Doors For Hardware that is not surface applied. Locations and hole patterns to comply with specified hardware requirements as per NFPA 80 standards for doors specified; and to maintain door manufacturer's warranty. C. Factory Preparation for Light Openings and Louvers: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with NFPA 80 requirements where indicated; and to maintain door manufacturer's warranty. 1. Wood beads and wood louvers to be compatible with face veneer. Profiles and installation per door manufacturer's standard(s). 2.7 FINISHES A. Stile and Rail Doors: Manufacturer s factory prime finish B. Field Finishing: All doors (including beading and moldings) to be factory primed and field finished. Perform additional preparatory work in compliance with AWI 9. See SECTION PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions - Examination per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Confirm that frames comply with type, size, location and swing requirements and that they are installed plumb, square, and are solidly anchored, allowing no deflection when doors are installed. 2. Inspect doors for damage, manufacturing defects or prefinish inconsistency, e.g. wrong color or poor finish. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions. B. Preinstallation Testing: Test substrate surfaces to verify that bond is not impaired. Abrade surface to ensure bonding using manufacturer recommended methods. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Allow doors to become acclimated to building temperature and relative humidity for a minimum of 24 hours before installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install Wood Doors according to the Drawings, Door Schedule, approved submittals, manufacturer's instructions, AWI 9, NFPA 80, and as follows: 1. Install doors plumb, level, square, true to line, without warp or rack. 2. Countersink exposed fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand smooth. 3. Seal exposed surfaces with a minimum of 2 coats of polyurethane within 4 days of fitting each door. 4. Install door hardware as specified in SECTION STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS APR 2011

194 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors to swing freely, without binding in frame, and adjust hardware to operate properly. B. Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer s instructions and as approved by Architect. C. Remove and replace damaged doors that cannot be successfully repaired, as determined by Architect. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean doors promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer s instructions. 1. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that could damage finish. 2. Place polybags over doors after adjusting and cleaning. B. Protect installed Stile and Rail Door work from construction operations until date of Final Completion or Owner occupancy, whichever occurs first. END OF SECTION STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS APR 2011

195 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION SECTIONAL GARAGE DOORS A. Fabricating, furnishing, delivering, erecting and installing the following Sectional Garage Door work: 1. Wood faced insulated sectional door assemblies as indicated 2. Accessories as required for a complete working installation, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Glazed vision window assemblies b. Support rails c. Weatherstripping d. Operating assembly e. Controls B. Related Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including GENERAL and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and SECTION , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to this Section. 1. SECTION , ROUGH CARPENTRY: Rough wood framing and blocking for door opening 2. SECTION , JOINT PROTECTION: Perimeter sealant and backup materials 3. SECTION , PAINT AND COATING: Field paint finish 4. DIVISION 16, ELECTRICAL: Electrical service and connections for powered operators 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Alternate No. 2: Work of this Section is affected by SECTION , Alternates 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Reference Standards per SECTION , and current editions of the following: 1. ANSI. American National Standards Institute; a. ANSI / DASMA Specifications for Sectional Overhead Type Doors 2. ASCE. American Society of Civil Engineers; a. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures 3. ASTM. ASTM International; 4. DASMA. Door & Access Systems Manufacturers Association, International; 5. UL. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; a. UL Door, drapery, gate, louver, window operators and systems 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Procedures: See SECTION B. Product Data: Provide information on component construction, anchorage method, hardware, and the following: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations 3. Installation methods 4. Garage-Door opener meeting requirements C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions and required tolerances, door construction, materials, components, connection details, anchorage spacing, hardware locations, and installation details. D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, provide two (2) complete sets of color SECTIONAL GARAGE DOORS APR 2011

196 chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. Submit wood samples. E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, provide two (2) samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns. F. Closeout Submittals per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Warranty Documentation: Executed warranties 2. Operation and Maintenance Data: Operating, cleaning and maintenance recommendations 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company with a minimum of ten (10) years experience specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section. B. Installer Qualifications: Company with a minimum of three (3) years experience specializing in work of the type required by this section. C. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish system materials from one manufacturer for entire Project, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. D. Sustainability Standards Certifications: 1. Certified Wood Materials: Wood Materials shall meet FSC-STD chain-of-custody requirements. 2. Halogen-Free: Provide materials free of halogenated compounds that are made with chlorine, bromine, fluorine, iodine and/or astatine. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, SECTION , and the following: 1. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. 2. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local AHJ. 1.7 WARRANTIES A. Manufacturer / Special Warranty: Prepare and submit in accordance with SECTION Door Assembly: Provide written ten (10) year material warranty against rot-through due to normal weather damage issued by the manufacturer upon completion of the work and beginning on the date of Substantial Completion. 2. Electric Operator: Provide written minimum ten (10) year material warranty issued by the manufacturer upon completion of the work and beginning on the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Product by Manufacturer List. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Access Custom Garage Doors; 2. Amarr Garage Doors; 3. Artisan Custom Doorworks; 4. Carriage House Door Company (FSC); 5. Clingerman Doors; 6. Clopay Corporation; 7. Architectural Harmony by Designer Doors, Inc.; 8. Equal Door Industries; 9. Fimbel ADS (Architectural Door Specialties); GADCO; SECTIONAL GARAGE DOORS APR 2011

197 11. Hahn s Woodworking Co.; IDC (Industrial Door Co.); Wayne-Dalton Corp., Substitution Limitations: Architect acceptable equivalents per SECTION PERFORMANCE / DESIGN CRITERIA A. Operation Type: Low headroom operating style with track and hardware B. Operation: Screw-drive Electric; UL rated 1. Provide sufficient power to operate door at average speed of 12 inches per second C. Wind Load: Design and size components to withstand loads caused by pressure and suction of wind acting normal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with applicable code, ASCE 7. D. Cycle Life: Design doors to withstand a minimum 100,000 opening and closing cycles according to ANSI/DASMA MATERIALS A. Wood Stile & Rail Sectional Door: 1. Wood Moisture Content: Kiln dried to between 8 and 12 percent 2. Wood Species: T&G Cedar, Western or Eastern Red 3. Core Insulation: Minimum R-10 CFC free expanded polystyrene or polyurethane B. Glazing Type: 1. IGU: 1/2 inch (12mm) thick 2. Glass Type: Clear tempered 3. Divided Windows: True muntins and mullions, with 1 inch sight profile 2.4 COMPONENTS A. Door Sections: As indicated by the Drawings 1. Type: Horizontal panels with top glazed transom for vertical operation 2. Overall Thickness: Nominally 3 inches 3. Exterior Face: Solid wood, clear grade for paint finish a. 4 inch v-groove b. Bead Board c. MDO d. Flush Face 4. Core Framing: Wood, structural Hem/Fir; kiln dried; non-finger jointed 5. Core Insulation: Minimum R-10, CFC-free polystyrene or polyurethane 6. Inside Face: Solid wood, clear stain grade B. Tracks: 1. 3 inches wide, roll-formed 13 gage galvanized steel, with galvanized steel mounting brackets. 2. Lower track sections adjustable for weathertight fit. 3. Horizontal tracks reinforced with minimum 13 gage galvanized steel angle according to door weight and size. C. Hinge and Roller Assemblies: Heavy duty hinges and adjustable roller holders of 33 ksi minimum, G-40 hot dipped galvanized steel, with floating hardened steel bearing rollers, located at top and bottom of each panel, each side. 1. Rollers: 3-inch diameter rollers; UHMW Polyethylene with sealed, precision ball bearings with hardened inner race, or an Architect acceptable equivalent. a. Rated for 100,000 cycles on a 12 foot tall door at 200 lb. b. Minimum of eight (8) rollers per door required. D. Spring Counterbalance: 1. Oil tempered torsion springs mounted on cross-header shaft supported by galvanized steel SECTIONAL GARAGE DOORS APR 2011

198 ball bearing end plates and center carrier brackets as required. 2. Counterbalance transferred to doors via aircraft quality braided steel lift cables. E. Bottom Weatherstripping: Durable plastic weatherseal, full width of door F. Head and Jamb Weatherstripping: Flexible one-piece durable plastic extrusions G. Lock: Operator function H. Exposed Fasteners: Stainless steel I. Operator: Electric 1. Power Supply: 115 VAC, single phase; with battery backup system 2. Operator Type: Power assisted motorized screw drive a. Remote Operation: Tenant operated access; rolling code technology 1). Keychain visor remotes; minimum two (2) 2). Wireless multifunction wall unit / control station: push button station marked OPEN and CLOSE 3). Wireless keyless entry pad 4). Wireless security light 5). Infrared safety sensors b. Acceptable Opener: Provide products by one of the following manufacturers meeting requirements: 1). Chamberlain (Liftmaster) 2). Genie 3). Architect acceptable equivalent J. Safety Device: 1. IR Sensors: Provide infrared safety sensors unless a UL 325 listed pinch-resistant door design is used. 2. Bottom Edge: Provide electric pneumatic edge; detect obstruction and reverse door upon contact with pneumatic hose. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Exterior Face Wood Exposure: Apply exterior wood trim for paint finish full vertical height of door prior to horizontal cuts into folding panels to exactly match grain. B. Framing: Solid kiln fried wood C. Joints: Mortise and tenon, glued and steel pinned D. Milling: Mill beading into edges 2.6 FINISH A. Field Finish: Factory primed plus two (2) coats of filed applied paint per SECTION and as scheduled. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions. Examination per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean all surfaces of dust, dirt and any other contaminants. Any scarring or stains that occur during transportation, handling or storage must be re-sanded to the original condition. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install door assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, SECTION , and as follows: 1. Anchor to adjacent wall construction without distortion or stress. 2. Securely brace door tracks suspended from structure. Secure tracks to structural members SECTIONAL GARAGE DOORS APR 2011

199 only. 3. Fit and align door assembly including hardware, level and plumb, to provide smooth operation. 4. Position head and jamb weatherstripping to contact door sections when closed; secure in position. 5. Coordinate installation of Electrical Service. Complete power and control wiring from disconnect to unit components. Make wiring connections between power supply and operator and between operator and controls. 6. Stain Finish: See SECTION a. After proper drying time for the stain, or if wood is being left natural, apply 1 coat of waterproof exterior Alkyd varnish (marine type varnish) to the interior and exterior surfaces, as well as all edges. b. After recommended drying time of 1st coat, sand all surfaces with fine grit (320) sandpaper. c. Clean all surfaces of sanding dust and apply a 2nd coat of the Alkyd varnish to the interior and exterior surfaces, as well as all edges. d. After 2nd coat is dry, sand all surfaces again with fine grit (320) sandpaper. e. Clean all surfaces of sanding dust and apply a final 3rd coat of the Alkyd varnish to all surfaces. f. Three finish coats of waterproof exterior Alkyd varnish are required to properly finish a stained or natural wood door. g. Use only a waterproof exterior Alkyd varnish top coat finish approved for stained or natural wood doors. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust to operate smoothly throughout full operating range, and be in full contact with weatherstripping. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. C. Correction of Non-Conforming Work per SECTION CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with construction waste management and disposal requirements of SECTION B. Clean doors, frames and glass. Remove labels and visible markings. C. Protect installed products until Substantial Completion. 1. Do not permit construction traffic through overhead door openings after adjustment and cleaning. END OF SECTION SECTIONAL GARAGE DOORS APR 2011

200 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION WOOD WINDOWS A. Work of this Section includes fixed and operable clad wood-framed window assemblies, and includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Wood window frames; aluminum -clad exterior with unfinished wood interior a. Awning Windows 1). Out-swing, crank b. Casement Windows 1). In-swing, crank 2). Arch Top c. Fixed Windows 1). Polygon 2). Round 3). Ellipse, custom 2. Insulated Glazing Units (IGU), LowE 2 types, double and triple glazed 3. Accessories a. Hardware b. Anchors and fasteners c. Insect Screen d. Jamb extension e. Trim, perimeter, flat casing and brickmold f. Self-adhering flexible weatherproof membrane flashings g. Perimeter polyurethane foam insulation B. Related Documents and Sections: Examine Contract Documents for requirements that directly affect or are affected by Work of this Section. A list of those Documents and Sections include, but is not limited to the following: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and DIVISION 01 General Requirements, Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 2. SECTION , ROUGH CARPENTRY: Window installation. 3. Work Provided by Other Sections that are attached or applied to products Furnished by this Section. a. SECTION , FINISH CARPENTRY: Interior trim at window jambs not furnished by window manufacturer. b. SECTION , JOINT PROTECTION: Sealing of sill and frame perimeter to rough opening. c. SECTION , PAINTING AND COATING: Field-applied paint or stain coating; paint furnished by window frame manufacturer. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Alternate No. 2: Work of this Section is affected by SECTION , Alternates 1.3 REFERENCES A. Referenced Standards per SECTION , and current editions of the following: 1. AAMA. American Architectural Manufactures Association 2. ANSI. American National Standards Institute; WOOD WINDOWS APR 2011

201 3. ASME. American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 4. ASTM. ASTM International; 5. AWI. Architectural Woodwork Institute; a. AWI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards , 1st Edition 6. FSC. Forest Stewardship Council; GANA. Glass Association of North America; a. GANA Glazing Manual - 50th Anniversary Edition (formerly FGMA Glazing Manual) 8. IGCC. Insulated Glass Certification Council; 9. IGMA. The Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (formerly SIGMA - Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association); a. CBA Level per ASTM E773 and E774 b. ASTM E2190, Harmonized Insulating Glass Standard (HIGS); and gas content 10. ISO/IEC. International Organization for Standardization, International Electrotechnical Commission; NFRC. National Fenestration Rating Council; SGCC. Safety Glazing Certification Council; SMA. Screen Manufacturer s Association; SIGMA. See IGMA above. 15. WDMA (or NWWDA.) (North American) Window and Door Manufactures Association; ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Coordinate certified material chain-of-custody from original material resource to project site. 2. Coordinate rough opening measurements with manufactured window units. 3. Coordinate air sealing and testing requirements. B. Preinstallation Meetings per SECTION , and as follows: Meeting purpose is to review site conditions, installation procedures, schedules, coordination with other work, blocking & shim requirements, air sealing procedures & testing, and warranty requirements. C. Sequencing and Scheduling Per SECTION and as follows: 1. Production and Delivery Schedules shall be based on reviewed Shop Drawings and sample submittals. 2. Payment Schedules shall be based on reviewed Shop Drawings and sample submittals. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data per SECTION , and as follows: Submit manufacturer's printed descriptions of materials, components, adhesives, fasteners, and treatment systems; performance criteria; use limitations; preparation instructions and recommendations; storage and handling requirements and recommendations; and installation methods including: 1. Construction details and fabrication methods 2. Profiles and dimensions of individual components 3. IGU, hardware, accessories and finishes 4. Installation, site finishing, maintenance and cleaning B. Shop Drawings per SECTION , and as follows: Submit location plan with elevation, section, and detail drawings showing extent of wood window assembly, with keyed detail drawings indicating expansion, material transition, specific attachments and attachment requirements including the following: WOOD WINDOWS APR 2011

202 1. Field Measurements: Indicate rough (R.O.) or masonry opening (M.O.) field measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Drawings: a. Elevations of Each Window: 1). Scale: Minimum 3/4" = 1'-0 (1:20) 2). Overall dimensions for each unit (width & height) clearly indicated as required, including; a). (M.O.) Masonry openings b). Trim width & height (complete finish perimeter, as assembled or knocked down by window manufacturer.) c). (R.O.) Rough opening d). Frame (jamb) width & height 3). Visible Glass Opening per pane and per sash opening 4). Total sash opening; call out if opening is a means of egress 5). Stile & rail widths (face dimensions) 6). Section references b. Window Section Details: 1). 3 = 1-0 scale (1:4) for typical frame/jamb/sash sections and typical composite members recommended. 2). Head trim, jamb, sash, and glass 3). Side trim, jamb, sash, and glass 4). Sill trim, jamb, sash, and glass 5). Meeting (check) rails at hung & sliding units; astragal rails at swinging pairs. 6). Mullions (vertical trim, jamb, sash, & glass members between window units) 7). Sill-to-header mullions (horizontal trim, jamb, sash, & glass members between window units) 8). Bars and muntins (including, but not limited to, profile and glazing dimensions) c. Hardware and accessory systems 1). Weather-strip systems d. Glazing details C. Window Schedule: Submit indicating each window in project, referencing each unit to a specific elevation and style. D. Samples per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Initial for Selection: Submit printed color charts or sample chains indicating manufacturer s complete range for each type of material finish exposed to view that is not yet selected by Architect or specified. 2. Final Selection: Submit minimum 6 inch (150mm) long samples of each different profile (grain and species for clear finish) with proposed finishes, and fasteners including final aluminum finish for approval. a. Glazing system, quality of construction, and specified finish. 1). Submit minimum 12 x 12 inch sample for each different glazing system b. Molding Profiles: Custom or standard 1). Sash stiles, rails and muntins with glazing stops 2). As applied to jamb/frame 3). As applied to trim c. Visible Components including, but not limited to: 1). IGU 2). Screen fabric d. Hardware escutcheons including, but not limited to: 1). Handles 2). Catches 3). Chains 4). Ropes e. Each wood species to be used with selected finish indicating full range of expected WOOD WINDOWS APR 2011

203 variations. E. Quality Assurance Submittals per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Quality Control Submittals: Certificates: Submit manufacture s certifications indicating compliance with specified performance and design requirements 2. Test and Evaluation Reports: Submit certified test results by a recognized testing laboratory in accordance with specified test methods for each product and/or system indicating physical, chemical and performance characteristics. a. Rot-resistant preservative-treated wood and wood composites that comply with standards and other requirements. b. Indicate fire-retardant-treated wood and wood composites that comply with building code in effect for Project. 3. Qualification Statements: Submit a letter, on printed letterhead and signed by an officer of the firm, for each listed quality assurance qualification listed, attesting to meeting each requirement called out. F. Closeout Submittals per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Including, but not limited to, methods for maintaining installed products. 2. Executed Warranty Documentation: Manufacturers material warranties and installers workmanship warranty. 3. Record Documents: Drawings, Specifications, and Product Data. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with AHJ for emergency egress and rescue requirements for sleeping units. B. Qualifications: 1. Window Manufacturer/Fabricator: A firm experienced a minimum ten (10) years in producing products similar to those indicated and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. a. Manufacturer/Fabricator/Supplier shall be capable of providing Third Party Certification that wood materials were legally harvested from sustainably managed forests. 2. Testing Agency: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, meeting requirements of ISO/IEC Standard or ASTM E699 and ASTM E329. C. Certifications: 1. Sustainability Standards and Certifications: Provide certified wood materials according to FSC-STD CoC requirements. 2. Provide window units rated for air infiltration, water penetration and structural performance per AAMA/NWWDA 101/1.S.2/A and as certified by a Testing Agency. 3. Provide window units rated and certified for thermal performance by NFRC, and for seal integrity of insulating glass seal. 4. Provide third-party certification that window meets or exceeds ASTM E1886 and ASTM E1996 Impact Resistant ratings. D. Source Limitations: Obtain woodwork, fabricated glazing, accessories and window assembly through one source from a single manufacturer. 1. Full scale three-dimensional assemblies utilizing final specified materials and final production techniques, constructed to be fully tested to ensure that the systems meet the performance requirements of the Specification by application of the maximum applied loads, climatic conditions, and structural movements. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING WOOD WINDOWS APR 2011

204 A. Delivery, Storage and Handling per industry and fabricator guidelines, SECTION , and as follows: 1. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: a. Deliver in original packaging and protect from weather. b. Fully insured shipments by the Manufacturer shall be made F.O.B. Destination. 2. Storage and Handling Requirements: a. Prime or seal wood surfaces, including surface to be concealed by wall construction, if more than thirty (30) days will expire between delivery and installation. b. Store window units in an upright position in a clean and dry storage area above ground and protect from exposure to weather. 3. Packaging Waste Management: Manufacturer s packaging shall be reusable, returnable or recyclable. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the window manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace window units that are not free from defects in manufacturing, materials, and workmanship within the following specified warranty periods: 1. Window Unit: Ten (10) years from the date of Substantial Completion. 2. Insulating Glass: Twenty (20) years from the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Marvin Windows ( or Architect acceptable equivalent manufacturer subject to compliance with requirements. 1. Lowen 2. No Substitutions. B. Basis of Design Products by Marvin Windows: Refer to sheet A5.1 - Window Schedule 1. Clad Awning: a. CUAWN b. CUAWN-ANGLED c. CUAWN-GANGED d. CUAWN-ARCHED e. CUAWN-ARCH 2 f. CUAWN-CUSTOM 2. Clad Casement: a. CUCA b. CUCA-ARCH TOP c. CUCA-CUSTOM d. CUCA-FIXED e. CUCA-ANGLED 3. Clad Polygon: a. CUSTOM-ANGLE 4. Clad Round: a. CRCIR b. CFCIR 5. Clad Casement Arch Top / Clad Ellipse Custom: a. CRT-CM 2.2 DESCRIPTION A. Description: Factory assembled prefinished aluminum clad wood awning and casement type, 90 deg crank out operating exterior swing windows, plus standard and custom polygon and ellipse WOOD WINDOWS APR 2011

205 fixed windows. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Glazing Standards: Comply with GANA Glazing Manual except where more stringent requirements are indicated. 2. Safety Glass: Per ANSI Z97.1 and CSPC 16 CFR Part 1201 testing requirements for Category II materials. a. Safety glass shall be permanently marked with SGCC certification label. 1). Exception: Safety glass without permanent markings may be provided when accompanied by written affidavit from the Window Manufacturer and/or the Glass Tempering Vendor certifying that safety glass has been provided in accordance with Federal law. 3. Insulating Glass Certification: Per IGCC and SIGMA recommendations except where more stringent requirements are indicated. 4. Wood Window Frame: AWI (AWS) Grade 1, plain sawn with AWI (AWS) Premium Grade Assembly for joinery, sanding, and tolerance deviation. a. Each sash stile and rail connection shall be glued and pegged/pinned, haunched mortise and tenon. b. Each bar and muntin connection shall be glued and pegged/pinned, coped, mortise and tenon. c. Jamb/frame assembly joinery shall be connected with dadoes or rabbeted joints and factory assembled. d. Sand surfaces to 120-grit without visible cross-sanding marks. e. Deviation Tolerances at Longitudinal Joints: Maximum x 8 inch (0.38mm x 203mm) of gap (minimum spacing 4 feet (1.2m)) f. Deviation Tolerances at Intersecting Joints: Maximum inch (0.635mm) of gap. g. Glue: Waterproof; applied in accordance with glue manufacturer's directions. 2.3 PERFORMANCE / DESIGN CRITERIA A. Design and Performance Requirements: Crank Out 1. Window units shall be designed to comply with: a. Design Pressure Rating per WWDA I.S. 11: > DP (PG) 50 b. Water and Air Leakage, Operating Force and Forced Entry: ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2-97 and 101/I.S.2/NAFS-02 c. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A for operable casement and awning windows d. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A for picture/ fixed casement windows 2. Wood (Frame & Sash) - General: a. Kiln dried to moisture content no greater than twelve (12) percent at the time of fabrication. b. Water repellent preservative treated in accordance with WDMA I.S Casement and Awning - Individual Unit Design Pressures / Performance Grade: DP/PG50 a Energy Star: Meets requirements 1). Opaque > 1/2-Lite 2). U-Factor: 0.21 < ). SHGC: no rating < 0.30 b. NFRC 101 Unit Factors: Clad Awning (3/4 IG LoE Argon) 1). U-Factor: ). SHGC: ). VLT: ). CR: 57 c. NFRC 101 Unit Factors: Fixed Clad Awning (1 Tri Pane High R Argon) 1). U-Factor: ). SHGC: ). VLT: 0.39 WOOD WINDOWS APR 2011

206 4). CR: 67 d. NFRC 101 Unit Factors: Clad Casement Operator (3/4 IG LoE Argon) 1). U-Factor: ). SHGC: ). VLT: ). CR: 58 e. NFRC 101 Unit Factors: Clad Casement Round Top (3/4 IG LoE II Argon) 1). U-Factor: ). SHGC: ). VLT: ). CR: 57 f. NFRC 101 Unit Factors: Clad Polygons (3/4 IG Low E II -- Argon) 1). Direct Glazed In-Sash 2). U-Factor: ). SHGC: ). VLT: ). CR: g. NFRC 101 Unit Factors: Clad Casement/Awning Picture (3/4 IG LoE Argon) 1). U-Factor: ). SHGC: ). VLT: ). CR: 58 h. NFRC 101 Unit Factors: Fixed Clad Casement/Awning Picture (1 IG LoE Argon) 1). U-Factor: ). SHGC: ). VLT: ). CR: 57 B. Window Frame: 1. Frame Interior: Clear White Oak or finger jointed core with clear White Oak veneer, AND clear Pine or finger jointed core with clear Pine veneer, as scheduled 2. Frame Thickness: 1-3/16 inches (30mm) 3. Frame Depth: Overall 5-21/32 inch (144mm) for full frame applications, and 4-9/16 inch (116mm) jamb depth from the nailing fin plane to the interior face of the frame for new construction. 4. Frame Exterior: Clad with inch (1.3mm) thick extruded aluminum C. Window Sash: 1. Wood Species: White Oak AND Clear Pine, as scheduled 2. Sash Thickness: 1-5/8 inches (41mm) with 3/4 inch (19mm) insulated glass. For 1 inch (25mm) insulated glass sash thickness shall be 1-7/8 inch (48mm). 3. Sash Exterior Cladding: inch (1.3mm) thick extruded aluminum D. Window Glazing: 1. Select quality complying with ASTM C1036. Insulating glass SIGMA/IGCC certified to performance level CBA when tested in accordance with ASTM E Glazing Method: Insulating glass (altitude adjusted). 3. Insulated Glazing Unit (IGU) Type: 3/4 IG LoE Argon, double glazed typical; a. Exception: Triple glaze LoE w/ Krypton where noted. 4. Glazing Seal: Silicone bedding at interior and exterior. 5. Sash Options: a. Tall Bottom Rail WOOD WINDOWS APR 2011

207 b. Interior Sticking: Ovolo E. Performance Capacities: 1. Thermal Efficiency - Whole Unit per NFRC U-Value: < ASSEMBLY / FABRICATION A. General: 1. Jambs/Frames: Comply with AWI (AWS) Premium Grade. a. Wood Joinery: Wood Joinery shall conform to AWI (AWS) Premium Grade Standards. b. Jambs: Solid Rabbeted, unless noted otherwise c. Expansion / Contraction Movement: Assemble wood products using details that allow for expansion and contraction due to changes in environmental conditions. 2. Screens: a. Removable and against or flush to the exterior blind stop with bullet catches or fasteners sufficient to hold screen frame securely in place and maintain taught fabric. b. White Oak Wood Frame: Comply with AWI (AWS) Premium Grade. c. Screen Mesh: High Transparency Mesh (Hi-Tran) 20x20 Charcoal Fiberglass 3. Sash: Comply with AWI (AWS) Premium Grade B. Hardware - General: 1. Double lined Jamb with a combination of bronze interlocking sill, and weather-strip around the full sash perimeter. 2. Sash lengths over 48 inches (1.2m) shall include two (2) sash locks. 3. Factory Finishes: As selected by Architect from manufacturer s full range. C. Awning Windows - Sash and Screen Hardware: 1. Rotor or lever operators shall be installed with independent sash locks. 2. Concealed hinge track and support arms with corrosion protection coating, and thermoplastic shoe with stainless steel insert. 3. Egress hinge action shall be available to maximize the opening area and an offset hinge action shall be available to allow easy access for cleaning the exterior glass surface from the inside. a. Butt hinges shall be solid oil rubbed bronze. D. Casement (Out-Swing) Windows with Sash and Screen Hardware: 1. Folding (crank) handle operator installed with independent sash locks. 2. Multipoint locking system with locking points activated by a single lever handle. 3. Concealed hinge track and support arms with corrosion protection coating, and thermoplastic shoe with stainless steel insert. 4. Egress hinge action shall be available to maximize the opening area and an offset hinge action shall be available to allow easy access for cleaning the exterior glass surface from the inside. a. Butt hinges shall be solid oil rubbed bronze. E. Fixed Window Sash: 1. Setup in jamb/frame types as consistent in design and shape as possible with related or adjacent operable sash wherever required to maintain fenestration site lines. 2. Fixed-in-place with removable stops or permanently attached to the jamb/frame with galvanized or stainless steel screws. 3. Fixed Sash Screwed into Jambs: Seal full perimeter with paintable sealant 4. Removable Fixed Sash: Seal with full perimeter weatherseal gasketing 2.5 GLAZING FABRICATION WOOD WINDOWS APR 2011

208 A. Glass and Glazing: 1. General: Provide glazing materials that are produced, fabricated and installed to withstand normal thermal movement and wind loading. a. Glass thickness' indicated on Drawings are for design detailing only. b. Glass lites for the various size openings, including thickness' and strengths (annealed or tempered), shall meet or exceed performance requirements. 2. Insulating Glass: Fabricated glazing shall be sealed with compatible materials from a single source manufacturer as follows: a. Insulating glass shall be double sealed using desiccated aluminum spacer, Tremco Poly-isobutylene (PIB) primary sealant, Tremco Proglaze silicone secondary sealant, set in Tremco JS-950 Silicone glazing sealant; or Architect acceptable equivalents. b. Insulating glass may also be fabricated with Edgetec Composite Super Spacer with hot-melt PIB sealant backer; or Architect acceptable equivalents. c. Spacer Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer s full range of offerings. d. Insulated glass described in this paragraph shall be supplied by a glazing company under contract with the window manufacturer or a division of the window manufacturer. 3. Specialty Glazings: 4. Insulated glass with sealed edges shall be set in rabbeted sash from the Interior sash face, permanently sealed to the Exterior of the sash rabbet in silicone sealant and fixed in place with wooden glazing stops set from the Interior and unsealed to the sash frame to allow condensation and other potential moisture accumulation to evaporate. 5. Refer to SECTION , GLAZING. 2.6 WINDOW HARDWARE A. Window Hardware: Manufacturer's recommended hardware necessary to operate, tightly close and securely lock windows so as to comply with requirements. 1. Operating Window Operator: Folding (crank) handle 2. Sash Lock: Manufacturer s standard 3. Color / Finish: As noted on the Drawings. B. Casement Crank Out - Factory installed Operating Hardware: 1. Hinges: Provide one at the sill to bottom rail, one at the head jamb to top rail. Hinges shall be steel coated with Egard. a. Hinge track shall be stainless steel. b. Units with a frame OM of 20 inches (508mm) and greater shall use an 18 inch (457mm) wash/egress hinge to allow the sash to slide across the frame opening which shall cause the sash exterior to rotate towards the user for easy wash ability. c. Units under a frame OM of 20 inches (508) width shall use a standard 2 bar hinge which will position the sash when fully open to 90 degrees for the user to wash, but does not include the feature of sliding the sash across the opening and rotating the exterior towards the user. C. Awning Crank Out: 1. Hinges: Two hinges that connect the stiles of the sash to the jambs of the frame. Hinges shall be steel coated with Egard, and hinge track to be stainless steel. 2. Handles: The standard operator handle set is a folding handle, zinc painted with the standard folding cover being molded plastic. a. Plated Color: Oil Rubbed Bronze 3. Locks: Provide multi-point, sequential, concealed locking system in both jambs. Standard tie bar, cams and keepers are steel coated with Egard. 4. Power Drive: Remote control operating system applied in the field. a. Install op-o-lock on the Awning Window. Power Drive will also engage the cam locks. WOOD WINDOWS APR 2011

209 D. Weather Strip (If the op-o-lock is not used the sash locks must be manually engaged.) b. Minimum Awning Frame Width for Power Drive: 18 inch or wider c. Color: Bronze 1. Frame Weather Strip: Hollow foamed material bent around 90-degree corner to allow for seamless corner joints beige in color. 2. Sash Weather Strip: Bulb shaped glass filled material a. Color: Black 2.7 ACCESSORIES AND TRIM A. Jamb Extension 1. Jamb Extensions: Factory applied a. Wall Thickness Width: 7-1/2 to 12 inch b. Finish: Match interior frame finish. B. Simulated Divided Lites (SDL) 1. SDL Width: 3/4 inch (19mm)with spacer bars. 2. Exterior Muntins: inch (1.4mm) thick extruded aluminum. 3. Interior Muntins: Muntins adhered to glass with closed-cell copolymer acrylic foam tape. 4. Wood Type: Match frame and sash wood species. 5. Pattern: Rectangular; Custom lite layout. 6. Finish: a. Exterior: Match clad color b. Interior: Match wood species finish C. Grilles-Between-The-Glass (GBG): 11/16 inch (17mm) width contoured aluminum bar D. Spacer Bar: Flat aluminum E. Installation Accessories: 1. Factory installed vinyl nailing fin/drip cap. 2. Installation Brackets: 6-3/8 inch (162mm) 3. Masonry brackets: 6 inch (152mm) F. Prefinished Aluminum Extrusions- Profile Types: 1. Brick Mould 2. Flat Casing 3. Brick Mould Arched 4. Ganged - Perimeter Casing G. Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant of appropriate type, length and durability for wood product used to securely fasten to the substrate for the intended life and use of the unit. 1. Sash: Tenons shall be pegged/pinned with hardwood pegs or stainless steel pins. 2. Jamb/Frames: Dadoed joints shall be screwed with galvanized or stainless steel screws. 3. Glazing stops shall be fastened with galvanized or painted head nails resistant to bleed through. 4. Jamb/Frame assemblies shall be fastened to Rough Openings with galvanized or stainless steel screws per ASME B and ASME as supplied by Window Manufacturer. Other fasteners required for a successful installation are the responsibility of the Installing Contractor, as approved by the architect. 5. Trim systems shall be fastened to Jamb/Frame assemblies with galvanized or painted head WOOD WINDOWS APR 2011

210 nails resistant to bleed through or galvanized screws. 6. Adhesive sealants between trim and jamb and at all dadoed jamb connections shall be Tremco JS-950 silicone or an Architect acceptable equivalent sealant suitable for painting. H. Accessories Include, but are not limited to: 1. Security System Hardware and other Sensory Devices 2. Decoration and other materials not necessarily required to operate, tightly close and securely lock windows. 2.8 FINISHES A. Exterior - Aluminum Clad: AAMA 2605 Fluoropolymer modified acrylic topcoat applied over primer. 1. Custom Color: Match Architect s sample. B. Wood Screen Frame Finish: See window locations for locations. 1. Stained and clear sealed per SECTION C. Interior - Paint Finish: Field finish per SECTION Pretreatment: Sherwin Williams Sher-Wood Homoclad Preservative Treatment; or an Architect acceptable equivalent. 2. Primer: One or two coats of Sherwin-Williams A-100 Alkyd Exterior Wood White pigmented primer; or an Architect acceptable equivalent. 3. Finish Coats: Two of Sherwin-Williams' exterior Acrylic SUPERPAINT; or an Architect acceptable equivalent. 4. Topcoat: A-100 shall be top coated with an acrylic, alkyd or oil based finish Year SW Warranty 6. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer s full range of standard and custom colors. 7. Interior - Clear Finish: Tung oil with UV inhibitors 8. One coat of ; or an Architect acceptable equivalent. 9. Two coats of Waterlox Marine Finish; or an Architect acceptable equivalent. 10. High gloss (8-9 coats) 11. Semi-gloss 12. Natural weathered appearance (2 coats) D. Wood Stabilization & Preservative Treatment: 1. Sherwin-Williams Sher-Wood Homoclad preservative treatment; or an Architect acceptable equivalent. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions. Examination per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Test substrates as recommended by manufacturer to verify proper conditions of cleanliness and moisture content. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Preparation per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Layout installation by marking extents of each item, and anchoring / fastening locations coordinated with blocking or other structural support. a. Marks shall be covered up and hidden by installation. WOOD WINDOWS APR 2011

211 b. Locate areas out-of-level and correct. 2. Protect adjacent substrates, installed work and existing items from damage by construction operations with temporary but effective means that does not damage substrates and is not hazardous. 3. Product Preparation: Handle and install products in strict accordance with manufacturer s instructions and warranty requirement including, but not limited to: a. Remove shipping / storage protection b. Acclimatizing products to installation location. B. Provide fasteners, sealants and other accessory materials required to successfully complete the window installation that are not specified and supplied by the Window Manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Assemble and Install Wood Windows per manufacturer s written instructions, reviewed submittals, SECTION , SECTION , and the following: 1. Install sealant and related backing materials at perimeter of unit or assembly in accordance with SECTION Do not use expansive foam sealant. 2. Install accessory items as required. a. Install manufacturer s Jamb Extension, shipped loose, in the field. 3. Use finish nails to apply wood trim and moldings. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests and Inspections per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Conduct Blower Door Testing, and Infrared Scope & Analysis to ensure a Contiguous Insulation and Air-Sealed Envelope per SECTION Field water spray test of installed window(s) for leaks per ASTM E547. Installed window(s) for testing as selected by Architect. B. Correction of Non-Conforming Work per SECTION CLEANING A. Provide waste management and disposal, progress cleaning, and final cleaning immediately prior to Substantial Completion inspection in accordance with SECTION Remove visible labels and adhesive residue according to manufacturer s instructions. 2. Leave windows and glass in a clean condition. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed work from construction operations and other damage until Final Completion or Owner occupancy, whichever comes first. 1. Protect windows from damage by chemicals, solvents, paint, or other construction operations that may cause damage END OF SECTION WOOD WINDOWS APR 2011

212 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION FINISH HARDWARE A. Section includes, but is not limited to, furnishing and installation of all mechanical and electrical finish hardware necessary for all doors, and hardware as specified herein and as enumerated in hardware sets and as indicated and required by actual conditions at the building. The hardware shall include the furnishing of all necessary screws, bolts, expansion shields, drop plates, and all other devices necessary for the proper application of the hardware. Installation shall include field modification and preparation of existing doors and/or frames for new hardware being installed. B. Related Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including GENERAL and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and SECTION , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to this Section. 1. SECTION , WOOD FRENCH DOORS 2. SECTION , STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 3. DIVISION 16, ELECTRICAL: Intrusion detection system C. Specific Omissions: Hardware for the following is specified or indicated elsewhere, unless specifically listed in the hardware sets: 1. Windows 2. Cabinets of all kinds, including open wall shelving and locks. 3. Signage, except as noted. 4. Complete toilet accessories including coat hooks, unless note otherwise. 5. Overhead doors, unless noted otherwise. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Referenced Codes and Standards per SECTION , and current editions of the following: 1. ADA. Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990; a. ADAAG (28 CFR Part 32) - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines, plus VT State Amendments 2. ANSI. American National Standards Institute; a. ANSI/BHMA A A156.29, and ANSI A Standards for Hardware and Specialties 3. DHI. Door and Hardware Institute; a. Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule b. Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware 4. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association a. NFPA 70 National Electric Code b. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows c. NFPA Life Safety Code d. NFPA Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies 5. UL. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; a. UL 10B - Fire Test of Door Assemblies b. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Test of Fire Door Assemblies c. UL Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies d. UL Panic Hardware FINISH HARDWARE APR 2011

213 6. Vermont Fire Prevention and Building Code a. The International Building Code, IBC, 2006 edition b. The Life Safety Code, NFPA 101, 2006 edition 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and DIVISION 01 requirements. B. Catalog Cuts: Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. C. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Submit schedule with hardware sets in vertical format as illustrated by the Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the Door and Hardware Institute. Indicate complete designations of each item required for each door or opening, Include the following information: 1. Door Index; include door number, heading number, and Architects hardware set number. 2. Opening Lock Function Spreadsheet; list locking device and function for each opening. 3. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. 4. Name and manufacturer of each item. 5. Fastenings and other pertinent information. 6. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings. 7. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 8. Mounting locations for hardware. 9. Door and frame sizes and materials. 10. Name and phone number for the local manufacturer's representative for each product. 11. Operational Description of openings with any electrified hardware (locks, exits, electromagnetic locks, electric strikes, automatic operators, door position switches, magnetic holders or closer/holder units, and/or access control components). Operational description should include how the door will operate on egress, ingress, and/or fire/smoke alarm connection. D. Key Schedule: Provide a keying schedule, listing the levels of keying, as well as an explanation of the key system's function, the key symbols used, and the door numbers controlled. Samples: If requested by the Architect, submit production sample or sample installations as requested of each type of exposed hardware unit in the finish indicated, and tagged with a full description for coordination with the schedule. E. Samples: If requested by the Architect, submit production sample or sample installations as requested of each type of exposed hardware unit in the finish indicated, and tagged with a full description for coordination with the schedule. 1. Samples will be returned to the supplier in like-new condition. Units that are acceptable to the Architect may, after final check of operations, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of key coordination requirements. F. Templates: After final approval of the hardware schedule, provide templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. G. Riser and Wiring Diagrams: After final approval of the hardware schedule, submit riser and wiring diagrams as required for the proper installation of complete electrical, electromechanical, and electromagnetic products. H. Operations and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with DIVISION 01 and include the following: 1. Complete information on care, maintenance, and adjustment; data on repair and replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes. FINISH HARDWARE APR 2011

214 2. Catalog pages for each product. 3. Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer. 4. Parts list for each product. 5. Copy of final approved hardware schedule, edited to reflect As installed. 6. Copy of final keying schedule. 7. As installed Wiring Diagrams for each opening connected to power, both low voltage and 110 volts. 8. Copy of warranties including appropriate reference numbers for manufacturers to identify the project. I. Certificates of Compliance: Upon request of Architect or Authority Having Jurisdiction certificates of compliance for fire-rated hardware and installation instructions shall be made available. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Substitutions: Products are to be those specified to ensure a uniform basis of acceptable materials. Requests for substitutions must be made in accordance with Division 1 requirements. If proposing a substitute product, submit product data for the proposed item with product data for the specified item and indicate basis for substitution and savings to be made. Provide sample if requested. Certain products have been selected for their unique characteristics and particular project suitability. 1. Items specified as "no substitute shall be provided exactly as listed. 2. Items listed with no substitute manufacturers listed have been requested by the Owner or Architect to match existing for continuity and/or future performance and maintenance standards or because there is no known equal product. 3. If no other products are listed in a category, then "no substitute" is implied. B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities in the Project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that provides a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available to the Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work for consultation. C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and locksets, hinges, exit devices, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer. D. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by Underwrites Laboratories, Intertek Testing Services, or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels. E. Electronic Security Hardware: When electrified hardware is included in the hardware specification, the hardware supplier must employ an individual knowledgeable in electrified components and systems, who is capable of producing wiring diagrams and consulting as needed. Coordinate installation of the electronic security hardware with the Architect and electrical engineers and provide installation and technical data to the Architect and other related subcontractors. Upon completion of electronic security hardware installation, inspect and verify that all components are working properly. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final hardware schedule, and include installation instructions with each item or package. B. Each article of hardware shall be individually packaged in manufacturer's original packaging. C. Contractor will provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items so that completion of Work will not FINISH HARDWARE APR 2011

215 be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. D. Items damaged in shipment shall be replaced promptly. E. Hardware shall be handled in a manner to avoid damage, marring, or scratching. Irregularities that occur to the hardware after it has been delivered to the Project shall be corrected, replaced, or repaired by the Contractor. Hardware shall be protected against malfunction due to paint, solvent, cleanser, or any chemical agent. F. No direct shipments will be allowed unless approved by the Contractor. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's warrantees as specified in DIVISION 01 and as follows: 1. Closers: 10 years, except electronic closers, 2 years. 2. Exit Devices: 10 years, except electrified devices, 1 year. 3. Locksets: 1 year. 4. Continuous Hinges: 10 years. 5. Other hardware: 1 year. B. Products judged to be defective during the warranty period shall be replaced or repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's warranty, at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.7 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. The Awarding Authority has determined that certain products should be selected for their unique characteristics and particular project suitability to insure continuity of existing and future performance and maintenance standards. After investigating available product offerings the Awarding Authority has elected to prepare proprietary specifications. These products are specified with the notation: No Substitute (NO OTHER PRODUCTS WILL BE CONSIDERED FOR THOSE LISTED IN PROJECTS DOCUMENTS.) B. Approval of manufacturers other than those listed shall be in accordance with paragraph 1.05.A. C. Note that even though an acceptable substitute manufacturer may be listed, the product must provide all the functions and features of the specified product or it will not be approved. Item Scheduled Manufacturer Acceptable Substitute Hinges Ives (IVE) Hager, McKinney, Stanley Continuous Hinges Ives(IVE) McKinney, Stanley, Hager Flush Bolts & Coordinators Ives (IVE) Burns, Rockwood Locksets & Deadlocks Bravura Brass (FRS), Rocky As pre-approved Mountain Hardware (RKY), Schlage (SCH) Pocket Door Locks Accurate (ACC) As pre-approved Door Closers LCN (LCN) Door Trim Ives (IVE), Burns Protection Plates Ives (IVE) Burns, Rockwood Roller Latches Ives (IVE) Burns, Rockwood Overhead Stops Glynn-Johnson (GLY) Rixson, Sargent Stops & Holders Ives (IVE) Burns, Rockwood FINISH HARDWARE APR 2011

216 Thresholds & Weatherstrip Reese (RES), Door and Pemko, Zero, National Hardware Systems, Inc. Guard Silencers Ives (IVE) Burns, Rockwood Cylinders & Keying Schlage (SCH) As pre-approved Pocket Door Hardware Hafele (HAF) As pre-approved D. Hand of Door: Drawings show direction of slide, swing, or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as shown. E. Where the hardware specified is not adaptable to the finished shape or size of the members requiring hardware, furnish suitable types having the same operation and quality as the type specified, subject to the Architect's approval. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Fasteners 1. Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. 2. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish, or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including "prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish. 3. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent that no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Review door specification and advise Architect if thrubolts are required. 4. Hardware shall be installed with the fasteners provided by the hardware manufacturer. B. Hinges 1. Provide five-knuckle, ball bearing hinges of type, material, and height as outlined in the following guide for this specification: a. 1-3/4 inch thick doors, up to and including 36 inches wide: 1). Exterior: standard weight, bronze/stainless steel, 4-1/2 inches high 2). Interior: standard weight, steel, 4-1/2 inches high b. 1-3/4 inch thick doors over 36 inches wide: 1). Exterior: heavy weight, bronze/stainless steel, 5 inches high 2). Interior: heavy weight, steel, 5 inches high c. 2 inches or thicker doors: 1). Exterior: heavy weight, bronze/stainless steel, 5 inches high 2). Interior: heavy weight, steel, 5 inches high 2. Provide three hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height, and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional door height. 3. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows: a. Steel Hinges: Steel pins b. Non-Ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins c. Out-Swinging Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins d. Out-Swinging Interior Lockable Doors: Non-removable pins e. Interior Non-lockable Doors: Non-rising pins 4. Provide hinges with electrified option where specified. Provide with sufficient number and gage of concealed wires to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Locate electric hinge at second hinge from bottom or nearest to the electrified locking component. 5. Provide mortar guard for each electrified hinge specified, unless specified in hollow metal frame specification. FINISH HARDWARE APR 2011

217 6. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Ives 5BB series, Hager BB series, McKinney TA/T4A series, Stanley FBB Series. C. Pocket Door Track 1. Provide complete sets of pocket door hardware as recommended by the manufacturer for the door type and weight. a. Include track, hangers, fasteners, guides, and all hardware required for a complete installation. 2. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Hafele D. Flush Bolts 1. Provide automatic and manual flush bolts with forged bronze face plates, extruded brass levers, and with wrought brass guides and strikes. Provide 12 inch steel or brass rods at doors up to 90 inches in height. Top rods at manual flush bolts for doors over 90 inches in height shall be increased by 6 inches for each additional 6 inches of door height. Provide dust-proof strikes at each bottom flush bolt. 2. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Ives, Burns, Rockwood. E. Coordinators 1. Provide a bar-type coordinating device, surface applied to the underside of the stop at the frame head where pairs of doors are equipped with automatic flush bolts, an astragal, or other hardware that requires synchronized closing of the doors. 2. Provide a filler bar of the correct length for the unit to span the entire width of the opening, and appropriate brackets for parallel arm door closers and surface vertical rod exit device strikes. Factory-prep coordinators for vertical rod devices if required. 3. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Ives, Burns, Rockwood. F. Mortise Locks 1. Provide mortise locks certified as ANSI A156.13, Grade 1 Operational, Grade 1 Security, and manufactured from heavy gauge steel, containing components of steel with a zinc dichromate plating for corrosion resistance. Lock case shall be multi-function and field reversible for handing without opening the case. Cylinders: Refer to 2.4 KEYING. 2. Provide locks with a standard 2-3/4 inches backset with a full 3/4 inch throw stainless steel mechanical anti-friction latchbolt. Deadbolt shall be a full 1 inch throw, constructed of stainless steel. 3. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim. 4. Lever trim shall be solid brass, bronze, or stainless steel, cast or forged in the design specified, with wrought roses and external lever spring cages. Levers shall be thru-bolted to assure proper alignment, and shall have a 2-piece spindle. a. Lever design shall be Frascio 403 EURO Lever. b. Lever trim on the secure side of doors serving rooms considered by the authority having jurisdiction to be hazardous shall have a tactile warning. 5. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Schlage L9000 series, Best 45H series, Sargent 8200 series. G. Cylindrical Locks 1. Provide cylindrical locks conforming to ANSI A156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1. Cylinders: Refer to 2.4 KEYING. 2. Provide locks with a standard 2-3/8 inches backset, unless noted otherwise, with a 1/2 inch latch throw. Provide proper latch throw for UL listing at pairs. 3. Provide locksets with a separate anti-rotation throughbolts, and shall have no exposed screws. Levers shall operate independently, and shall have two external return spring cassettes mounted under roses to prevent lever sag. 4. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim. FINISH HARDWARE APR 2011

218 5. Provide electrical options as scheduled. 6. Lever trim shall be solid cast levers without plastic inserts, and wrought roses on both sides. Locksets shall be thru-bolted to assure proper alignment. a. Lever design shall be L224 (Rocky Mountain). b. Lever design shall be (945-1 (Bravura Brass). c. Lever trim on the secure side of doors serving rooms considered by the authority having jurisdiction to be hazardous shall have a tactile warning. 7. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Rocky Mountain (Arched Series), Bravura Brass. H. Pocket Door Locks 1. Provide mortise pocket door lock series and function as specified. Cylinders: Refer to 2.04 KEYING. 2. Provide mortise pocket door lock with a standard 2-3/4 inches backset. 3. Provide manufacturers standard strike. 4. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Accurate 2002 Series, as pre-approved. I. Door Closers 1. Provide door closers certified to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements by a BHMA certified independent testing laboratory. Surface mounted mechanical closers shall be certified to exceed ten million (10,000,000) full load cycles by a recognized independent testing laboratory. Closers shall be ISO 9000 certified. Units shall be stamped with date of manufacture code. 2. Door closers shall have fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with a high strength cast iron cylinder and metal cover, and shall utilize full complement bearings at shaft. Cylinder body shall be 1-1/2 inch diameter, and double heat-treated pinion journal shall be 11/16 inch diameter. 3. Provide hydraulic fluid requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F. Fluid shall be fireproof and shall pass the requirements of the UL10C positive pressure fire test. 4. Provide special templates, drop plates, mounting brackets, or adapters for arms as required for details, overhead stops, and other finish hardware items interfering with closer mounting. 5. Acceptable manufacturer and/or product: LCN 1460 series J. Door Trim 1. Provide push plates as specified. 2. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Rocky Mountain, Ives, Burns, Rockwood. K. Protection Plates 1. Provide kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates minimum of inch thick and beveled 4 edges as scheduled. Furnish with machine or wood screws, finished to match plates. Sizes of plates shall be as follows: a. Kick Plates 10 inches high x 2 inches less width of door on single doors, 1 inch less width of door on pairs b. Mop Plates 4 inches high x 2 inches less width of door on single doors, 1 inch less width of door on pairs c. Armor Plates 36 inches high x 2 inches less width of door on single doors, 1 inch less width of door on pairs 2. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Ives, Burns, Rockwood. L. Roller Latches 1. Provide roller latches with a 4-7/8 inches strike at single doors to fit ANSI frame prep. If dummy levers are used in conjunction with roller latch mount the roller latch at a height as FINISH HARDWARE APR 2011

219 to not interfere with the proper mounting and height of the dummy lever. 2. Provide roller latches 2-1/4 inches full lip strike at pair doors. Mount roller in the top rail of each leaf per manufacturer s template. 3. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Ives, Burns, Rockwood. M. Overhead Stops and Overhead Stop/Holders 1. Provide heavy or medium duty and concealed or surface mounted overhead stop or overhead stop/holder for interior doors as specified. Provide medium duty surface mounted overhead stop for interior doors and at any door that swings more than 140 degrees before striking a wall, open against equipment, casework, sidelights, and/or where conditions do not allow a wall stop or a floor stop presents a tripping hazard. 2. Where overhead holders are specified provide friction type at doors without a closer and positive type at doors with a closer. 3. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Glynn-Johnson, Rixson, Sargent. N. Door Stops and Holders 1. Provide door stops for all doors in accordance with the following requirements: a. Provide wall stops wherever possible. Provide convex type where mortise type locks are used and concave type where cylindrical type locks are used. b. Where wall stops cannot be used, provide dome type floor stops of the proper height. c. At any opening where a wall or floor stop cannot be used, a medium duty surface mounted overhead stop shall be used. 2. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Ives, Burns, Rockwood. O. Thresholds, Seals, Door Sweeps, Automatic Door Bottoms, and Gasketing 1. Provide thresholds, weatherstripping (including door sweeps, seals, astragals) and gasketing systems (including smoke, sound, and light) as specified and per architectural details. Match finish of other items as closely as possible. Size of thresholds shall be as follows: a. Saddle Thresholds 1/4 inch high x jamb width x door width b. Bumper Seal Thresholds 1/2 inch high x 5 inches wide x door width 2. Provide door sweeps, seals, astragals, and auto door bottoms only of type where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available. 3. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: National Guard, Reese, Zero, Pemko. P. Silencers 1. Provide "Push-in" type silencers for each hollow metal or wood frame. Provide three for each single frame and two for each pair frame. Omit where gasketing is specified or required by code. 2. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Ives, Burns, Rockwood. 2.3 FINISHES A. Finish of all hardware shall be US10B (BHMA 613/640) with the exceptions as follows: 2.4 KEYING 1. Hinges US10B with Brass base metal, except at fire doors 2. Door Closers: Powder Coat to Match. 3. Rocky Mounted Locks: Silicone Bronze Medium 4. Latch Protectors: US32D (BHMA 630). 5. Weatherstipping: Dark Bronze Anodized Aluminum. 6. Thresholds: Oil rubbed bronze. A. Provide a new key system from the same manufacturer as the locks conforming to the FINISH HARDWARE APR 2011

220 following requirements: 1. Provide patented cylinders at all keyed devices, exterior and interior removable mullions, and exterior and interior exit device trim. Patent shall protect against the unauthorized manufacturing and duplication of the products. Patented cores shall not be operable by non-patented key blanks. Patented cores shall incorporate a mechanism to check for the patented features on the keys. Provide construction cores with construction master keying for use during construction. The hardware supplier, accompanied by the Owner or Owner s security agent, shall install permanent keyed cores upon completion of the project. The temporary construction cores are to be returned to the hardware supplier. 2. Provide permanent cylinders keyed by the manufacturer or authorized distributor as directed by the Owner. Provide owner with a copy of the bitting list, return receipt requested. 3. The hardware supplier, accompanied by a qualified factory representative for the manufacturer of the cores and cylinders, shall meet with Owner and Architect to review keying requirements and lock functions prior to ordering finish hardware. Submit a keying schedule to Architect for approval. 4. Provide cylinders, unless noted otherwise, operated by a Master Key System to be established for this project (Do not use the letter "I", O, or X for any of the grand masters). All cylinders shall be keyed in alike or different sets as noted by their respective key set number. Do not use the letter "I" or O in any of the master key sets. 5. Provide patented keys as follows: a. Ten master keys for each set. b. Three keys per core. c. Two construction core control keys d. Two permanent core control keys e. Six construction master keys for each type (Contractor is to provide one set of construction keys to Architect) 6. Visual key control: a. Keys shall be stamped with their respective key set number and stamped DO NOT DUPLICATE". b. Grand master and master keys shall be stamped with their respective key set letters. c. Do not stamp any keys with the factory key change number. d. Do not stamp any cores with key set on face (front) of Core. Stamp on back or side of cores so not to be visible when core is in cylinder. 7. Deliver grand master keys, master keys, change keys, and/or key blanks from the factory or authorized distributor directly to the Owner in sealed containers, return receipt requested. Failure to comply with these requirements may be cause to require replacement of all or any part of the keying system that was compromised at no additional cost to the Owner. 8. Approved manufacturers and/or products: Schlage Everest C PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to installation of any hardware, examine all doors, frames, walls and related items for conditions that would prevent proper installation of finish hardware. Correct all defects prior to proceeding with installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Coordination: 1. Prior to installation of hardware, schedule and hold a meeting for the purpose of instructing installers on proper installation and adjustment of finish hardware. Representatives of locks, exit devices, closers, automatic operators, and electrified hardware shall conduct FINISH HARDWARE APR 2011

221 training; provide at least 10 days notice to representatives. After training a letter of compliance, indicating when the training was held and who was in attendance, shall be sent to the Architect. 2. Prior to ordering electrified hardware, schedule and hold a meeting for the purpose of coordinating finish hardware with security, electrical, doors and frames, and other related suppliers. A representative of the supplier of finish hardware, and doors and frames, the electrical subcontractor, and the Owner s security contractor shall meet with the Owner, Architect, and General Contractor prior to ordering finish hardware. After meeting a letter of compliance, indicating when the training was held and who was in attendance, shall be sent to the Architect. B. Hardware will be installed by qualified tradesmen, skilled in the application of commercial grade hardware. For technical assistance if necessary, installers may contact the manufacturer s rep for the item in question, as listed in the hardware schedule. C. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames by the Door and Hardware Institute. Confirm all locations with architect prior to installation. D. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, using only the fasteners provided by the manufacturer. E. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. Protect all installed hardware during painting. F. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. G. Operating parts shall move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking, or excessive clearance. H. Wire (including low voltage), conduit, junction boxes, and pulling of wire is by ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS (DIVISION 26). Electrical Contractor shall connect wire to door position switches and run wire to central room or area as directed by the Architect. Wires shall be tested and labeled with the Architects opening number. Connections to/from power supplies to electrified hardware and any connection to fire/smoke alarm system, and/or smoke evacuation system where specified is by ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS (DIVISION 26). 3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to insure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units, which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly. B. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. C. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. D. Instruct Owner s personnel in the proper adjustment, lubrication, and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to Substantial Completion, the installer, accompanied by representatives of the manufacturers of locks, exit devices, closer, and any electrified hardware, shall perform the following work: 1. Examine and re-adjust each item of door hardware as necessary to restore function of doors and hardware to comply with specified requirements. 2. Consult with and instruct Owner s personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures. 3. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or FINISH HARDWARE APR 2011

222 installation of hardware units. 4. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems of substantial nature in the performance of the hardware. 5. At completion of project, a qualified factory representative for the manufacturers of locksets, closer, exit devices, and access control products shall arrange and hold a training session to instruct the Owner s personnel on the proper maintenance, adjustment, and/or operation of their respective products. After training a letter of compliance, indicating when the training was held and who was in attendance, shall be sent to the Architect. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Provide for the proper protection of complete items of hardware until the Owner accepts the project as complete. Damaged or disfigured hardware shall be replaced or repaired by the responsible party. 3.6 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section Finish Hardware, hardware set numbers indicated in door schedule, and in the following schedule of hardware sets. B. It is intended that the following schedule include complete items of finish hardware necessary to complete the work. If a discrepancy is found in the schedule, such as a missing item, improper hardware for a frame, door or fire codes, the preamble will be the deciding document. C. Locksets, exit devices, and other hardware items are referenced in the Hardware Sets for series, type, and function. Refer to the preamble for special features, options, cylinders/keying, and other requirements. D. Hardware Sets: HW SET: 01 DOOR NUMBER: 101 EACH TO HAVE: 8 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 5 X 5 IVE 2 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2/DP1 IVE 1 SET MULTI-POINT LOCK E757/E756 ARCHED 2.5" X 11" WITH L224 LEVER RKY 1 EA CYLINDER MORTISE CYLINDER AS REQUIRED SCH 1 SET MULTI-POINT DUMMYSET E755/E756 ARCHED 2.5" X 11" WITH L224 LEVER RKY 1 SET DOOR SEAL 129DP (RADIUS HEAD AND JAMBS) REE 1 SET DOOR SEAL 786D (MEETING SEAL, SET) REE 2 EA DOOR BOTTOM 370A REE 1 EA THRESHOLD S426B REE 2 EA STOP WS11 IVE FINISH HARDWARE APR 2011

223 HW SET: 02 DOOR NUMBER: 102C EACH TO HAVE: 8 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 5 X 5 IVE 2 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2/DP1 IVE 1 SET MULTI-POINT LOCK E757/E756 ARCHED 2.5" X 11" WITH L224 LEVER RKY 1 EA CYLINDER MORTISE CYLINDER AS REQUIRED SCH 1 SET MULTI-POINT DUMMYSET E755/E756 ARCHED 2.5" X 11" WITH L224 LEVER RKY 1 SET DOOR SEAL 129DP (RADIUS HEAD AND JAMBS) REE 1 SET DOOR SEAL 786D (MEETING SEAL, SET) REE 2 EA DOOR BOTTOM 370A REE 1 EA THRESHOLD S426B REE 2 EA STOP WS11 OR FS436/FS438 IVE HW SET: 03 DOOR NUMBER: A 218B 311 EACH TO HAVE: 1 POCKET DOOR FRAMING KIT TYPE IV HAF 1 POCKET DOOR JUNIOR 80/Z SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE HAF 1 EA POCKET DOOR LOCK 2002 CPDL-5 X CN2000T X CN2002E PULL ACC PRIVACY SET POCKET DOOR. HW SET: 04 DOOR NUMBER: 203 EACH TO HAVE: 1 POCKET DOOR JUNIOR 80/Z SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE HAF 1 EA POCKET PASSAGESET 2002 CPDP-3 X CN2000B X CN2002B PULL ACC 1 POCKET DOOR FRAMING KIT TYPE IV HAF POCKET DOOR. FINISH HARDWARE APR 2011

224 HW SET: 05 DOOR NUMBER: 102A 102B 103A 103B 103C 103D C 117B 208B 208C 208D EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET US10B BRAVURA FRS 1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 410S GLY 3 EA SILENCER SR64/SR65 IVE JAMB MOUNTED LIGHT SWITCH. HW SET: 06 DOOR NUMBER: 006A 111B 210B 304 EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET US10B BRAVURA FRS 1 EA STOP WS11 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64/SR65 IVE HW SET: 07 DOOR NUMBER: 115B 117C 120B 120C B 310B EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET US10B BRAVURA FRS 1 EA STOP WS11 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64/SR65 IVE JAMB MOUNTED LIGHT SWITCH. HW SET: 08 DOOR NUMBER: 202C 206A EACH TO HAVE: 2 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET US10B BRAVURA FRS 1 EA STOP WS11 OR FS436/FS438 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64/SR65 IVE "D" TYPE DOOR. OPENING HAS TWO HINGES NOT THREE. FINISH HARDWARE APR 2011

225 HW SET: 09 DOOR NUMBER: 104 EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY SET US10B BRAVURA FRS 1 EA WALL STOP WS404 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64/SR65 IVE HW SET: 10 DOOR NUMBER: 003A A A EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY SET US10B BRAVURA FRS 1 EA STOP WS11 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64/SR65 IVE HW SET: 11 DOOR NUMBER: EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY SET US10B BRAVURA FRS 1 EA WALL STOP 411R-W IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64/SR65 IVE HW SET: 12 DOOR NUMBER: A 117A 120A 202A 208A 303A 308A EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY SET US10B BRAVURA FRS 3 SET DOOR SEAL 798B (HEAD AND JAMBS) REE 1 EA STOP WS11 IVE FINISH HARDWARE APR 2011

226 HW SET: 13 DOOR NUMBER: 013A 013B EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA SPRING HINGE 3SP1 4.5 X 4.5 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080 WITH FRASCIO "403 EURO" LEVERS SCH 1 EA KICK PLATE " X 2" LDW IVE 1 EA STOP FS436/FS438 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64/SR65 IVE HW SET: 14 DOOR NUMBER: 002B 115A 201 EACH TO HAVE: 2 EA SPRING HINGE 3SP1 4.5 X 4.5 IVE 1 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 IVE 1 EA FULL DUMMY TRIM US10B BRAVURA FRS 1 EA STOP WS11 OR FS436/FS438 IVE 1 EA PUSH PLATE ARCHED SET 3 1/2" X 20" RKY 3 EA SILENCER SR64/SR65 IVE 1 EA ELEVATOR INTERLOCK BY OTHERS ELEVATOR DOOR. HARDWARE FLUSG ON INSIDE (CAB) SIDE). ELEVATOR INTERLOCK PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY ELEVATOR MANUFACTURER. HW SET: 15 DOOR NUMBER: 001B 308B 308C 309A 309B EACH TO HAVE: 6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 IVE 2 EA FULL DUMMY TRIM US10B BRAVURA FRS 2 EA ROLLER LATCH RL32 (TOP MOUNT) IVE 2 EA OVERHEAD HOLDER 410H GLY 2 EA SILENCER SR64/SR65 IVE HW SET: 16 DOOR NUMBER: 000A 000B 000C EACH TO HAVE: 1 ALL HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER OVERHEAD DOOR UNIT. NO ADDITIONAL HARDWARE PROVIDED FINISH HARDWARE APR 2011

227 HW SET: 17 DOOR NUMBER: 015 EACH TO HAVE: 6 EA HINGE, BALL BEARING 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 IVE 1 SET AUTO LATCHING BOLT FB31P/FB41P IVE 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2/DP1 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070 WITH FRASCIO "403 EURO" LEVERS SCH 1 EA CYLINDER MORTISE CYLINDER AS REQUIRED SCH 2 EA OVERHEAD HOLDER 410H GLY 1 EA THRESHOLD S426B REE HW SET: 18 DOOR NUMBER: 009B EACH TO HAVE: 2 EA SPRING HINGE 3SP1 4.5 X 4.5 IVE 1 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 IVE 1 EA PASSAGESET L9010 WITH FRASCIO "403 EURO" LEVERS SCH 1 EA KICK PLATE " X 2" LDW IVE 1 SET DOOR SEAL 798B (HEAD AND JAMBS) REE 1 EA STOP FS436/FS438 IVE HW SET: 19 DOOR NUMBER: 009A EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET US10B BRAVURA FRS 1 EA KICK PLATE " X 2" LDW IVE 3 SET DOOR SEAL 798B (HEAD AND JAMBS) REE 1 EA STOP WS11 OR FS436/FS438 IVE HW SET: 19A DOOR NUMBER: 012 EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET US10B BRAVURA FRS 3 SET DOOR SEAL 798B (HEAD AND JAMBS) REE 1 EA STOP WS11 OR FS436/FS438 IVE FINISH HARDWARE APR 2011

228 HW SET: 20 DOOR NUMBER: 006B EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET US10B BRAVURA FRS 1 SET DOOR SEAL 798B (HEAD AND JAMBS) REE 1 EA STOP WS11 IVE HW SET: 21 DOOR NUMBER: 002A 302 EACH TO HAVE: 6 EA HINGE, BALL BEARING 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 IVE 1 SET AUTO LATCHING BOLT FB31P/FB41P IVE 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2/DP1 IVE 1 SET MULTI-POINT LOCK E757/E756 ARCHED 2.5" X 11" WITH L224 LEVER RKY 1 EA CYLINDER MORTISE CYLINDER AS REQUIRED SCH 1 SET MULTI-POINT DUMMYSET E755/E756 ARCHED 2.5" X 11" WITH L224 LEVER RKY 2 EA STOP FS436/FS438 IVE 1 ALL HARDWARE (EXCEPT CYLINDERS) BY DOOR MANUF. REMAINDER OF THE HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO MULTI-POINT LOCKING MECHANISM, THRESHOLD AND INTERGAL WEATHERSTRIPPING. HW SET: 22 DOOR NUMBER: 000D EACH TO HAVE: 2 EA SPRING HINGE 3SP1 4.5 X 4.5 IVE 1 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9453 WITH FRASCIO "403 EURO" LEVERS SCH 1 EA KICK PLATE " X 2" LDW IVE 1 SET DOOR SEAL 129DP (RADIUS HEAD AND JAMBS) REE 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 370A REE 1 EA THRESHOLD S426B REE 1 EA STOP FS436/FS438 IVE FINISH HARDWARE APR 2011

229 HW SET: 23 DOOR NUMBER: 001A EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 IVE 1 SET MULTI-POINT LOCK E757/E756 ARCHED 2.5" X 11" WITH L224 LEVER RKY 1 EA CYLINDER MORTISE CYLINDER AS REQUIRED SCH 1 EA KICK PLATE " X 2" LDW IVE 1 SET DOOR SEAL 129DP (RADIUS HEAD AND JAMBS) REE 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 370A REE 1 EA THRESHOLD S426B REE 1 EA STOP WS11 IVE HW SET: 24 DOOR NUMBER: 001C EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 IVE 1 EA PASSAGESET L9010 WITH FRASCIO "403 EURO" LEVERS SCH 1 EA KICK PLATE " X 2" LDW IVE 1 EA STOP WS11 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64/SR65 IVE HW SET: 25 DOOR NUMBER: 213A 213B EACH TO HAVE: 1 NO HARDWARE REQUIRED FRAME ONLY NO DOOR OR HARDWARE REQUIRED AT OPENING. HW SET: 26 DOOR NUMBER: 116B 117D EACH TO HAVE: 1 EA CYLINDER RIM/MORTISE CYLINDER AS REQUIRED SCH 1 ALL OTHER HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER SLIDING DOOR. FINISH HARDWARE APR 2011

230 HW SET: 27 DOOR NUMBER: 215 EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE, BALL BEARING 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 IVE 1 SET MULTI-POINT LOCK E757/E756 ARCHED 2.5" X 11" WITH L224 LEVER RKY 1 EA CYLINDER MORTISE CYLINDER AS REQUIRED SCH 1 EA STOP WS11 OR FS436/FS438 IVE 1 ALL HARDWARE (EXCEPT CYLINDERS) BY DOOR MANUF. REMAINDER OF THE HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THRESHOLD AND INTERGAL WEATHERSTRIPPING. HW SET: 28 DOOR NUMBER: 116A EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE, BALL BEARING 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 IVE 1 SET MULTI-POINT LOCK E757/E756 ARCHED 2.5" X 11" WITH L224 LEVER RKY 1 EA CYLINDER MORTISE CYLINDER AS REQUIRED SCH 1 EA OVERHEAD HOLDER 410H GLY 1 ALL HARDWARE (EXCEPT CYLINDERS) BY DOOR MANUF. REMAINDER OF THE HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THRESHOLD AND INTERGAL WEATHERSTRIPPING. HW SET: 29 DOOR NUMBER: 212 EACH TO HAVE: 6 EA HINGE, BALL BEARING 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 IVE 1 SET AUTO LATCHING BOLT FB31P/FB41P IVE 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2/DP1 IVE 1 SET ARCHED ENTRY SET E729/E728 ARCHED 3" X 13" WITH L224 LEVER RKY 1 EA CYLINDER MORTISE CYLINDER AS REQUIRED SCH 1 SET ARCHED DUMMY SET E706/E706 ARCHED 3" X 13" WITH L224 LEVER RKY 2 EA STOP WS11 IVE FINISH HARDWARE APR 2011

231 HW SET: 30 DOOR NUMBER: 206B 206C EACH TO HAVE: 1 EA POCKET PASSAGESET 2002 CPDP-3 X CN2000B X CN2002B PULL ACC 1 SLIDING DOOR KIT STRAIGHTAWAY 180 HAF END OF SECTION FINISH HARDWARE APR 2011

232 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION MIRRORS A. Section includes, but is not limited to, fabricating, furnishing and installing the following work: 1. Sheet Mirrors (Custom mirror walls) 2. Tempered glass shower door 3. Accessories as needed for a complete installation including, but not limited to: a. Mirror mastic b. Edge sealer c. Safety tape d. Mirror hardware B. Related Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including GENERAL and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and SECTION , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to this Section. 1. SECTION , FINISH HARDWARE: Shower door hardware installation requirements. 2. SECTION , TOILET ACCESSORIES: Make-up mirrors, furnished by Owner, installation and cleaning. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Reference Standards per SECTION , and current editions of the following: 1. ANSI. American National Standards Institute; a. ANSI Z Glazing Materials Used in Buildings-Safety performance Specifications and Methods of Test 2. ASTM. ASTM International; a. ASTM C Standard Specification for Flat Glass b. ASTM C Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass--Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass 3. CPSC. U.S. Consumer Products Safety Commission; a. 16 CFR Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials 4. GANA. Glass Association of North America; a. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America b. GANA (TIPS) - Mirrors Handle with Extreme Care: Tips For the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors; National Association of Mirror Manufacturers; 2004 ( c. Bulletin Proper Procedures for Cleaning Architectural Glass Products 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Procedures: See SECTION B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer s published literature of product data, material properties, finishes, substrate preparation, installation instructions, use limitations, and other recommendations. C. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings indicating for each location field measurements, mirror and glass door dimensions, edge details, hardware, and anchoring details. D. Samples: Submit three (3) representative samples of each different mirror and glass type with edge conditions and accessories, for approval. E. Closeout Submittals per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Maintenance Data: Recommended cleaning methods meeting low-voc / no-hap MIRRORS APR 2011

233 requirements. 2. Warranty Documentation 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Approvals: Perform Work in accordance with GANA (GM), CSPC 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials, and ANSI Z97.1, as applicable. B. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish mirror and glazing materials and accessories from one manufacturer for entire Project, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with GANA (TIPS), manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, SECTION , and as follows: 1. Protect each mirror from damage during shipping, handling and installation until Final Completion. 2. Do not slide 1 lite of mirror against another. 3. Do not use sharp objects near unprotected mirrors. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: Do not install mirrors when ambient temperature is less than 50 deg F or more than 85 deg F. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer / Special Warranty: Prepare and submit in accordance with SECTION Mirror: Provide written five (5) year material warranty that the mirror shall not to contain silvering defects resulting in discoloration, black spots, or clouding of the silver film that materially obstructs the mirror image of the vision area, to be issued by the manufacturer upon completion of the work and beginning on the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Mirror - Manufacturer List. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Lenoir Mirror Co; 2. Virginia Mirror Company, Inc.; 3. Vitro America; 4. Walker Glass Co., Ltd. (Canada); 5. Substitution Limitations: See SECTION B. Float Glass Manufacturer List: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFG Industries Inc.; 2. Cardinal Corporation; 3. Pilkington North America Inc; 4. PPG Industries, Inc.; Viracon, Apogee Enterprises, Inc; 6. Substitution Limitations: See SECTION PERFORMANCE / DESIGN CRITERIA A. Mirror Glass - General: Custom size mirrors made with annealed, high quality clear glass, silver coated on the backside, with sealed edges and safety tape, mounted with mastic and metal MIRRORS APR 2011

234 clips. B. Performance: Select materials and/or provide supports as required to limit mirrored glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. C. Shower Door: Clear tempered glass; Premium #8 mirror polished 316 stainless steel hardware 1. Edges: Ground smooth 2. Thickness: 3/8 inch 3. Pull Handles: (2) 3/4 inch diameter a. Basis of Design Product: CRL 12 inch Single-Sided Towel Bars, by C.R. Laurence Co., Inc.; 4. Hinges: Wall to glass type; a. Basis of Design Product: CRL International Beveled Edge Wall CRL International Beveled Edge Wall Mount Hinges Model # BWM1BN ( pid=45263&history=39326:39379:33628:45262&modelid=45263&pom=0), or an Architect acceptable equivalent meeting requirements from one of the following: 1). Symphony Wall to Glass Hinge by Artiscraft ( 5. Handle Side Stop: Glass Door stop / (3) rubber bumpers 2.3 MATERIALS A. Mirror Glass: ASTM C1036, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q1 (mirror select); 6 mm minimum thick. 1. Sizes as noted on Drawings B. Float Glass: All glazing is to be float glass unless otherwise indicated 1. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; of class, kind, and condition indicated. 2. Thicknesses: As indicated; for exterior glazing comply with specified requirements for wind load design regardless of specified thickness. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate mirrors to approved Shop Drawings, Specification requirements and in accordance with the GANA (GM). 1. Edge Treatment: Square polished and sealed edge, unless noted otherwise. B. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners. 2.5 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's concealed type. B. Mirror Adhesive / Mastic: Recommended by manufacturer, chemically compatible with mirror coating and wall substrate, and meeting VOC requirements. C. Safety Tape: Provide category II shatterproof safety tape for mirrors that meets CSPC 16 CFR1201 and ANSI Z97.1 safety requirements, and is compatible with mastic adhesive. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions. Examination per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Refer to manufacturer s instructions and recommendations for preparation MIRRORS APR 2011

235 of substrates, and as follows: 1. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install mirrors according to the Drawings, approved submittals, GANA (GM), GANA (TIPS), manufacturer's instructions, and as follows: 1. Set mirrors plumb and level, free of optical distortion. 2. Set mirrors with edge clearance free of surrounding construction including countertops or backsplashes. 3. Frameless Mirrors: Set mirrors with adhesive, applied in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions. a. Provide temporary continuous bottom and mirror face support. b. Remove temporary support when mastic adhesive has cured. 4. Install tempered glass shower door with hardware indicated in SECTION FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspection: Verify mirrors and glass are free of chips, cracks, and other inclusions that could inhibit structural or aesthetic integrity. 2. Test: Adhesion of silver using the standard tape pull method per ASTM D3359 B. Correction of Non-Conforming Work per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Deterioration of Mirrors: Defects developed from normal use that are attributable to the manufacturing and fabrication process, and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to mirror manufacturer's written instructions. a. Defects include undercutting, discoloration, spotting, and clouding of the silver film as defined by ASTM C CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with waste management and disposal requirements of SECTION B. Clean glass and clean mirrors per GANA Bulletin , just prior to inspection for Substantial Completion, and just prior to Final Completion or Owner occupancy, whichever occurs first. C. Protect installed work from construction operations until date of Final Completion or Owner occupancy, whichever occurs first. END OF SECTION MIRRORS APR 2011

236 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Section includes, but is not limited to, fabricating, furnishing, erecting and installing the following Gypsum Board Assembly work: 1. Gypsum Wallboard (GWB) 2. Gypsum Sheathing 3. Plaster Skimcote on Blueboard GWB 4. Non-structural suspended ceiling metal framing systems 5. Accessories as needed for a complete installation including, but not limited to: a. Fasteners b. Sound Insulation c. Acoustical Sealant B. Products Installed by this Section BUT Furnished from Other Sections: 1. SECTION THERMAL INSULATION: Sound Insulation C. Related Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including GENERAL and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and SECTION , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to this Section. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Reference Standards per SECTION , and current editions of the following: 1. ASTM. ASTM International; 2. GA. Gypsum Association; a. GA Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish b. GA Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products 3. UL. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; SUBMITTALS a. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory (Fire Resistance Directory) A. Submittal Procedures: SECTION B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer s printed product literature including manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of gypsum board system component, use limitations, and recommendations. C. Certificates: Asbestos-free materials; GWB materials not sourced from China, and all GWB material hydrogen sulfide content is less than one part per million. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Approvals: Gypsum board assemblies shall conform to UL (BMD) ratings meeting fire-resistance ratings determined according to ASTM E119, indicated by Drawings, and as determined by application and building type. B. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish Gypsum Board Assembly materials from one manufacturer for entire Project, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. C. Certifications: Certify to Owner, in writing, that all components and materials of wallboard systems are asbestos-free, not sourced from China, and hydrogen sulfide levels (due to elevated levels of strontium, iron, and elemental sulfur) will be less than one part per million. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES APR 2011

237 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, ASTM C1264, and SECTION Deliver all materials in their original unopened packages. 2. Store in an enclosed shelter providing protection from damage and exposure to the elements. 3. Stack panels flat on leveled supports off floor or slab to prevent sagging. 4. Coordinate delivery with installation to minimize storage periods at project site. 5. Materials damaged or deteriorated before or after installation, shall be removed from the site. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: Comply with manufacturer recommendations, ASTM C840, and as follows: 1. Maintain temperature range within 55 to 70 deg F when GWB is stored, applied and finished. 2. Provide adequate ventilation to carry off excess moisture. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS GYPSUM BOARD TYPES A. GWB 1 - Exposed Gypsum Wallboard: Complies with ASTM C1396/ C1396M with paper face surface suitable to receive decorative finish; long edges tapered to receive manufacturer s standard joint treatment, thickness as indicated. 1. Type: Non-Reinforced Type X fire resistant panels 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch at exterior and rated assemblies; 1/2 inch interior 3. Location: All interior walls and ceilings as part of a fire rated or acoustic assembly. 4. Basis-of-Design Product by Manufacturer: Firecheck Type X by Lafarge, or an Architect acceptable equivalent product subject to compliance with requirements from one of the following manufacturers: a. USG / Sheetrock Brand, Firecode Core, 5/8 inch b. Georgia-Pacific / ToughRock Gypsum Board c. National Gypsum Company, Gold Bond Gypsum Wallboard, 5/8 inch, Fire-Shield B. GWB 2 - Gypsum Tile Backer: Paperless, fiber-reinforced gypsum board with an integral waterresistant core that is strong, water resistant, and mold resistant. 1. Type: Gypsum tile backer board for high humidity areas 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch 3. Location: In toilet rooms, and other areas of high humidity noted to receive tile finish. 4. Basis-of-Design Product by Manufacturer: Fiberock Aqua-Tough Tile Backer Board by USG, or an Architect acceptable equivalent product subject to compliance with requirements from one of the following manufacturers: a. G-P Gypsum Corporation; b. National Gypsum Company; c. Lafarge North America; d. Substitution Limitations: See Section , Product Requirements. C. GWB 3 - Exterior Gypsum Sheathing: Water resistant and treated core encased in glass mat facing on both sides and long edges, square edges, in maximum length available to minimize joints. Comply with ASTM C1177/ C1177M. 1. Type: Exterior sheathing, glass mat faced (paperless) 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES APR 2011

238 3. Location: Where noted 4. Basis-of-Design Product by Manufacturer: Dens-Glass Gold by G-P Gypsum Corporation, or an Architect acceptable equivalent product subject to compliance with requirements from one of the following manufacturers: a. Lafarge North America; b. National Gypsum Company; c. USG; d. Substitution Limitations: See SECTION D. GWB 4 Interior Gypsum Blueboard Sheathing: Water resistant and treated core encased in glass mat facing on both sides and long edges, square edges, in maximum length available to minimize joints. Comply with ASTM C1396/ C1396M. 1. Type: Interior sheathing for plaster skimcote, abuse-moisture-mold-fire resistant paper-faced 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch 3. Location: Where noted 4. Basis-of-Design Product by Manufacturer: Firecheck Plasterbase by Lafarge, or an Architect acceptable equivalent product subject to compliance with requirements from one of the following manufacturers: a. G-P Gypsum Corporation; b. National Gypsum Company; c. USG; d. Substitution Limitations: See SECTION GYPSUM BOARD ACCESSORIES A. Wood Furring: See SECTION B. Resilient Channels: Hot-dipped galvanized cold-rolled steel. 1. Size: 1/2 inch deep x 1-1/2 inch wide x 12 ft long 2. Basis of Design Product by Manufacturer: RCSD by Dietrich, or an Architect acceptable equivalent subject to requirements. C. Spray Polyurethane Foam (SPF): Refer to SECTION D. Fasteners shall be Type "S" Bugle Head screws, all 1-1/4 inch minimum length, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer for application shown or rating required. Fasten all GWB in moisture exposure environments with zinc-coated screws. E. Galvanized metal corner bead shall be used to reinforce all vertical and horizontal exterior corners. F. Galvanized metal trim shall be applied over gypsum edge where partition or ceiling terminates against masonry or other dissimilar material. Hold board away from contact with exterior masonry walls, structural columns and beams and at least 1/4 inch away from pipes. G. Control Joints: One-piece joint assembly of non-corrosive metal or extruded plastic with continuous unperforated expansion strip for insertion into joint, and perforated flanges for fastening to face of gypsum wallboard. Comply with ASTM C1047. H. Acoustical Sealants: Non-drying, non-shrinking, non-migrating material recommended by gypsum board manufacturer, paintable wherever exposed to view. I. Joint Treatment: Tape may be plain or perforated, compound to be adhesive with or without fillers, all complying with ASTM C475/ C475M. Compound may be dry powder or premixed, and either single compound for both bedding and finish coats, or two-component treatment, one for bedding and the other for finishing joints. 1. Use special chemical hardening type exterior joint compound for exterior applications. 2. Use setting type of joint compound for Abuse Resistant and Reinforced Gypsum board as GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES APR 2011

239 recommended by the manufacturer. J. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B221/ B221 M, alloy 6063-T5 2. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gordon, Inc. c. Pittcon Industries d. Substitution Limitations: See SECTION Basis of Design Reveal Molding: Model # WDM as manufactured by Fry Reglet, or equal by acceptable manufacturers. 5. Basis-of-Design Wall Reveal: 3/4 inch wide, Pittcon SWR , or equal by acceptable manufacturers. 6. Basis-of-Design Gypsum Corner: 3 inch wide, Pittcon ST-300 (3 inch reveal), or equal by acceptable manufacturers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Verify that GWB materials are not wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged prior to installation. Remove and replace nonconforming materials. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. General: Install Gypsum Board Assemblies according to the Drawings, approved submittals, manufacturer's instructions, UL (BMD) Listed Assembly requirements, and as follows: 1. Install sound insulation as indicated prior to GWB unless readily installed after board has been installed. 2. Cutting: GWB shall be cut by scoring and breaking or by sawing, working from face side. Where board meets projecting surface, scribe neatly. 3. Isolation: Where partitions abut ceiling or deck construction or vertical structural elements, provide slip joint between metal framing and structure to prevent transfer of structural loads or movements. 4. Partition Height: Unless otherwise indicated, extend all partitions through to structural deck above. 5. General Wallboard Installation: Comply with requirements of ASTM C840, except comply with manufacturer's instructions when more stringent. a. Provide GWB of thickness shown and not less than minimum recommended by manufacturer or by code for application shown. b. Apply gypsum board first to ceilings at right angles to framing members, then to walls. c. Gypsum boards of maximum practical length shall be used so number of end joints are minimized. d. Bring gypsum boards into contact with each other but do not force into place. e. Install setting type joint compound at Abuse Resistant and Reinforced GWB walls to meet manufacturer's recommendations. f. Leave rough openings required for installation of other trades. 1). GWB joints at openings shall be located so that no end joint will align with edges of openings unless control joints will be installed at these points. 2). End joints shall be staggered and joints on opposite sides of partition shall not GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES APR 2011

240 occur on the same side. g. GWB shall be held in firm contact with framing member while fasteners are being driven. 1). Fastening shall proceed from center position of wallboard toward edges and ends. 2). Fasteners shall be set with heads slightly below surfaces of wallboard. 3). Take care to avoid breaking face paper of wallboard. 6. Single-Layer Partition/Wall Application: Apply GWB horizontally or vertically over metal studs, using maximum length boards practical with vertical joints located over supports, but offset at least one stud space on opposite faces of partitions/walls. 7. Double-Layer Application: Mechanically fasten both layers to supports with screws in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for spacing. a. On walls, apply both layers vertically with vertical joints staggered on opposite side of partitions. b. On walls and ceilings offset not less than 12 inch between layers. 8. Sound Rated Applications: Comply with requirements indicated by manufacturer to achieve required ratings as proven by his certified laboratory test results. a. Resilient Channels: Install RCSD furring perpendicular to studs at 24 inches o.c. b. Partitions: Provide continuous beads of sealant at juncture of both faces of runners or plates with floor and ceiling construction, and wherever wallboard abuts dissimilar materials. Install sealant prior to installation of wallboards. c. Ceilings: Provide continuous beads of sealant wherever wallboard abuts dissimilar materials. d. Control Joints: Provide continuous beads of sealant between edges of wallboard panels at control joints prior to installation of surface applied accessories. e. Openings and Cutouts: Seal open spaces between wallboard and other flush or penetrating items with continuous bead of sealant. f. Partition Insulation: Install wallboard blanket and/or SPF insulation as indicated for sound attenuation completely filling spaces between studs to full height of partition/wall, fitting closely to work that penetrates partition/wall. Furnish and install 2 inch x 24 gage flat strapping, not over 2'-0" on center, on open side of studs, wherever insulation is not contained by GWB on both sides of studs. g. Ceiling Insulation: Install GWB blanket and/or SPF insulation as indicated for sound attenuation, laid in place for continuous full height coverage. 9. Gypsum Sheathing: Install 4 x 8 foot or longer sheathing vertically with long edges parallel to and centered over studs. Provide solid wood blocking wherever end joints do not bear against framing sills or plates. Fasten to each support in accordance with manufacturer's recommended spacing, but space fasteners not more than 4 inch o.c. around perimeter at edge and end support and 8 inch o.c. at intermediate supports. 10. Exterior Soffits and Ceilings: Install exterior gypsum sheathing perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered over supports. Install with 1/4 inch open space where boards abut other work. Seal cut edges of each piece with water resistant sealant before installation, and seal edges at penetration, and other cut outs in each sheet. 11. Fasten all GWB in exterior and moist interior environments with zinc coated screws 12. Install 12 lb. density mineral wool where indicated for sound insulation around ducts. 3.3 INSTALLATION - GWB A. Finishing: Finish of exposed gypsum wallboard surfaces, joints, corners and edges shall be reinforced or trimmed in accordance with ASTM C840, and GA All joints, fastener heads, trim accessories and surface defects shall be filled with joint compound in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for a smooth, flush surface, with no visible defects after application of field applied decoration. 2. Use joint tape to reinforce joints; set tape in joint compound and smooth cemented areas to GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES APR 2011

241 be exposed or to receive other finish. 3. Reinforce external corners of wallboard work with corner beads. Securely fasten metal corner beads as recommended by manufacturer, using fasteners that will be fully concealed by joint compound fill applied over flanges. Crimping is not acceptable. 4. Provide specified metal casing bead trim, installed in unjointed lengths wherever possible. 5. Insert control joint strips into open joint and staple flanges to gypsum wallboard in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fastening: Gypsum wallboard shall be properly secured, tight to supports, with heads of fasteners below surface. 1. Secure GWB to metal studs with Type "S" Bugle Head screws 12 inch o.c. at all studs. 2. Secure GWB to metal stud ceiling framing with Type "W" screws 12 inch o.c. at all supports not to exceed spatial requirement for thickness of GWB. C. Joint Compound: Allow drying time between applications of joint compound: Apply not less than three separate coats of joint compound over joints, fastener heads and metal flanges. 1. NOTE: Joint compound treatment is not required above suspended ceilings unless specifically noted or if wall is sound or fire rated. At sound and fire rated partitions provide joint compound to meet manufacturers specifications for the required rating. D. Install each access door, register, grille and other product required to be built into GWB. E. Tolerances: Do not exceed variation of 3/16 inch in 8'-0" and 1/8 inch in 4'-0" from plumb, level and flat. 3.4 FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Tape and finish gypsum board in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, ASTM C840, GA-216, GA-214, and the following: 1. Provide joint, fastener depression, and corner treatment. 2. Tool joints as smoothly as possible to minimize sanding and dust. 3. Protect workers, building occupants, and HVAC systems from gypsum dust. 4. Finish each concealed joint in wallboard above ceiling finishes flush with tape and a minimum of two coats of compound to provide a continuous, uninterrupted plane for acoustical and fire-resistive performance. 5. GWB Finish Levels: a. Level 0: (Not Used) b. Level 1: Joints and interior angles have tape set in joint compound. 1). Surfaces are free of excess joint compound. 2). Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. 3). Tape and fastener heads do not need to be covered with joint compound. c. Level 2: Joints and interior angles have tape embedded in joint compound. 1). Surfaces are free of excess joint compound. Accessories and fasteners shall be covered by one separate coat of joint compound. 2). Tooled finish with thin skim of compound above tape at time of tape embedment shall be considered a separate coat, otherwise, apply additional coat of compound over tape as required to meet Level 2 requirement. d. Level 3: (Not Used) e. Level 4: Joints and interior angles taped as in Level 2, with two separate coats of joint compound. 1). Accessories and fasteners shall be coated with three separate coats of joint compound. 2). Joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES APR 2011

242 3). Gloss, semi-gloss and enamel paints are not recommended over a Level 4 finish. f. Level 5: Joints and interior angles taped as in Level 2, with two separate coats of joint compound. 1). Accessories and fasteners shall be coated with three separate coats of joint compound. 2). A thin skim coat or topping compound shall be applied to entire surface (This definition is referenced to Terminology, Section II, Page 2 of GA-214 to make the description of "skim coat" clear to all). 3). The surface shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. 4). The Level 5 finish is required to achieve the highest degree of quality by providing a uniform surface and minimizing the possibility of joint photographing and/or fasteners "burning through" the final decoration. B. GWB Fire Rated Assemblies: Finish in accordance with specified UL (BMD) listing. C. GWB Non-Fire Rated Assemblies: Finish in accordance with ASTM C840, GA-216, and GA-214 to the following levels: 1. Level 1: All GWB surfaces above ceilings or concealed from view. 2. Level 2: All GWB surfaces intended to receive tile finishes. 3. Level 4: All GWB surfaces exposed to view and intended to receive paint finishes. Level 4 shall be considered typical for all interior occupied spaces unless noted otherwise. 4. Level 5: GWB surfaces in areas of high visibility or critical lighting. Level 5 finishes will be applied to GWB 4 (Blueboard) only where specifically noted in the drawings. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Correction of Non-Conforming Work per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Remove all twisted and damaged or otherwise defective framing, replace with new framing. 2. Replace gypsum wallboard work that cannot be repaired to conceal defects. 3. Finish touch-up damaged surface finishes. 4. Replace damaged materials or items with New if repair not acceptable to Architect. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with construction waste management and disposal requirements of SECTION B. Protect installed Gypsum Board Assembly work from damage or deterioration due to construction operations until date of Final Completion or Owner occupancy, whichever occurs first. END OF SECTION GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES APR 2011

243 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION TILING A. Section includes, but is not limited to, fabricating, furnishing, delivering, erecting and installing Tiling as follows: 1. Tile for floor applications a. Porcelain Tile (PCT) b. Unglazed Quarry Tile (QT) 2. Tile for wall applications a. Glazed Ceramic Wall Tile (CT) 3. Exterior quarried stone paving 4. Accessories and equipment as needed for a complete installation including, but limited to: a. Ceramic trim b. Non-ceramic trim c. Waterproofing d. Sealants e. Mortar f. Grout g. Setting materials h. Expansion joints i. Membranes j. Scaffolding; as required to complete the installation B. Related Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including GENERAL and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and SECTION , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to this Section. 1. SECTION , UNIT MASONRY: Wall tile substrate preparation 2. SECTION , QUARRIED STONE VENEER: Exterior stone work. 3. SECTION , JOINT PROTECTION: Control and construction joint sealers 4. SECTION , GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES: Wall tile substrate and preparation 5. SECTION , WASHROOM ACCESSORIES: Penetrations, trim, and finish work 6. SECTION , RESIDENTIAL ELEVATOR: Floor finish 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Reference Standards per Section , and current editions of the following: 1. ANSI. American National Standards Institute; a. ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series/A American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium) 2. ASTM. ASTM International; a. ASTM D Standard Guide for Flood Testing Horizontal Waterproofing Installations 3. TCNA. Tile Council of North America, Inc.; TILING APR 2011

244 a. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination per SECTION , and as follows: 1. SECTION : Coordinate installation of accessories into wall tile B. Preinstallation Meeting per SECTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Procedures: See SECTION B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer s printed product literature including products standards, identifying materials, finishes, protective coatings, use limitations, and recommendations. 1. Submit schedule of proposed installation methods for each room and application according to the TCNA (HB). C. Samples: Submit one set of colored grout samples for approval. D. Certificates: Manufacturer certificates that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Qualification Statements: Installer. F. Closeout Submittals per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Warranty Documentation: Executed warranty. 2. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Extra Materials: Supply an extra two (2) percent of each tile type used in clean marked cartons for the Owner's use. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company with a minimum of five (5) years documented experience performing tile installation and specializing in work of the type required by this section. B. Single Source Responsibility: 1. Obtain each type and color tile material required from single source. 2. Obtain setting and grouting materials from one manufacturer to ensure compatibility and warranty requirements are met. 3. Obtain prefabricated edge protection and transition and movement profiles from one manufacturer to ensure compatibility. 4. Obtain membrane from same manufacturer as setting material or from manufacturer approved by setting material manufacturer to ensure compatibility and warranty requirements are met. C. Certifications: Manufacturers to certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Field Samples / Mock-ups: Submit in place for each tile type, minimum 36 x 36 inches in size illustrating materials selected and specified, pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, the TCNA (HB), SECTION , and as follows: 1. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. TILING APR 2011

245 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of a minimum 50 deg F during installation of mortar materials and for 7 days after completion. 1. Temporary heaters, if used, shall vent to the outside to eliminate possible carbon dioxide damage to new tile work and to workers. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer / Special Warranty: Prepare and submit in accordance with SECTION Tile Assembly: Provide a written five (5) year written material warranty that each tile assembly used is free from manufacturing defects and the component products will not break down or deteriorate when installed in accordance with the manufacturer s written specifications and guidelines. Warranty shall be issued upon completion of the work, and begin on the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer List: Provide products as noted on the schedule in compliance with requirements from one of the following manufacturers: 1. AKDO Intertrade; 2. Architectural Collections; 3. Artistic Tile, Inc.; 4. Catalfamo Gallery Mosaic (Owner Prepurchased); 5. Dal-Tile Corporation; 6. Eccologie; 7. EramosaLimestone.com; 8. Lea Ceramiche; 9. Oceanside Glasstile; Opus Anticato; Sonoma Tilemakers; Walker Zanger; Substitution Limitations: See SECTION , Product Requirements. 2.2 DESCRIPTION A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. General: Manufactured tile shall conform with ANSI A137.1 with respect to abrasive wear, water absorption, bonding capability, thickness, facial dimensions, facial warpage, wedging, crazing, breaking strength and thermal shock, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Tile Flooring Surfaces: Static Coefficient of Friction per ANSI A Provide materials obtained from only one source, manufactured under TCNA license to insure consistent quality and compatibility. 4. Wet Surface Coefficient of Friction (SCOF): Minimum 0.6 according to ANSI B TILE MATERIALS A. Porcelain Tile (P): ANSI A137.1, as scheduled, and as follows: 1. Moisture Absorption: < 0.10 percent 2. Sizes: Varies TILING APR 2011

246 3. Thickness: Varies 4. Edges: Varies; Square; natural-rectified 5. Surface Finish: Varies: Natural matte, unpolished (UPS); gloss 6. Wet COF (ASTM C1028): > 0.6 when used as flooring B. Manufactured Tile: ANSI A137.1, as scheduled, and as follows: 1. Manufactured Tile Types: a. (Q) Quartz Stone b. (M) Marble c. (L) Limestone d. (G) Granite e. (SLATE) Slate f. (GLASS) Glass mosaic 2. Sizes: Varies 3. Edges: Cushioned 4. Surface Finish: Varies C. Unglazed Quarry Tile: ANSI A137.1, as scheduled meeting Architect s samples, and as follows: 1. Stone Types: a. (L) Eramosa Limestone b. (STONE) Blue Stone c. (STONE) Pulpis Grey Stone 2. Sizes: As indicated on the Drawings 3. Thickness: 1-1/4 inch 4. Edges: Full radius bullnose typical, with pillowed and pencil edges as noted 5. Surface Finish: Flamed or honed, as noted D. Reclaimed Brick: ANSI A137.1, as scheduled, and as follows: 1. Sizes: approx. 3-3/4 x 8 inch 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch +/- 1/8 inch 3. Surface Finish: Shaved; sealed as directed by the Architect 2.4 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Ceramic Accessories: Glazed finish, same color and finish as adjacent field tile; same manufacturer as tile. B. Ceramic Trim: Matching bullnose, double bullnose, cove base, and cove ceramic shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. 1. Applications: Use in the following locations: a. Open Edges: Finished or Bullnosed as noted b. Inside Corners: Jointed. c. Floor to Wall Joints: Straight base. 2. Manufacturer: Same as for tile. C. Thresholds: Unless indicated otherwise, provide white or gray marble, honed finish; 5 inches wide by full width of wall or frame opening; 1/2 inch thick; beveled one long edge with radiused corners on top side; without holes, cracks, or open seams. Comply with ASTM C503 for exterior TILING APR 2011

247 use, minimum hardness of 10 per ASTM C Applications: Provide thresholds at doorways and openings between tile and porcelain. 2. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from fabricators standard range of available marbles. 2.5 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Laticrete International, Inc., or Architect acceptable equivalent products subject to compliance with requirements from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Bostik Inc; 2. Custom Building Products; 3. Kaiser Building Products; 4. Mapei Corporation; 5. Substitution Limitations: See SECTION B. Mortar Bond Coat Materials: Glazed and Unglazed Ceramic, Quarry tile 1. Dry-Set Portland Cement: ANSI A Latex-Portland Cement: ANSI A C. Gypsum Wallboard Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1 Type 1 1. Basis-of-Design Products: Laticrete #15 Multi Mastic or White Kaiser or equal D. Thin-Set - (EGP) Latex-Portland Cement (Dry Set) Mortar: ANSI A For Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): ANSI A118.4 TCNA W No water shall be used. 2. For Concrete Floors: ANSI A118.4 TCNA F113 and cement mortar bonded TCNA F No water shall be used. 3. For Waterproof Concrete Floors: ANSI A118.4 TCNA F No water shall be used. 4. Basis-of-Design Products: Laticrete 317 thinset mortar gauged with Laticrete 333 Superflexible Admix or equal E. Thick-Set - Portland Cement Mortar With Latex Additive: ANSI For Concrete Floors: ANSI A118.4 TCNA F113 and cement mortar bonded TCNA F No water shall be used. 2. Basis-of-Design Products: Laticrete 226 Thick Bed Mortar, or equal. 3. Provide pea-stone concrete bedding in lieu of thick-set where indicated by the Drawings or approved by Architect F. Exterior Stone Pavers - Setting Mortar: 1. For All Exterior Stone Paving Assemblies: Type N natural gray mortar mixed on site or factory pre-blended per ASTM C270 proportion requirements, using portland cement conforming to ASTM C150, Hydrated Lime meeting ASTM C207, and washed masonry sand meeting ASTM C144, natural color. 2. Do not use mortar admixtures, including air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellant agents, antifreeze compounds, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cold Weather Admixture: Not permitted. 4. Water: Potable. G. Thresholds: Same as specified for unglazed ceramic tile on concrete floors. 2.6 GROUT MATERIALS A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Laticrete International, Inc., or Architect acceptable equivalent products subject to compliance with requirements from one of the TILING APR 2011

248 following manufacturers: 1. Bostik Inc; 2. Custom Building Products; 3. Kaiser Building Products; 4. Mapei Corporation; 5. Substitution Limitations: See SECTION B. Grout: Polymer modified cement grout, sanded or unsanded, as specified by ANSI A Floors: Sanded, Latacrete 500 Series with 1776 grout admix plus 2. Walls: Wet or dry cure formulation as appropriate 3. Colors: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. C. Silicone Rubber: Walls, Silicone sealant, moisture and mildew resistant type 1. Fungicidal: One part, Dow Corning 786, meeting ASTM C920, Class 25 a. Color: White. 2.7 MORTAR ACCESSORIES A. Metal Lath: Expanded diamond mesh, hot dip galvanized. B. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Laticrete International, Inc., or Architect acceptable equivalent products subject to compliance with requirements from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Bostik Inc; 2. Custom Building Products; 3. Kaiser Building Products; 4. Mapei Corporation; 5. Substitution Limitations: See SECTION C. Waterproofing / Anti-Fracture Membrane at Floors: Specifically designed for bonding to cementitious substrate under thick mortar bed or thin-set tile; complying with ANSI A Material: Fluid-applied water-based SBS rubber membrane, inch thick, minimum, with polyester fabric reinforcing at edges, corners, joints, and cracks. Provide at all tile floors with floor drains at elevated slabs. 2. Basis-of-Design Products: Laticrete #9235 or an Architect acceptable equivalent product meeting requirements from one of the following: a. PRP M19 by Mapei b. LevelQuik Waterproofing & Anti-Fracture Membrane by Custom Building Products D. Anti-Fracture Membrane per ANSI : Bonded sheet membrane where sub-floor does not meet the recommendations of the tile manufacturer. Substrate preparation included. 1. Basis-of-Design Products: Laticrete Blue92 or an Architect acceptable equivalent product meeting requirements from one of the following: a. Dalseal CIS by Dal-Tile b. Custom 9240 Waterproofing & Anti-Fracture Membrane by Custom Building Products c. Iso-mat Crack Suppression Membrane by Laticrete d. Mapelastic SM by Mapei e. Noble Deck by The Noble Company E. Expansion Joints: Locations per TCNA Guidelines. 1. Quarry Tile and Ceramic Mosiac Tile (locker room only): prefabricate type as required to TILING APR 2011

249 match joint width a. Basis-of-Design Products: Schluter Systems, Dilex-BWB or BWS or an Architect acceptable equivalent from one of the following manufacturers: 1). M-D Building Products; 2). Ceramic Tool Company; 3). Substitution Limitations: See SECTION All Other Locations: Flexible and compressible back up strip of closed cell foam polyethylene, butyl rubber, or open cell and closed cell polyurethane, rounded at surface to contact sealant, as shown on the details and a recommended by sealant manufacturers. a. Fit neatly without compacting and to such a height to allow sealant depth of half the width of joint. b. Sealant must not bond to back- up material. 3. Sealants: See above. 4. Joint Width (Vertical and Horizontal): As indicated. a. Quarry Tile: Same as grout joint, but not less than 1/4 inch b. Ceramic Mosaic and Glazed Wall Tile: 1/4 inch, 1/8 inch, and 1/16 inch, as indicated. 5. Preparation a. Edges to be clean and dry. Sand or grind for optimum bond. b. Primer when recommended by sealant manufacturer on edges. Keep primer off face of tile. 6. Location: a. All areas per TCNA Guidelines b. Where tile work abuts restraining surfaces such as perimeter walls, dissimilar floors, curbs, columns, pipes, ceilings, and where changes occur in backing materials. c. All expansion, control, construction, cold, and seismic joints in the structure shall continue through the tile work including such joints at vertical surfaces. d. Joints through tile work directly over structural joints must never be narrower than the structural joint. 7. Follow TCNA Joint Design Essentials EJ171. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions. Examination per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances, substrate deflection, and other conditions are as required by the manufacturer, and ready to receive Work. a. Flatness: 1). Walls: 1/4 inch in 8 feet 2). Floors: 1/4 inch in 10 feet 2. Preinstallation Testing: Substrates surfaces will be tested to verify that bond is not impaired. Abrade, treat or otherwise prepare surface to ensure bonding using manufacturer recommended methods. a. Do not install until Owner engaged Independent Testing Agency testing results indicate: 1). Concrete Moisture and Alkalinity: Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within the following limits: 2). Moisture Emission Rate: Not greater than 3 lb per 1000 sf per 24 hours when tested using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test per ASTM F1869 TILING APR 2011

250 3). Alkalinity: ph range of Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protection of In-Place Conditions: Protect surrounding work from damage. B. Surface Preparation: Refer to manufacturer s instructions and recommendations for preparation of substrates. 1. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. 2. Seal substrate surface cracks with a cementitious-based or epoxy-based filler. 3. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances with a cementitiousbased leveling material or by grinding. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, verify that tile has been factory blended to include full range within each carton. If not, blend tile on site prior to setting tile. 3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install tile, thresholds, and grout in accordance with the Drawings, approved submittals, applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 through A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, TCNA Handbook recommendations, SECTION , and as follows: 1. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. 2. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor joints. 3. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. 4. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed. 5. Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings. 6. Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 7. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. 8. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. 9. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. 10. Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated. 11. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. 12. Installation Tolerances: a. Maximum variation from level and plumb: 1/4 inch in 10 feet, non-cumulative. b. Maximum variation in plane between adjacent pieces at joint: Plus or minus 1/16 inch. c. Maximum variation in joint width: 1). Plus or minus 1/16 inch for 1/4 inch joints 2). Plus or minus 1/32 inch for 1/8 inch joints 3). Plus or minus 1/64 inch for 1/16 inch joints 3.4 WATERPROOFING AND CRACK-SUPPRESSION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Provide at all elevated slabs floors containing floor drains. B. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate. C. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight. TILING APR 2011

251 3.5 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THICK-SET METHODS A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA Handbook. 3.6 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN-SET METHODS A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method F113, dryset or latex-portland cement bond coat, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated. 3.7 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE A. Over gypsum wallboard on wood or metal studs install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method, and per Drawings, unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 INSTALLATION STONE PAVERS A. Each stone shall be cleaned and thoroughly saturated with water before being set. The concrete bed to receive the mortar bed shall also be cleaned and moistened. 1. All stone shall be well bedded in mortar and settled in place with a suitable wooden maul before the setting of the mortar. 2. No pinning up of stones with spalls will be permitted, and no spalls will be permitted in beds. B. Set stone paving level, or to indicated slope, and aligned +/- 1/16 inch with adjacent stones. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Maintain and reference one complete copy of TCNA Handbook and ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series on site. 1. Be sure cut edges are clean before installing tiles, fit tile carefully against trim, around pipes, electrical boxes and other built in fixtures so that escutcheons, plates and collars will completely overlap cut edges. 2. When using glazing tile sheets, minimize tearing sheets apart by drilling pipe holes as much as possible. 3. Near floor drains, keep tile floor level, dishing slightly only in area of drain. B. Field Tests and Inspections per Section , and as follows: 1. Interior Floor Waterproofing: Flood test critical areas per ASTM D5957 for plaza decks, and floors and showers where slope does not exceed 1/4 inch per foot, and as directed by the Architect. a. Cure Time: 7 days at 70 deg F prior to flood test. C. Non-Conforming Work per General and Supplementary Conditions, and as follows: Remove, Repair and Reinstall or Restore in Place damaged items prior to inspection for Substantial Completion. 1. Replace damaged materials or items with New if repair not acceptable to Architect CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with construction waste management and disposal requirements in SECTION B. Clean tile surfaces as thoroughly as possible on completion of grouting. 1. Remove all grout haze, observing tile manufacturer's recommendations as to use of cleaners. 2. Do not use acids. 3. Rinse tile work thoroughly with clean water before and after using chemical cleaners. 4. Polish surfaces of glazed tile work with soft cloth. C. Protect installed work from construction operations until date of Final Completion or Owner occupancy, whichever occurs first. TILING APR 2011

252 1. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for four (4) days after installation. 2. Where traffic is unavoidable, place large flat boards in walkways and wheel ways for seven (7) days TILE SCHEDULE KEY MFR - COLOR DIMS. T.1 Lea Ceramiche: Storm Collection - Ice Storm (P=PORCELAIN) 12x24 T.2 Lea Ceramiche: Storm Collection - Ice Storm (P) 4x4 T.3 Walker Zanger: Shabui - Bandar (Q= QUARTZ STONE) 6x6 T.4 Walker Zanger: Shabui - Bandar (Q) 3x3 T.5 T.6 Lea Ceramiche: Storm Collection - Ice Storm (P) 12x12 Walker Zanger: Shabui - Bandar (Q) 3 rows high T.7 Walker Zanger: Shabui Slate Liner in Kitaro (SLATE) 1x6 liner T.8 Flamed Blue Stone (STONE) 1" Thick, Flame Finish, Gaged Back 24x24 T.9 T.10 T.11 T.12 Lea Ceramiche: Storm Collection - Tropical (P) 12x24 1x2 Mesh mntd. Sonoma Tilemakers: Salvestrin Running Blend (P) Bond Pulpis Grey Stone with Flame finish - to match Architect's sample (STONE) Catalfamo Gallery Mosaic OWNER FURNISHED (MARBLE & STAINLESS STEEL) 12x16 1x1 T.13 AKDO: Tumbled Marble - Ming Green Medium (M = MARBLE) 6x6 T.14 Daltile: Ceramic - PL02 White Glossy (P) 8x8 TILING APR 2011

253 T.15 T.16 AKDO: Geometric Ming Green Medium & Thassos (M) framed with SEE BELOW AKDO: Ming Green Medium mini mosaics (M) 1-1/4" strip 2 rows high 1/2" mosaic on 12x12 sheet cut into strips T.17 T.18 AKDO: Ming Green & Thassos Checkerboard Marble (M) Walker Zanger: Scalini Limestone - Flannel Grey, waxed finish (L = LIMESTONE) 1x1 strips (qty tbd) 12x12 T.19 Walker Zanger: Scalini Limestone - Flannel Grey, waxed finish (L) 2x2- custom T.20 Walker Zanger: Helsinki- Silver Dusk small brick laid (L) 1x4 T.21 Walker Zanger: Scalini Limestone - Flannel Grey, waxed finish (L) 4x4 T.22 Architectural Collections: Ceramic, snow white glossy (P) 12x24 OR 8x10 T.23 Walker Zanger: Morse Liner- White (M) mosaic T.24 T.25 Opus Anticato: Opus Blue - Antiqued Mixed Mosaics (M) AKDO: Azule Celeste Tumbled cut into Accent strips (M) Number of corses (tbd) T.26 Sonoma Tilemakers: Handcrafted white glossy (P) 3x6 T.27 T.28 AKDO: Basketweave Thassos & Azul Celeste Marble (M) AKDO: Thassos & Azule Celeste Marble "Ice Cube" pattern cut into strips (M) 4 or 5 courses T.29 AKDO: Polished Thassos Marble (M) with T29A and T30 12x12 T.29A AKDO: Polished Thassos Marble (M) 4x4 TILING APR 2011

254 T.30 Artistic Tile, Inc.: Azul Macaubas (G=GRANITE) 12x12 or 12x24 T.31 Artistic Tile, Inc.: Azul Macaubas (G) Note: Mosaics in grout joints CUT into 1x1 Strips T.32 Walker Zanger: Scalini Smoke (L) 6x6 T.33 Walker Zanger: Riverstone honed mosaic field (L) 5/8" x 3" T.34 Walker Zanger: Scalini Smoke (L) 12x12 or 16x16 T.35 T.36 Walker Zanger: Scalini Smoke (L) Oceanside Glasstile: Irridescent type, Blue/Green brick pattern, honed (GLASS) Custom 2x2 12x12 Mesh mounted mosaics T.37 Flamed Blue Stone (STONE) 1" Thick, Flame Finish, Gaged Back 4x4 T.38 Eramosa Limestone Honed, Vein Cut 10x20x2 T.39 Eramosa Limestone Rocked Face 10x20x2 T.40 Eccologie: Reclaimed Shaved Chicago Brick - Orange/Pink T.41 Walker Zanger: Pavia Antiqua Walnut 8 x 16 END OF SECTION TILING APR 2011

255 SECTION WOOD FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work of this Section Fabricating, furnishing, delivering, erecting and installing the following Wood Flooring work: 1. Solid wood strip flooring, prefinished, nailed 2. Accessories as needed for a complete installation including, but not limited to: a. Secondary subflooring b. Fasteners c. Adhesives d. Sheet vapor retarder (VR) e. Acoustical underlayment B. Related Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including GENERAL and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and Section , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to this Section. 1. DIVISION 03/ STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS: Concrete substrates 2. SECTION , ROUGH CARPENTRY: Plywood underlayment sub-flooring 3. SECTION , PAINTING: Staining and top-coating 4. DIVISION 16, ELECTRICAL: Coordination with recessed electrical and communications services 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Alternate No. 2: Work of this Section is affected by SECTION , Alternates 1.3 REFERENCES A. Abbreviations and Acronyms per SECTION B. Referenced Standards per SECTION , and current editions of the following: 1. ALSC. American Lumber Standard Committee; a. Lumber Grading Rules 2. ASTM. ASTM International; 3. EPA. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; 4. FSC. Forest Stewardship Council; Certified Sustainably Managed Lumber; GS. Green Seal; 6. NeLMA. Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. a. Standard Grading Rules for Northeastern Lumber NHLA. National Hardwood Lumber Association; 8. MFMA. Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association; a. MFMA (SPEC) - Guide Specifications for Maple Flooring Systems 9. NOFMA. National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; or a. NOFMA (IN) - Installing Hardwood Flooring 10. SCAQMD. South Coast Air Quality Management District; WOOD FLOORING APR 2011

256 11. United States Department of Commerce Standard PS2 a. Procedures for the Development of Voluntary Product Standards 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Coordinate certified material chain-of-custody from original material resource to project site. B. Preinstallation Meeting per SECTION , and as Follows: Review site conditions, installation procedures, schedules, and coordination with other work, blocking requirements, and warranty requirements. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data per SECTION , and as follows: Submit manufacturer's printed descriptions of materials, components, treatment systems, performance criteria, finishes, fasteners, adhesives, use limitations, recommendations and installation information. B. Shop Drawings per SECTION , and as follows: Submit plan drawings showing extent of wood flooring scope, patterns, orientation, and key details indicating detailed expansion considerations, material transitions, and specific attachment requirements. C. Samples: Submit four (4) representative samples, 12 X 12 inch in size, illustrating profile, floor finish, color, and sheen, for approval. D. Quality Assurance Submittals per SECTION and as follows: 1. Certificates: Submit printed certificates or manufacturer's letterhead with manufacturer s signature certifying that each product and/or system meets each regulatory requirement, sustainability characteristic, performance requirement, design criteria, and applicable standard specified. a. Certificates of Grade: Certificate of Inspection for grade marked material by (ALSC) recognized inspection agency b. KD Certificates: Kiln-dried moisture content by (ALSC) recognized inspection agency. c. CoC Certificates: Certified sustainable wood. 2. Qualification Statements: Fabricator / Supplier 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Extra Materials: Provide ten (10) square yards of flooring matching that installed. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator / Supplier Qualifications: A firm in business for a minimum five (5) years that is capable of providing Third Party Certification that wood materials were legally sourced from sustainably managed forests. B. Sustainability Standards and Certifications: 1. Adhesive and Sealant VOC Limits: According to SQMAD Rule 1168, and GS-36 for aerosols. 2. Certified Wood: According to FSC-STD CoC requirements. C. Field Samples: Provide field samples, dry laid, to demonstrate aesthetic effects of materials in the room it is to be installed, assisting the Architect and Owner in making final material selections and joint layouts. 1. Minimum Layout Size: 25 sf (2.3m 2 ) D. Mock-up(s): Construct mock-up in location and of a size acceptable to Architect. Demonstrate anticipated range of materials, workmanship and finish expected. 1. Notify design professional seven (7) days in advance of time when mock-up will be installed for approval viewing. 2. Obtain approval in writing before commencing work. WOOD FLOORING APR 2011

257 3. Mock-up may be included as a part of the finished project. 4. Protect approved mock-ups during construction period as it will be used as a benchmark to judge the finished installation. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery, Storage and Handling per industry and manufacturer/fabricator guidelines, NOFA (IN), SECTION , and as follows: 1. Unload wood flooring only during dry weather. 2. Place wood flooring materials in the rooms or spaces to be floored at least 7 days in advance of the start of installation. Open packages of wood flooring to permit natural adjustment of moisture content. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Conditions and Measurements: Visit jobsite to verify installation conditions and floor measurements. B. Ambient Conditions per manufacturer s written recommendations, SECTION , and as follows: 1. New concrete slabs shall be flat, clean and dry with no installation of materials on top of the slabs until each moisture requirement is met. 2. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install until building is enclosed, overhead work is complete, wet work is complete, and HVAC system has been fully operating a minimum (1) one week, consistently maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels. a. Maintain for space and substrate a min. 65 deg F (18 deg C) to max. 75 deg F (23.9 deg C) temperature prior to, during, and after installation. 1). NOTE: Do not use portable heaters. b. Maintain percent RH from time of delivery acclimation, during and after Installation. c. Allow solid wood flooring to acclimate minimum of 7 days to the conditions in which it will be installed, at or near occupancy levels. 1). Do not proceed with installation until wood flooring and each accessory product is the same temperature as the space where it is to be installed. d. Do not proceed with installation until all ambient conditions are met WARRANTY A. Flooring Fabricator / Supplier Warranty: Provide written material warranty for the finished wood flooring and associated work, agreeing to repair or replace flooring that shrinks, warps, cracks, or otherwise deteriorates excessively, or that buckles, delaminates, or fails to perform as required or as represented by the manufacturer, due to failures of materials and workmanship. 1. Warranty Period: Three (3) years beginning on date of Substantial Completion. B. Factory Finish Warranty: Contractor shall provide manufacturer s guarantee against defects in factory finish materials and workmanship for the original owner for a minimum fifteen (15) year period beginning on the date of Substantial Completion acceptance. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Wood Flooring Basis of Design Product by Manufacturer: Delano Planking by MODA Hardwood Flooring ( or an Architect acceptable equivalent meeting project requirements. 1. Substitutions: See SECTION WOOD FLOORING APR 2011

258 2.2 PERFORMANCE / DESIGN CRITERIA A. Performance Capacities: 1. Wood Flooring System: a. Species / Cut: White oak / Quarter-sawn b. Moisture Content: Kiln-dried to 6 to 9 percent 2. NHLA Grade: Second & better 3. NeLMA (WWPA) Grade: 2 & Better Commons 4. Factory Finish - Static Coefficient of Friction (ASTM D2047): Minimum 0.5 dry, 0.6 wet B. Design Criteria: 1. Wood Species: American Red Oak (Quercus Spp.), R & Q, Select + Better 2. Sustainability Requirement: FSC Certified 3. Solid Wood Grain Pattern Cut: Quarter sawn 4. Janka Hardness (ASTM D143): 1290 psi 5. Thickness: 3/4 inch solid 6. Width: 6 inches 7. Length: 2 to 10 feet with 4-6 average 8. Surface Profile: Medium Hand Scraped, Lightly Distressed, Handscraped Edges & Ends 9. Color: MODA Fresh Brew 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Of appropriate type, length and durability for wood product used to securely fasten to the substrate for the intended life and use of the unit. 1. Acceptable Wood Sheathing Subfloor Fasteners: a. #9 wood screws, 8d ring shank, screw shank or common nails for < 23/32 inch (18mm) thick panels. b. 10d ring shank, screw shank or common nails for thicker panels. 2. Solid Wood Flooring Fasteners: a. Blind Nails: Standard 2 inch (51mm) steel cleat nails b. No Top Nailing c. Blind Staples: Standard 2 inch (51mm) steel staples B. Adhesives: 1. Wood Flooring Adhesive - General: Formulation that is specifically recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer. a. VOC Requirement: Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/l or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Urethane-Based Adhesive. Provide products from one of the following: a. Bostiks Best b. Mapei c. DriTac d. Sika 3. Water-Based Adhesives: a. Floor Adhesive: DriTac 6200 or Architect acceptable equivalent. b. Floating Floor Adhesives: 1). Titebond Tongue & Groove Flooring Glue 2). Bruce Everseal 3). Khars Landobond C. Underlayment - Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene Sheet (ASTM D4397); Not less than 6.0 mil WOOD FLOORING APR 2011

259 (0.15mm) sheet thickness; or Asphalt-Saturated Felt (ASTM D226); Type I, 15# D. Underlayment - Acoustic: 1. Recycled Wood Fiber System (IIC 56): a. Manufacturer / Product: Impacta / SoundEater; 2. Fabric Mesh on Nylon (IIC 53/64): Nonwoven fabric heat-bonded on extruded nylon filament three-dimensional core a. Manufacturer / Product: Acoustical Solutions Inc. / Enkasonic; ASSEMBLY / FABRICATION A. Expansion / Contraction Movement: Assemble wood products using details that allow for expansion and contraction due to the specified range of changes in ambient conditions. 2.5 FINISH 1. Ambient Temperature Range: Interior: 55 to 80 deg F 2. Ambient Humidity Range: Interior: 35 to 60 percent A. Wood Strip Flooring System: 1. Stain: Penetrating type per SECTION ; Verify with Architect 2. Modified polyurethane seal and finish as required to achieve matte surface, and are low- VOC and no-hap as follows: a. 2 Coats VerMeister Single Component Waterborne Finish 1). Gloss: Silk, 15 Gloss, Matte (low luster) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions. Examination per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Subfloor Flatness tolerance shall not exceed 3/16 inch over 10 feet (4.8mm over 3m) in all directions at any random place on the floor, and with no more than 1/2 inch (13mm) deviation over entire floor slab area. a. Subfloor Moisture: Wood subfloor shall be between 12 and 14 percent RH. c. Test wood flooring materials, and every 1,000 sf of subfloor, to verify proper conditions. 1). Wood flooring moisture content shall use a wood meter that checks moisture, and specific gravity or denseness to determine actual moisture content level. 2). Perform relative humidity (RH) test on subflooring using on site probes per ASTM F ). Do not proceed with installation until difference in RH between subfloor materials and wood finish flooring is less than 4 percent. d. Monitor and verify proper ambient room humidity and temperature conditions. 2. Where wood flooring or new wood panel subfloor is adhesively attached to concrete slabs, verify that slabs are free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Preparation per Fabricator s instructions, MFMA (SPEC), and NOFMA (IN), SECTION , and as follows: 1. Clean substrate, scrape or scarify, sweep and vacuum substrate clear of debris, paint, drywall, oily films, soap, wax, silicone, and dust. Do not use solvents. WOOD FLOORING APR 2011

260 2. Layout installation by marking extents of each item, and anchoring / fastening locations coordinated with blocking or other structural support. a. Review layout in field with Architect. b. Locate areas not flat within required tolerances and correct. c. Set proud nails or other fasteners into subfloor. d. Secure loose subflooring. 3. Protect adjacent conditions per SECTION , and as follows: a. Protect adjacent substrates, installed work and existing items from damage by construction operations with temporary but effective means. b. Strictly adhering to industry safety requirements. B. Acceptable Subflooring: 1. Wood sheathing underlayment a. Minimum Thicknesses: 1). 7/8 inch (22mm) thick with 24 inch O.C. supports 2). 3/4 inch (23/32 inch or 18mm) thick with 16 inch O.C. supports 3). 5/8 inch (16mm) thick when laid directly on a structural subfloor b. Panel Types: 1). Engineered Wood Flooring Underlayment: Place 15# felt or red rosin paper overlapping edges 2-4 inches (51mm to 102mm) prior to laying solid wood flooring on engineered flooring underlayment. 2). CDX grade plywood underlayment 3). OSB PS2 rated underlayment 4). AdvanTech ( engineered underlayment c. Fastener Spacing: Wood sheathing subfloor fasteners to be spaced a maximum 6 inches O.C. at supported ends, and 12 inches (305mm) O.C. at intermediate supports. d. Expansion: Provide 1/8 inch (3mm) gap at square-edge butted 4 foot (1.2m) panel ends C. Layout Preparation Racking: Dry lay out each wood-flooring strip without fastening to account for color and length variations. Review with Architect. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Installation per manufacturer s written instructions, MFMA (SPEC), and NOFMA (IN), SECTION , and the following. 1. Subflooring: a. Lay Engineered, Plywood or OSB panels in adhesive and fasten into substrate structure. Allow 1/16 inch space for expansion and contraction at panel joints. 2. Wood Flooring: Install solid wood floors by secret nailing or stapling into timber (either an existing floor or battens or sleepers or plywood laid over concrete). a. Establish a squareness control line set from the longest parallel wall. 1). Establish transfer control line(s) in adjacent room(s) as necessary. b. Begin installation on the longest parallel wall. c. Allow for expansion by providing a gap around the floor from 19/32 inch to 25/32 inch (15mm to 20mm). Allow for additional expansion across the width during a winter installation. d. Since wood boards more than five times wider than thick are prone to bowing and cupping, each board over 5-1/2 inch (140mm) wide shall be additionally secured across its width either by using adhesive on the back of the board. e. Wood strip end joints shall be staggered as far away from each other as possible, and no closer than 6 inches (150mm). 1). Exception: With boards shorter than 12 inches (300mm) in length stagger end joints at no less than twice the width of the board. f. When backfilling use a snug spline or slip tongue as needed. g. Cut wood strips or planks in a dust controlled separate room or area. WOOD FLOORING APR 2011

261 3. Installation Pattern: Straight and Random parallel mixture of board widths, as indicated by the Drawings 4. Nail Down Method. Fasten through T&G tongue using: a. Manual cleat nailer. b. Pneumatic or air assisted flooring cleat nailer. c. Pneumatic or air assisted flooring stapler. 1). Skip nailing or fastening every other row is not acceptable. 5. Glue Down Method: Follow glue manufacturer s recommendations. a. Trowel spread adhesive in an area on the subfloor where one can reach to place boards. b. Place each individual board into adhesive until adhesive area is covered. Repeat adhesive spread and board placement until done. 6. Field Finishing: a. Top Sanding: Perform using only sanders with a dust control vacuum attachment. 1). Provide effective dust containment system. b. Finish Coating: Stain and clear topcoat per SECTION , and as follows: 1). Mask off adjacent surfaces before beginning sanding. 2). Sand flooring to smooth even finish with no evidence of sander marks. Take precautions to contain dust. Remove dust by vacuum. 3). Apply finish in accordance with floor finish manufacturer's instructions. 4). Apply first coat, allow to dry and buff lightly with steel wool to remove irregularities. Vacuum clean and wipe with damp cloth before applying succeeding coat. 5). Lightly buff between coats with steel wool and vacuum clean before applying succeeding coat. 6). Apply last coat of finish. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect for buckling, cupping, crowning, and tenting, an indication that a subfloor and wood flooring acclimation period and/or moisture testing limits may not have been meet, and/or allowances for expansion and contraction were not observed. 2. Inspect for creaking, popping, squishy, bouncy, or sea saw effects, an indication that the subfloor was not properly prepared, and/or meeting the recommended flatness tolerance. 3. Inspect for gapping due to shrinkage, an indication that the wood flooring may not have meet moisture content limits and/or was not properly installed per temperature and RH requirements. B. Correction of Non-Conforming Work per SECTION CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Construction waste management and disposal per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Disposal Requirements: Handle hazardous waste in strict accordance with manufacturers recommendations and AHJ rules and regulations for materials regulated under RCRA (Resource Conservation and Recovery Act). 2. Coordinate take-back program with manufacturer, as applicable. a. Store and return pallets, containers and packaging to manufacturer or recycler for reuse or recycling. b. Store scrap materials to be returned to manufacturer for recycling into new product. B. Comply with construction waste management and disposal requirements of Section C. Clean and polish floor surfaces in accordance with Fabricator/Supplier's instructions, and project requirements. WOOD FLOORING APR 2011

262 D. Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation. E. Place protective coverings over finished floors to protect installed work from weather, vandalism and construction operations damage until Final Completion or Owner occupancy, whichever comes first. END OF SECTION WOOD FLOORING APR 2011

263 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION RESILIENT FLOORING A. Section includes, but is not limited to, fabricating, furnishing and installing the following work: 1. Resilient sheet flooring 2. Recycled rubber resilient roll/sheet flooring 3. Resilient base 4. Accessories as needed for a complete installation 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. The Conditions of the Contract and General Requirements of the Project Manual apply to this Trade Contractor, material suppliers, and all other persons furnishing labor and materials under this Section. General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and applicable parts of Division 01 are included as part of this Section. 1. DIVISION 03 / STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS: Restrictions on curing compounds and preparation of concrete to receive resilient flooring; Topping / leveling preparation work of concrete to receive resilient flooring. 2. SECTION , ROUGH CARPENTRY: Plywood sub-floor underlayment 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Reference Standards per SECTION , and current editions of the following: 1. ASHRAE. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers; 2. ASTM. ASTM International; 3. FS. Federal Specifications and Standards; 4. NFPA. National Fire Protection Association; ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting required per SECTION B. Coordination, sequencing and scheduling per SECTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Procedures: Administrative requirements in SECTION B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer s printed product literature including products standards, identifying materials, components and systems, performance criteria, finishes, use limitations, preparation and installation recommendations, and initial maintenance protective coating and cleaning recommendations, and the following: 1. Typical details indicating each specified system on proposed substrates and transitions to other flooring systems. 2. Submit recycled content information as defined by ISO Environmental labels and declarations. a. Post-consumer material - waste materials diverted from the waste stream after consumer or commercial use. b. Pre-consumer material - materials diverted from the waste stream during the manufacturing process. Excluded are regrind, rework, and scrap. C. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing plans, illustrative seams, patterns and pattern RESILIENT FLOORING APR 2011

264 direction, location and types of transition strips. D. Samples: 1. Initial for Selection: Submit printed color charts, sample chains or Architectural Binder indicating manufacturer s complete range to determine color, pattern, and/or composition for each type of material finish exposed to view. 2. Final Selection: Submit three (3) representative samples of each product specified, 12 x 12 inch in size, of each different type, color and pattern selected for acceptance. E. Qualification Statements: Manufacturer and installer. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS: A. Submittal Procedures: SECTION Warranty Documentation: Manufacturers executed material warranties and installers workmanship warranty. 2. Operation and Maintenance Data Including methods for maintaining installed products, maintenance product recommendations, related product data and MSDS sheets, directions for product use and performance. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Extra Materials: Submit no less than five (5%) percent additional full and unopened rolls or cartons of each color and pattern in each different material from same production run as products installed under this Section. Package each type of material separately, distinctly mark, and adequately protect against deterioration. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements - Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I; not less than 0.45 W/cm 2 2. Smoke Density per ASTM E662 or NFPA 258: 450 or less B. Manufacturer: A firm experienced a minimum five (5) years in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Installer / Applicator: Perform installation with skilled, experienced and trained workmen supervised by trained personnel who shall have a minimum five (5) years successful experience in installations of similar size and scope. F. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain primary resilient sheet flooring materials through one source from a single manufacturer. 1. Provide secondary materials, including patching and fill material, joint sealant, and repair materials, of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary materials unless otherwise specified. G. Sustainability Standards and Certifications - VOC requirements: 1. Adhesive and Sealant VOC Limits: In accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1168, BAAQMD Regulation 8, Rule 51, and GS-36 for aerosols. 2. Flooring Limits: RFCI FloorScore Certification by a third party certifier that meets VOC/HAP requirements. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, SECTION , and as follows: 1. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end. Store base material unrolled and flat FIELD CONDITIONS RESILIENT FLOORING APR 2011

265 A. Conditions and Measurements: Visit jobsite to verify installation conditions and field measurements. B. Ambient Conditions per manufacturer s written recommendations, SECTION , and as follows: 1. New concrete slabs shall be flat, clean and dry passing all flooring manufacturers moisture testing requirements. 2. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install until building is enclosed, wet work is complete. Maintain temperature and humidity at occupancy levels. 3. Acclimate product to installation location. Deliver materials to jobsite room in which it will be installed 48 hours before installation WARRANTY a. Maintain Temperature: Minimum 65 deg F (18 deg C), and maximum 80 deg F (26.7 deg C) for twenty-four (24) hours prior to and during Installation 1). Thereafter, maintain minimum temperature of 55 deg F (13 deg C). b. Maintain Humidity: 25 to 60 percent RH prior to and during Installation. A. Manufacturer Warranty: Prepare and submit in accordance with Section Closeout Submittals. 1. Resilient Sheet Flooring: Provide manufacturer s limited warranty stating sheet flooring is guaranteed to be free from wear-through due to normal use in residential applications. a. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Rubber Sports Roll Flooring: Provide manufacturer s three (3) year standard material and workmanship warranty against manufacturing defects, beginning on the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Resilient Sheet Linoleum - Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Forbo Linoleum, Inc. ( or an Architect acceptable equivalent product subject to compliance with requirements from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc., / Marmorette w/ NATURCote 2. Tarkett Inc; 3. Substitutions: See product requirements per SECTION B. Rolled Rubber Sports Floor - Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: ECORE International EverLast Sports Surfacing with Nike Grind ( or an Architect acceptable equivalent product subject to compliance with requirements from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Gerbert ECOsurfaces; 2. U.S. Rubber Recycling Inc.; 3. Substitutions: See product requirements per SECTION C. Resilient Base - Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Johnsonite, Inc. ( or an Architect acceptable equivalent products subject to compliance with requirements from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Burke Flooring; 2. Roppe Corp; 3. Substitutions: Not permitted 2.2 PERFORMANCE / DESIGN CRITERIA RESILIENT FLOORING APR 2011

266 A. Sustainability Characteristics - Indoor Environmental Quality: Flooring materials shall be FloorScore certified, or have test results that meet the following requirements: 1. Meets SCAQMD Rule 1168 sets a limit of 50 grams / liter (g/l) for flooring adhesives. 2. Meets BBAQMD Regulation 8, Rule 51, requiring VOC limit of 150 g/l for Indoor Floor Covering Installations. B. Resilient Flooring: 1. Fire Rating (ASTM E84): Class A 2. Critical Radiant Flux (ASTM E648): Class 1 3. Heat Resistance (ASTM F1514): Pass 4. Light Resistance (ASTM F1515): Pass 5. Dry Slip Resistance (ASTM D2047): 0.50 to 0.80 C. Rubber Sports Flooring: 1. Tensile Strength (ASTM D412): 200 min. 2. Flexibility, 1/4 inch mandrel (ASTM F137): Pass 3. Static Load, 1000 lb/in 2 (ASTM F970): < inch 4. Coefficient of Friction (ASTM D2047): > Chemical Resistance (ASTM F925): Pass, No change 6. Ambient Noise Reduction (ASTM C423): 0.10Sabin/sf 7. Thermal Conductivity (ASTM C518): approx BTU-in/hr-sf - F 8. Impact Insulation Class (ASTM E492): min Sound Transmission Coefficient (ASTM F413): min SHEET FLOORING A. Linoleum Sheet Flooring (LIN): Homogeneous wear layer bonded to backing, with color and pattern through wear layer thickness: 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F2034, Type corresponding to type specified 2. VOC Content: Meets requirements of SECTION Backing: Smooth surface with spray adhesive, or Jute fabric with toweled adhesive 4. Wear Layer Thickness: inch, minimum, excluding backing 5. Sheet Width: 79 inch, minimum 6. Pattern: A scheduled in the Drawings 7. Seams: Heat welded 8. Colors and Patterns: As scheduled B. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer and Product: Forbo Marmoleum Fresco and Real, or an Architect acceptable equivalent product subject to compliance with requirements from one of the following manufacturers: a. Armstrong Marmorette w/ NATURCote b. Johnsonite Veneto c. Substitution Limitations: See SECTION C. Linoleum Welding Rod: Solid color linoleum produced by flooring manufacturer for heat welding seams, in color in color matching predominant flooring color. RESILIENT FLOORING APR 2011

267 2.4 RUBBER SPORTS FLOORING A. Rubber Sports Flooring: Made from recycled SBR tire rubber, EPDM flecks, and rubber grind; single-ply non-laminated surface with high slip resistance, durability, cushioned resilience, stain resistance, and consistent color (no wear layer). 1. Width: 48 inch 2. Length: Refer to Drawings 3. Thickness: 3/8+ inch (8 mm to 10 mm) 4. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer s complete range of standard and custom colors. B. Adhesive: Zero VOC, one-component polyurethane moisture cured, non-sag, permanently elastic adhesive with excellent adhesion to elastomers, concrete and wood, engineered for indoor and outdoor applications. 1. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer and Product: E-Grip III by ECORE, or an Architect acceptable equivalent product subject to compliance with requirements and acceptable to the flooring manufacturer. 2.5 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base (RB): ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style A, Coved, and as follows: 1. Height: 4 inch 2. Thickness: inch thick 3. Finish: Satin 4. Length: Roll 5. Color: As scheduled in the Drawings 6. Accessories: Premolded external corners 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Leveling and Patching Compound: Trowelable or pourable latex-modified, portland cement based formulation approved by floor covering / adhesive manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Solvent-free, low odor, acrylic based, type as recommended by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer to suit resilient sheet flooring product and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Adhesive - Manufacturers List: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: a. Spray Adhesive - Spray Smart Flooring Adhesive by Tarket; b. Spray Adhesive - Spray-Lock by Interlock Industries, Inc.; c. Trowelled Adhesive: Type as recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer for installation. d. Substitution Limitations: See SECTION C. Primers: Solvent-free, low odor type as recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer for installation. D. Seaming Materials: Type as recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer for installation. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from flooring manufacturer s complete range of standard and custom colors. E. Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: Shapes and profiles as indicated on the Drawings; Same manufacturer as base. F. Tools and Equipment: Trowels, rollers, trimmers, heat welding and other tools as required for a RESILIENT FLOORING APR 2011

268 proper installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions. Examination per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Verify that substrate is flat to within 1/8 inch in 10 feet (4.69mm in 3m) and within the equivalent of 1/32 inch in 12 inches (0.78mm per 0.3m) per ASTM F Do not install until Owner engaged Independent Testing Agency show moisture emission rate, alkalinity ph, and bond testing results meets each flooring and adhesive manufacturer s requirements. a. If test results exceed limitation, flooring installation shall not proceed until corrective action has been completed and new tests are below requirements. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Refer to manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, SECTION , and as follows: 1. Prepare substrates to ensure proper adhesion of the resilient flooring system. 2. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F710. a. Verify the substrate is permanently dry, clean, smooth, and structurally sound. 1). Substrate shall also be free of dust, solvent, paint, wax, oil, grease, residual adhesive, adhesive removers, curing, sealing, hardening, or parting compounds, alkaline salts, excessive carbonation or laitance, mold, mildew, and other foreign materials that might prevent adhesive bond. b. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, silicone, or curing compounds using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. 1). Use only non-chemical mechanical methods, such as bead blasting or abrasive cleaning, to completely remove bond breaker materials from the concrete surface. 2). Removal procedures shall be completed a minimum 48 hours prior to starting concrete testing. 3). Sweep and vacuum substrate just prior to installation. 3. Wood Substrates and Exterior Panel Type Underlayment. Prepare and install per PS1, PS2, and APA Form L Expansion joints, isolation joints or other moving joints in concrete shall not be filled with patching compound nor covered with resilient flooring. See to SECTION Sweep and vacuum clean flooring substrates immediately prior to installation of resilient sheet flooring. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install Resilient Flooring, Rubber Sports Flooring and Accessories according to the Drawings, approved submittals, manufacturer's instructions and manuals, SECTION , and as follows: 1. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions. 2. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. 3. Fit joints tightly. 4. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. 5. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate RESILIENT FLOORING APR 2011

269 flooring under centerline of door. 6. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated. 7. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. 3.4 SHEET FLOORING A. Lay out without adhesive, and reverse roll the resilient sheet flooring during acclimation period. 1. Dry lay the sheet on the floor for 24 hours to ensure the sheet is totally relaxed. 2. Unless otherwise indicated by the Drawings, lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to longer room dimensions, to produce minimum number of seams. 3. Unless otherwise indicated by the Drawings, lay out seams to avoid widths less than 1/3 of roll width; match patterns carefully at seams. 4. Lay flooring with tightly butted seams, unless recommended otherwise by the flooring manufacturer. a. Use seam sealer as recommended by the manufacturer for specific flooring type. 5. Roll up half of the sheet to apply adhesive. Avoid damaging the folding point. B. Cutting: Lay resilient sheet flooring starting at the marked centerline. Cut the sheet closely to the wall using a utility knife. 1. Leave a 3/16 inch (5mm) gap at all inside and outside corners. 2. Double cut sheet at seams. C. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. 1. Extend resilient sheet flooring to center of door openings. D. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on sheet flooring as marked on substrates. 1. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, non-staining marking device. E. Spray-Applied Adhesive Method: 1. Do not place finish-flooring product until adhesive applied to substrate is ready to receive it per adhesive manufacturer s instructions. 2. Mark floor equivalent to manufacturer s recommended area for size of container used. Apply no more or less adhesive than what manufacturer recommends. 3. Outline perimeter of the room with a 4-5 inch (100mm to 125mm) wide band of adhesive. Apply the adhesive from 8-12 inches (200mm to 300mm) above the substrate. 4. Lay flooring finish material, adjust and reset until layout placement is certain. 5. Following installation of finish flooring (typically within an hour after installing) roll entire floor area with a 75 to 100 lb (34 to 45 kg) roller to ensure proper bonding with instant shear strength. 6. Close space to traffic for 2 hours before beginning installation, however, flooring is immediately available after rolling for all range of use. F. Trowel Adhesive Method: Adhere resilient sheet flooring to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate with a trowel to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections. 1. Allow adhesive to set-up. 2. Roll the flooring within an hour after placing the flooring into the adhesive bed. a. Roll the seam area using a hand roller. RESILIENT FLOORING APR 2011

270 b. Roll the floor in both directions, with a 100 lb three-section roller overlapping the previous rolled area by 1/2 of the width of the roller. 3. Protect flooring from foot traffic for 12 hours before and after installation per adhesive manufacturer s instructions to allow proper set up time. a. Keep furniture, fixtures, and rolling traffic off the floor for 48 hours. G. Linoleum - Heat Weld Seam Treatment: Complete the installation by sealing the seams using Heat Weld method. 3.5 RUBBER SPORTS FLOORING A. Install rubber sports flooring in accordance with manufacturer s installation procedures, techniques, and maintenance manuals. 3.6 RESILIENT BASE A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints. B. Miter internal corners. At exposed ends, use premolded units. Field fabricate external corners. C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. D. Scribe and fit to doorframes and other interruptions. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests and Inspections. Inspect floor installation for non-conforming work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Improper Substrate Preparation as Indicated by: Buckling or telegraphing; air blisters, buckles, and dirt or debris under the sheet flooring; and Moisture related failures. 2. Lack of Adequate Adhesion as Exhibited by: Loose edges or seams; Seams peaking; Shrinkage, or wide or too tight joints; or Adhesive oozing or adhesive on top of the flooring 3. Damaged sheet flooring as indicated by indentations, splits, cuts, cracks, punctures, melting, or burn marks B. Correction of Non-Conforming Work per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Repair improperly prepared substrates. 2. Finish touch-up damaged surface finishes. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with construction waste management and disposal requirements of SECTION B. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. C. Provide cleaning and initial maintenance in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Protect installed work from construction operations until date of Final Completion or Owner occupancy, whichever occurs first. 3.9 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Demonstration and Training: Provide training for Owner s maintenance personnel on proper cleaning and maintenance techniques for all installed flooring types. Flooring manufacturer s representative shall perform training with Contractor to coordinate. END OF SECTION RESILIENT FLOORING APR 2011

271 SECTION ACOUSTIC WALL PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabricating, furnishing, and delivering Acoustic Wall Panel System for Installation by SECTION , and the following: 1. Fabric-covered fiberglass core acoustic panels 2. Mounting brackets, fasteners, and other accessories needed for a complete installation B. Related Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including GENERAL and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and SECTION , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to this Section. 1. SECTION , FINISH CARPENTRY: INSTALLATION 2. SECTION , ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 3. SECTION , GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 4. SECTION , PAINTING AND COATING 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Reference Standards per SECTION , and current editions of the following: 1. ASTM. ASTM International; 5. CISCA. The Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; a. CISCA Code of Practices 6. FSC. Forest Stewardship Council; Certified Sustainably Managed Lumber; SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Procedures: SECTION B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer s printed product literature including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations 3. Installation methods. 4. Independent testing agency test reports. C. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing each panel product placed in installed location including field dimensions, each component type, size and finish, component assembly, and anchoring requirements. D. Samples: Two (2) complete sets of manufacturer's color samples, indicating full range of standard and custom fabrics, colors, and patterns. E. Prototype Samples: Submit three (3) materials and minimum 12 x 12 inch full assemblies of each Acoustic Wall Panel type selected, representing in all respects the minimum quality of work to be furnished by the manufacturer, for review and approval prior to fabrication production indicating each different: 1. Joint connection and edge details 2. Support bracket system, and fasteners 3. Bends, folds and corners of fabric wrapping ACOUSTIC WALL PANELS APR 2011

272 4. Color and texture of fabric wrapping selected F. Qualification Statements: Manufacturer. G. Closeout Submittals: Documentation: Executed warranty. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Extra Materials: Provide 5 percent of total acoustic wall panel Fabric installed, but not less than one of each type. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company with a minimum of ten (10) years experience specializing in manufacturing acoustical products specified in this Section. B. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish Acoustic Wall Panel system materials from one manufacturer for entire Project, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, SECTION , and the following: 1. Protect Acoustic Wall Panels from moisture during shipment, storage, and handling. Deliver in factory-wrapped bundles; do not open bundles until panels are needed for installation. 2. Store Acoustic Wall Panels flat, in dry, well-ventilated space; do not stand panels on end. 3. Protect Acoustic Wall Panel edges from damage. 4. Panels that become wet will become rejected as damaged, and shall be removed from the site and replaced. 5. Store materials dry, off ground, and under cover. 6. Protect liquid adhesive from freezing. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Condition: Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits B. Existing Conditions: Do not begin installation of acoustical products until building has been enclosed and environmental conditions approximate those that will prevail when building is occupied. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer / Special Warranty: Prepare and submit in accordance with SECTION Acoustic Wall Panel System: Provide manufacturer s standard material warranty, issued upon completion of the work and beginning on the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Wrapped Fiberglass - Basis-of-Design Product and Manufacturer: Type Hir-2 by Decoustics Limited ( unless noted otherwise, or an Architect acceptable equivalent product subject to compliance with requirements from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Conwed designscape by CDC Corporation, an Owens Corning Company; 2. Acoustical Resources; 3. Golterman & Sabo; ACOUSTIC WALL PANELS APR 2011

273 4. Substitution Limitations: See SECTION DESCRIPTION A. Acoustical Absorption: Perform testing in accordance with ASTM C423, Type A mounting method unless otherwise specified. B. Flame Spread Rating: Provide all components with Class A flame spread rating when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, unless otherwise specified. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS A. AWP Acoustic Wall Panels: Hi-Impact, prefinished, factory assembled fabric-covered panels 1. Fiberglass Core Panels: a. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): when tested in accordance with ASTM C423 for Type A mounting, per ASTM E795 b. Density: 6 to 7 pcf c. Flamespread: Class A d. Panel Width: As indicated on the Drawings e. Panel Height: As indicated on the Drawings f. Panel Thickness: 1 inch g. Corners: Square corners and edges h. Mounting: Back mounting Type A 2. Fabric Covering: Seamless fabric facing material, for stretched covering of core material. a. Fire Retardant Fabric: Woven polyester b. Basis of Design Product and Manufacturer: FR 701 by Guilford of Maine, or equal. 1). Exception: Owner reserves the right to furnish the panel fabric in whole or in part. c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range d. Patterns: Where fabric with directional or repeating patterns or fabric with directional weave is used, mark for installation in same direction 3. AWP Basis of Design Product and Manufacturer: Resolute by Golterman & Sabo, or equal 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate Acoustic Wall Panels to sizes and configurations indicated, with fabric facing installed without sagging, wrinkles, blisters, or visible seams. 1. Where radiused or mitered corners are indicated, install fabric to avoid seams or gathering of material. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Back-Mounting Accessories: Manufacturer's standard accessories for concealed support, designed to allow panel removal, and as follows: 1. Two-part Z clip and base-support bracket system; brackets designed to support full weight of panels and clips designed for lateral support, with one part mechanically attached to back of panel and the other attached to substrate. 2. Mounting Adhesive: Water-based, heavy-bodied adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of acoustical panels. B. Fasteners: Concealed only. 1. Painted head steel drywall screws; paint color to match panel 2. Impaling Clips. Manufacturer's standard 3 by 4 inches (75 by 100 mm) galvanized mounting clips designed for impaling back side of fiberglass units. C. Paint: Touch up paint to match panel finishes as supplied by the manufacturer. ACOUSTIC WALL PANELS APR 2011

274 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verification of Conditions. Examination per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Surface Preparation: Refer to manufacturer s instructions and recommendations for preparation of substrates. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Acoustical Wall Panels furnished to SECTION for installation in accordance with Drawings, manufacturer's instructions, approved submittals, and as follows: 1. Install two-part clip and base-support bracket system to substrate, plumb and level. 2. Scribe panels as needed to fit accurately at adjoining work and penetrations. 3. Align panels accurately, with edges plumb and top edges level. 4. Securely anchor panel to bracket system. 5. Finish touch-up damaged surface finishes. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Correction of Non-Conforming Work per SECTION CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with construction waste management and disposal requirements of SECTION Remove surplus materials, trimmed portions of panels, and debris resulting from installation. B. Clean fabric facing upon completion of installation from dust and other foreign materials, following manufacturer's instructions. C. Protect installed Acoustic Wall Panel work from construction operations until date of Final Completion or Owner occupancy, whichever occurs first. END OF SECTION ACOUSTIC WALL PANELS APR 2011

275 SECTION PAINTING AND COATING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide all labor, materials, tools and other equipment, services and supervision required to complete all exterior and interior painting work as indicated on Finish Schedules and to the full extent of the drawings and specifications. Work under this contract shall also include, but not necessarily be limited to: 1. Provide painting and coating finish for each item not finish-painted by the work of other sections. 2. Preparatory work of materials and surfaces to receive painting or finishing beyond that specified to be done as work of other Sections, shall be included as work of the Section. 3. Provide accessories and equipment needed for a complete installation. B. General Contractor and this subcontractor are cautioned to examine all Sections of the Specifications and the complete set of Drawings with care, in order to determine the full extent of the painting and finishing work required. And the following: 1. All materials which necessitate painting or finishing and which are left unfinished after installation or other work under other trade Sections shall be painted and finished to completion under this Section, unless specifically scheduled herein to be left unfinished. 2. Surfaces shall be painted or finished except as specifically excluded under the requirements of this Section, regardless of any conflicts which may occur between these requirements and current local trade practice, and between these requirements and each trade publication or standard. C. Related Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including GENERAL and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and SECTION , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to this Section. 1. DRAWINGS SE 1-0, SE 2-0, SE 3-0, SE 4-0 Special concrete finishes 2. SECTION , UNIT MASONRY: Field painting and touch-up; sealers over concrete or clay units 3. SECTION , METAL FABRICATIONS: Shop primers and pre-finishing 4. SECTION , FINISH CARPENTRY: Field painting and touch-up 5. SECTION , JOINT PROTECTION: Field painting 6. SECTION , WOOD FRENCH DOORS: Field painting and touch-up 7. SECTION , STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS: Field painting and touch-up 8. SECTION , WOOD WINDOWS: Touch-up 9. SECTION , GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES: Field painting and touch-up 10. SECTION , TOILET ACCESSORIES: Touch-up 11. SECTION , RESIDENTIAL ELEVATOR: Field painting and touch-up 12. DIVISION 32 (EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS)/ CIVIL & LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS: Painting, stenciling, and banding 13. DIVISION 33 (UTILITIES)/ CIVIL DRAWINGS: Painting, stenciling, and banding 1.2 WORK NOT INCLUDED: A. SECTION , FINISH CARPENTRY: Back priming and transparent finishing of wood. PAINTING AND COATING APR 2011

276 Note that any wood not covered by Division 06 shall be the responsibility of this section, unless noted otherwise. B. SECTION , ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK: Priming and finishing of wood covered by Section Note that wood finishing not covered by Division 06 shall be the responsibility of this section, unless noted otherwise. C. DIVISIONS 15 and 16 / MEP DRAWINGS: All hidden piping, ducts, and conduit, and where exposed in boiler room and similar utility rooms, or specified to be color coded, or as required by applicable code. D. All items and equipment with factory finish. 1. Exceptions: 1.3 REFERENCES a. Where primed only or where factory finish is required to be painted out to match adjacent surface finish b. Unless noted otherwise A. Abbreviations, Acronyms, and Definitions per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Paint. Includes enamels, paints, coatings, stains, varnishes, emulsions, lacquers and sealers. 2. Painting: Application of paint to interior and exterior surfaces of buildings and preparation of such surfaces for the purpose of receiving finish coat of paint, including such incidental or related work as is customarily performed by those in the painting trade. 3. Volatile organic compound or VOC means any compound that meets the definition of a VOC, as defined under 40 CFR part 51, subpart F, and in subsequent amendments. a. 1 pound/gallon VOC equals 120 grams/liter B. Reference Standards per SECTION , and current editions of the following: 1. ASTM. ASTM International; a. D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications 2. GS. Green Seal; 3. MPI. Master Painters Institute; a. MPI (PM) - Architectural Painting Specification Manual 4. PDCA. Painting & Decorating Contractors of America; a. PDCA (MT) - Painting and Decorating Craftsman s Manual and Textbook 5. OTC (VOC limits). Ozone Transport Commission; 6. SCAQMD. South Coast Air Quality Management District; 7. SSPC. The Society for Protective Coatings; a. SSPC (PM) - SSPC Painting Manual 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination and Scheduling per SECTION , with each section listed under Related Requirements article, and as follows: 1. Schedule painting operations to prevent disruption of and by other trades 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Procedures: See SECTION B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer s printed product literature including products standards, identifying materials, VOC data, test performance data, use limitations, and recommendations. PAINTING AND COATING APR 2011

277 1. List of Materials: Submit a complete list (spreadsheet) of each material proposed for use indicating Manufacturer, Product name / number, Sheen, and Color name / number. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. C. Samples: Submit three (3) representative sets of color swatches, of each type of finish specified, for color selection. Show step down of each prime and finish system. 1. Sample Sizes by Substrate: a. Concrete: 4 inch (10cm) square b. Concrete Masonry: 4 by 8 inch (10cm by 20cm), with mortar joint in the center. c. Painted Wood: 12 inch (30cm) square samples on hardboard. d. Stained or Natural Wood: 4 by 8 inch (10cm by 20cm) on actual wood surfaces. e. Metal: 1). Flat Metal: 4 inch (10cm) square 2). Solid Metal: 8 inch (20cm) long D. Manufacturers' Instructions: Indicating special procedures for substrate preparation, installation instructions, cleaning and maintenance. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS: A. Extra Materials: At project closeout, supply the Owner or owner's representative one gallon of each product for touch-up purposes. 1. Submit the color mixture name and code to the Owner or owner's representative for accurate future color matching. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company with a minimum of ten (10) years experience specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section. B. Installer Qualifications: Company with a minimum of five (5) years experience specializing in work of the type required by this section, and as follows: C. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish paint materials and products in each paint system from one manufacturer for entire Project. Paint system materials shall be the highest quality products, and be compatible with the other paint system materials used. D. Sustainability Standards Certifications - VOC Requirements: Products shall meet requirements of MPI Green Performance Standards GPS-1-08 and GPS E. Benchmark Installation: Provide one full finish-coat benchmark installation of each type of paint coating and substrate required on the Project. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved prepared samples. 1. Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each type of coating and substrate to be painted. a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sf (30 m 2 ) of wall surface. b. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate an item or area as required. 2. After permanent lighting and other services have been activated, apply coatings in this room or to each surface according to the Schedule or as specified. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface. a. After finishes are accepted, the Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate coating systems of a similar nature in other areas of the Project. 3. Final approval of colors by Architect will be from job-applied benchmarks. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, MPI (PM), AHJ, SECTION 01 PAINTING AND COATING APR 2011

278 0000, and as follows: 1. All painting materials shall be delivered to the site in manufacturer's original containers with labels intact and seals unbroken. They shall be kept in a locked, well-ventilated storage place. Receiving, opening and mixing of all paint materials shall be done in one area. 2. Storage space shall be kept clean and neat. Oily rags shall be removed and disposed of each day, and all other necessary precautions shall be taken to avoid fires. Maintain a fire extinguisher in paint mixing and storage area. 3. Disposal: a. Never pour leftover coating down any sink or drain. Use up material on the job or seal can and store safely for future use. b. Do not incinerate closed containers. c. For specific disposal or recycle guidelines, contact the local waste management agency or district. Recycle whenever possible. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Paint only when free of surface moisture, and when the substrate meets the following maximum moisture content requirements: a. 12 percent for concrete and masonry (clay and concrete brick/block) b. 15 percent for wood c. 12 percent for plaster and gypsum board 2. No painting of exterior surfaces shall be done before less than 72 hours of dry weather, after a rain, nor during periods of dew or fog. Receiving substrates shall be properly dried out before proceeding with the work. 3. No painting shall be done when temperature is below 50 deg F, except when specifically directed otherwise in writing by the Architect. 4. Clear sealer shall not be applied when air temperature is less than 50 deg F. 5. Perform no painting work when the relative humidity is above 85 percent, or when the dew point is less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) variance between the air / surface temperature. 6. Apply paint only to dry, clean, properly cured and adequately prepared surfaces in areas where dust is no longer generated by construction activities such that airborne particles will not affect the quality of finished surfaces. 7. Test for moisture using a properly calibrated electronic Moisture Meter, except test concrete floors for moisture using a simple polyethylene cover patch test. 8. Test concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces for alkalinity. Alkalinity shall not exceed each paint manufacturer s recommended ph. B. Furnish, maintain and remove all scaffolding, ladders and planks required for this work and all drop cloths for the protection of concrete walks, floors, prefinished materials, building fixtures, etc. 1. Painted and finished surfaces subject to damage or defacement due to other work on the building shall be properly protected and covered. 2. General Contractor shall be responsible for any and all damage to painted work and to that of other work caused by operations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide products from a single manufacturer. Design is based upon products of the manufacturers scheduled. PAINTING AND COATING APR 2011

279 1. Paint - Basis of Design Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore & Company ( and Tnemec Industrial Coatings ( subject to compliance with design and performance requirements, additional manufacturers may include but are not limited to one of the following: a. C2 Paint; b. Duron Paints & Wallcoverings, a business unit of Sherwin-Williams Company; c. Glidden Professional / AkzoNobel; d. Sherwin-Williams Company; e. Sunderland Welles Ltd.; f. Vermont Natural Coatings; g. Submittal Procedures: See SECTION Stain - Acceptable Manufacturers: Provide products from the following manufacturers, subject to compliance with design and performance requirements: a. Penofin; b. Samuel Cabot Incorporated, c. Sikkens, an AkzoNobel company, d. Sherwin-Williams Company; e. Substitution Procedures: See SECTION PERFORMANCE / DESIGN CRITERIA A. Paint: Materials are specified by brand names to establish a standard of quality or by performance requirements and general description of product. B. Color and Life of Film: Color of all surfaces finished under this Section shall, at the end of one year, have remained free from serious fading, and variations, if any, shall be uniform. 1. All materials shall have their original adherence at the end of one year, and there shall be no evidence of blisters, running, peeling, scaling, caulking, streaks or stains at the end of this period. 2. Washing with alkali-free soap and water shall remove surface dirt without producing any deterioration effects. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Paint: Basis-of-Design as scheduled, indicated by the Drawings, or specified B. Stain: Basis-of-Design as scheduled, indicated by the Drawings, or specified C. Shellac: Type 1, bleached, No. 4 cut with pure grain alcohol, conforming to ASTM D207 D. Thinner: As recommended by each manufacturer for the respective product E. Linseed Oil: Pure first quality, conforming to ASTM D260 F. Putty: Pure linseed oil putty of standard manufacture thoroughly mixed to prevent the possibility of shrinkage. Color shall match the final finish to adjoining surfaces. Putting shall conform to Federal Specification TT-P-79A, Type 1. G. Compatibility: Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2.4 MIXING AND TINTING A. Except where specifically noted in this section, all paint shall be ready-mixed and pre-tinted. Agitate all paint prior to and during application to ensure uniform color, gloss, and consistency. PAINTING AND COATING APR 2011

280 B. Thinner addition shall not exceed manufacturer's printed recommendations. Do not use kerosene or other organic solvents to thin water-based paints. C. Where paint is to be sprayed, thin according to manufacturer's current guidelines. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions per quality requirements in SECTION , and as follows: 1. Carefully examine installation areas with Installer/Applicator present, for compliance with requirements affecting Work performance. a. Verify that substrates, utility covers, tolerances, humidity, moisture content level, cleanliness and other conditions are as required by the manufacturer, MPI (PM), PDCA (MT), SSPC (PM), and are ready to receive Work. 1). Moisture Levels: Gypsum board, plaster, concrete, and masonry surfaces shall be tested with moisture testing device before coating is applied. No coating shall be applied when moisture content exceeds 12 percent, except as may be required by the manufacturer of the coating materials used. 2). Mildew: Remove and neutralize 3). ph of Surfaces to be Coated: < 10 ph b. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1). No painting or finishing shall be started until the surfaces to be painted or finished are in proper condition in every respect. 2). Surfaces that cannot be properly prepared by the painter for finishing shall not be painted or finished until they are rectified, unless instructed otherwise by the Architect. 3). Starting of the work without such notification will be considered acceptance by the contractor of surfaces involved. 4). General Contractor will be required to replace any unsatisfactory work caused by improper or defective surfaces as directed by the Architect at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.2 PREPARATION - SURFACES A. Perform all preparatory work as recommended by paint manufacturer, MPI (PM), PDCA (MT), and SSPC (PM), for application and substrates indicated, and as follows: 1. No priming or painting of wood will be permitted on or in building area where unit masonry is being installed or is in the process of drying. 2. Concrete unit masonry surfaces shall not be painted until completely cured and thoroughly dried. In any event, no surfaces shall be painted until at least 30 days have elapsed from the time these surfaces were completed by their respective trades. 3. Holes, cracks and other minor imperfections in concrete, concrete masonry, and plaster surfaces to be painted shall be suitably primed and patched with a compound recommended by the manufacturer of the paint to be applied to these surfaces, and all areas to be painted shall be brought to true, even surfaces. 4. Surfaces to be painted shall be clean and free of dirt, dust, mildew and any other substances that might interfere with the functioning of the painting system. All surfaces to be painted shall be dull and in proper condition to accept and assure the proper adhesion and functioning of the particular painting system or coating specified. All steps necessary shall be taken to insure surfaces are properly prepared for painting as recommended by paint manufacturer (including pressure spray with bleach/water or TSP mixture as necessary). PAINTING AND COATING APR 2011

281 5. All steel and ferrous metal surfaces to be painted shall be primed before installation as specified. Bolts, welds and places where prime coat has been damaged shall be wire brushed to remove all loose paint, rust and scale and then given one (1) coat of Metal Primer. 6. All wood surfaces shall be sanded by machine or hand and left dust clean. All knots, pitch pockets or sappy portions shall be sealed with clear shellac or sealer. Putty all nail holes, cracks, etc., after first prime coat. 7. Prime coats and finish coats for any single paint system shall be the products of the same manufacturer, except for manufacturer-applied factory or shop-primed surfaces. Prime coats and filler coats shall be tinted one shade lighter than finish coats. 8. Provide Field Samples of all joint sealants to be painted to test compatibility and adhesion. 3.3 APPLICATION A. All painting shall be done by skilled and experienced mechanics, working under the supervision of a capable foreman. 1. All materials shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and materials shall be thinned only for the proper workability and in compliance with the manufacturer's specifications. 2. All material shall be evenly applied without runs or sagging, and free from drops, ridges, laps, holidays, air bubbles, pin holes, and brush marks. 3. Apply paints as recommended by the paint manufacturer. B. Completed painting sections shall be free of blistering, running, peeling, scaling, streaks and stains and the colors of all surfaces shall remain free from fading. C. Painting shall include all exposed surfaces of every member. Parts to be painted, inaccessible after installation, shall be painted before installation. 1. Priming shall include all sides, edges and cut ends. Suction or hot spots shall be spot-primed prior to general priming. D. Apply putty, caulking or spackle only after surface is primed and primer is dry. E. Comply with paint manufacturer's recommendations and restrictions as to environmental temperature and humidity conditions under which paint and paint system can be applied. 1. Do not apply finish in areas where dust is being generated. F. It is the intent of this Section that the coverage of all painted surfaces shall be complete and adequate. G. General Contractor shall be responsible for fine sweeping in any area to receive work by this section so as to minimize the possibility of airborne debris from contaminating the work. This section shall be responsible for the wiping down of all surfaces to be painted prior to the commencement of work. H. Do not paint over door tags, doorframes, or other objects that bear fire-rating information. Do not paint over tags or plates on mechanical equipment. 3.4 PAINTING - EXTERIOR A. General: Install Exterior Paint according to the Drawings, approved submittals, manufacturer's instructions, MPI (PM), PDCA (MT), SSPC (PM), and as follows: 1. Exterior paint systems are identified by letter with interior paint systems by number. Systems specified correspond to the paint system scheduled. 2. When a different manufacturer's paint has been approved for use by Architect, that manufacturer's specification will be followed. Coverage, thinners, coats and preparation will be in all cases be as recommended by manufacturer of products used. 3. All rooftop equipment including rooftop units, piping, ductwork, ladders, etc. shall be field PAINTING AND COATING APR 2011

282 painted. Color to be selected by Architect in field. 4. Degrease galvanized metal before painting, degreasing method shall be as approved by painting manufacturer. 5. At exterior concrete surfaces to be painted, all surfaces must be thoroughly brushed with stiff fiber bristles to remove loose particles. Remove all fins and any other protuberances. The surface shall be clean, dry, and sound. Allow proper curing time, as specified in concrete section, prior to painting. 3.5 PAINT SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR A. Paint System "A" (Wood) (Stain): 1. One (1) coat: Cabot OVT primer 2. Two (2) coats: Cabot OVT B. Paint System "B" (Ferrous Metals) (Gloss): 1. One (1) coat: IronClad Retardo Rust Inhibitive Paint 163 (MWF 2.9 mils min.) 2. Two (2) coats: Impervo Enamel 133 (MWF 3.1 mils min. per coat) C. Paint System "C" (Galvanized Metal) (Gloss): 1. One (1) coat: IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer 363. (MWF 2.9 mils min.) 2. Two (2) coats: Impervo Enamel 133 (MWF 3.1 mils min. per coat) D. Paint System "D" (Wood) (Natural Stain): 1. Two (2) coats: Penofin Verde 3.6 PAINTING - INTERIOR A. General: Install Interior Paint according to the Drawings, approved submittals, manufacturer's instructions, MPI (PM), PDCA (MT), SSPC (PM), and as follows: 1. Hardware and Fixtures: Hardware, hardware accessories, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items in place not required to be painted shall be removed prior to painting and replaced on completion of each space. Heating and other equipment adjacent to wall shall be disconnected and moved to permit surfaces to be painted, using workmen skilled in appropriate trades. Following completion of painting, they shall be expertly replaced and reconnected. 2. Exposed Plumbing, Mechanical and Electrical Items: Items such as conduits, pipes, ducts, grilles, registers, vents, access panels and items of similar nature shall be unfinished, unless noted otherwise, to match adjacent wall and ceiling surfaces, where directed. Paint visible surfaces behind vents, registers, or grilles flat black. Wash exposed metal with solvent, and prime and paint spray paint wherever practicable. Do not paint concealed conduits, piping and ducts. 3. Door lite frame and grilles shall be painted. Architect to make color selection. 4. Degrease galvanized metal before painting, using mineral spirits or as approved by painting manufacturer. 5. All exposed structural steel, metal deck and other exposed unfinished surfaces shall be painted except for exposed items in existing spaces, that will remain exposed unless noted otherwise. 6. All plywood backboards required or indicated at electrical and or telecommunications rooms that are not scheduled as fire-retardant treated, shall receive a Class A fire retardant paint finish. 3.7 PAINT SCHEDULE - INTERIOR A. The following schedule applies to all surfaces not otherwise scheduled to receive finish by other PAINTING AND COATING APR 2011

283 trades. Reference MPI (PM) for Mxx numbers noted in parenthesis (xxx). 1. Paint System "1" (Hardwood: Transparent) (where not covered by work of other sections): a. One (1) coat: Benwood Paste Wood Filler b. One (1) coat: Wood Finish Penetrating Stain (MPI 234) c. Two (2) Coats: Sunderland Welles Ltd./ Loc-Lamin OR Vermont Natural Coatings/ PolyWhey 2. Paint System "2" (Wood: Opaque - Semi-Gloss): a. One (1) coat: Moorecraft Superspec Alkyd Enamel Undercoater Primer Sealer (MPI 245) b. Two (2) coats: Moorecraft Superspec Latex Semigloss Enamel (MPI 276) 3. Paint System "3" (Wood: Opaque - Satin): a. One (1) coat: Benjamin Moore, REGAL Premium Interior Latex Primer (N216) b. Two (2) coats: Benjamin Moore, Waterborne Satin Impervo Acrylic Latex Enamel Paint System "4" (Wood Flooring: Transparent) a. One (1) coat: Minwax Water Based Polyurethane for Floors Basecoat b. Two (2) coats: Minwax Water Based Polyurethane for Floors - Satin 5. Paint System "4" (Wood Flooring: Tint) a. One (1) coat: Benwood Paste Wood Filler b. Two (2) coats: Benwood 228 Polyurethane Stain Satin Finish 6. Paint System "5" (Wood Doors and Windows: Transparent) a. One (1) coat: Interior Sanding Wood Sealer (as needed) b. One (1) coat: Interior Penetrating Oil Wood Stain c. Two (2) coats: Minwax Helmsman Water-based Spar Urethane - Satin 7. Paint System "5" (Wood Doors and Windows: Opaque Epoxy-Finish) a. One (1) coat: Interior Sanding Wood Sealer (as needed) b. One (1) coat: Tnemec Series Primer c. Two (2) coats: Tnemec Series 113 (low sheen) Water Base Epoxy 8. Paint System "6" (Gypsum Board and Plaster: Eggshell): a. One (1) coat: Moorecraft Superspec Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer (MPI 253) b. Two (2) coats: Moorecraft Superspec Latex Eggshell Enamel (MPI 274) 9. Paint System "7" (Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: Satin): a. One (1) coat: Tnemec Series PVA Sealer b. Two (2) coats: Tnemec Series 66 Epoxoline (satin sheen) c. Note: If an acrylic or PVA primer is used then a minimum of 50 hours must be allowed before top coating with epoxies. 10. Paint System 8 (Gypsum Board and Wood: Epoxy-Finish) a. One (1) coat: Tnemec Series 151 Primer b. Two (2) coats: Tnemec Series 113 (low sheen) Water Base Epoxy 11. Paint System "9" (Metal: Semi-Gloss): a. One (1) coat: M04 Acrylic Metal Primer b. Two (2) coats: M29 D.T.M. Acrylic Semi Gloss PAINTING AND COATING APR 2011

284 12. Paint System "10" (Ceiling-Exposed-Metal: Ductwork, bar joists, etc.) 3.8 CLEANING a. Prime/Finish: Apply two coats of Tnemec Series 15 Unibond. A. Comply with construction waste management and disposal requirements of SECTION , and as follows: 1. All waste paint materials shall be separated and recycled. Where paint recycling is available, collect waste paint by type and provide for delivery to recycling or collection facility. 2. Materials that cannot be reused must be treated as hazardous waste and disposed of following rules and regulations of AHJ. 3. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste, including used sealant and adhesive tubes and containers, in containers or areas designated for hazardous waste. 4. Eliminate contaminants entering waterways, sanitary/storm drain systems or into the ground from construction activities. Strictly adhere to the following procedures: a. Retain cleaning water for water-based materials to allow sediments to be filtered out. In no case shall equipment be cleaned using free draining water. b. Retain cleaners, thinners, solvents and excess paint and place in designated containers and ensure proper disposal. c. Return solvent and oil soaked rags used during painting operations for contaminant recovery, proper disposal, or appropriate cleaning and laundering. d. Dispose of contaminants in an approved legal manner in accordance with hazardous waste regulations. e. Empty paint cans are to be dry prior to disposal or recycling (where available). f. Close and seal tightly partly used cans of materials including sealant and adhesive containers and store protected in well ventilated fire-safe area at moderate temperature. 5. Set aside and protect surplus and uncontaminated finish materials not required by the Owner and deliver or arrange collection for verifiable re-use or re-manufacturing. B. Upon completion of the paintwork, Contractor shall remove from the premises and dispose of all scaffolding, equipment and surplus material. Remove empty containers and other debris resulting from work of this section. C. Contractor shall leave all glass areas, surfaces, floors and walls, hardware and any other surfaces clean from any paint, stain, spatterings, smears or smudges which are the result of his operations, taking care not to mar surfaces of items being cleaned. Contractor shall replace glass damaged by his operations. 3.9 PROTECTION A. Protect installed work from construction operations until date of Final Completion or Owner occupancy, whichever occurs first. END OF SECTION PAINTING AND COATING APR 2011

285 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION TOILET ACCESSORIES A. Section includes, but is not limited to furnishing, when noted, and installing toilet and bath accessories as follows: 1. CH - Cup Holder 2. M - Make-up mirror 3. RH - Hooks (single robe) 4. SD - Soap Dish 5. TB - Towel Bar 6. TP - Toilet tissue dispenser 7. TR - Towel Ring 8. SCR - Shower curtain rod; Contractor to furnish and install 9. Provide additional accessories as needed for a complete installation including, but not limited to, fasteners and mastic. B. Related Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including GENERAL and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and SECTION , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to this Section. 1. SECTION , ROUGH CARPENTRY: Blocking to secure wall-mounted accessories 2. SECTION , FINISH CARPENTRY: Installation 3. SECTION , JOINT PROTECTION: Accessory perimeter and adjacent materials 4. SECTION , GYPSUM BOARD: Blocking to secure wall-mounted accessories 5. SECTION , TILING: Coordination of wall finish installation. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Reference Standards per SECTION , and current editions of the following: 1. ASTM. ASTM International; 2. GANA. Glass Association of North America; SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer Product Information (Furnished by Owner): Indicating special procedures for substrate preparation, and installation instructions. 1. Service and parts manuals 2. Name of local representative to be contacted in the event of need of field service or consultation B. Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Cleaning and maintenance recommendations 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Requirements: 1. Washroom Accessories: Comply with ICC / ANSI A117.1, and MAABS (521 CMR 1.00) requirements. B. Benchmarks: To establish aesthetic, workmanship and tolerance requirements of the final TOILET ACCESSORIES APR 2011

286 appearance for matching in the field. 1. Provide benchmark installations for each accessory type in the Work as indicated by the Drawings or directed by the Architect. 2. Approved benchmark installations may be incorporated into the Work if accepted without exception by the Architect. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, and SECTION PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Owner Supplied Items: As listed in the Schedule and located on the Drawings. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Provide concealed corrosion resistant fasteners and attachment devices, and other fittings necessary to assure function and operation of accessories. 1. Concealed Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel or hot dip galvanized, tamperproof, security type 2. Exposed Fasteners Not Desired: Provide fasteners; if concealed fasteners are not an option, to match accessory finish surface. Notify Architect for review and approval, or an alternative anchoring method. B. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate 2.3 TOILET ACCESSORIES A. Toilet Accessories - Owner Furnished and Contractor Installed: 1. CH - Cup Holder 2. M - Make-up mirror 3. RH - Hooks (single robe) 4. SD - Soap Dish 5. TB - Towel Bar 6. TP - Toilet tissue dispenser 7. TR - Towel Ring B. Toilet Accessories - Contractor furnished and installed: C. SCR - Shower Curtain Rod: Blind concealed fastened (no exposed fasteners), type 304 stainless steel w/ #4 satin finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions. Examination per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Review items furnished by the Owner and immediately inform the Architect of each missing item required for a complete working installation. 1. Owner will deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation. 2. Owner will provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. B. Coordinate blocking requirements to support wall-mounted accessories. TOILET ACCESSORIES APR 2011

287 C. Surface Preparation: Refer to manufacturer s instructions and recommendations for preparation of substrates. D. Dissimilar Materials: Back-paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. E. Product Handling: Remove shipping / storage protection prior to installation, leaving construction protection in place. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install Toilet Accessories in complete accordance with regulatory requirements, manufacturer s written instructions. 1. Install plumb, level, and rigidly anchored to substrates. 2. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations and indicated on Drawings 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections: 1. Test: Adhesion of silver using the standard tape pull method per ASTM D Inspection: Verify mirrors are free of chips, cracks, and other inclusions that could inhibit structural or aesthetic integrity. B. Correction of Non-Conforming Work per SECTION ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Test accessories and adjust for proper operation. B. Comply with construction waste management and disposal requirements in SECTION C. Clean all exposed surfaces. 1. Clean mirrors per GANA Bulletin , just prior to inspection for Substantial Completion, and just prior to Final Completion or Owner occupancy, whichever occurs first. D. Protect installed work from construction operations until date of Final Completion or Owner occupancy, whichever occurs first. 3.6 TOILET ACCESSORY SCHEDULE A. Schedule of Toilet Accessories Furnished by Owner, Installed by Contractor, unless noted otherwise: 1. CH-1: Hansgrohe Tumbler/ Holder PC a. Location: Room No. 003 b. Quantity: 1 2. CH-2: Dornbracht MEM ACC's Tumbler Holder Wall Model Complete Polished Chrome a. Location: Room No. 003 b. Quantity: 1 3. M-1: Kallista P74204-KN-LB Laura Kirar Vir Stil Mirror; Walnut Finish a. Location: Room No. 004 b. Quantity: 1 4. M-2: Miroir Arpin SQU-13C X Chrome/ Silver Twin Arm a. Location: Room Nos. 112, 118/119, 209/210, 310/311 b. Quantity: 1 each 5. RH-1: Hansgrohe Robe Hook PC a. Location: Room Nos. 003, 109/110, 121/122, 204/205, 304/305 b. Quantity: 2 each 6. RH-2: Gessi Chrome Clothes Hook TOILET ACCESSORIES APR 2011

288 a. Location: Room Nos. 112, 118/119, 209/210, 310/311 b. Quantity: 2 each 7. SD-1: Hansgrohe Soap Dish and Holder PC a. Location: Room Nos. 003, 109/110, 121/122, 204/205, 304/305 b. Quantity: 1 each 8. SD-2: Dornbracht MEM ACC's Soap Dish Wall Model Complete Polished Chrome a. Location: Room Nos. 003, 109/110, 121/122, 204/205, 304/305 b. Quantity: 1 each 9. TB-1: Kallista P LB Vir Stil Minimal Towel Bar/ 12 in. a. Location: Room No. 004 b. Quantity: TB-2: Kallista P LB Vir Stil Minimal Towel Bar/ 24 in. a. Location: Room No. 004 b. Quantity: TB-3: Hansgrohe " Towel Bar PC a. Location: Room Nos. 003, 109/110, 121/122, 204/205, 304/305 b. Quantity: 2 each 12. TB-4: Gessi " Towel Bar Chrome a. Location: Room Nos. 112, 118/119, 209/210, 310/311 b. Quantity: 2 each 13. TP-1: Kallista P LB Vir Stil Minimal Tissue a. Location: Room No. 004 b. Quantity: TP-2: K14459 PC STILL TLT Tissue Holder a. Location: Room Nos. 003, 109/110, 121/122, 204/205, 304/305 b. Quantity: 1 each 15. TP-3: Gessi Chrome Toilet Paper Holder without Cover a. Location: Room Nos. 112, 118/119, 209/210, 310/311 b. Quantity: 1 each 16. TR-1: Gessi Chrome/ Towel Ring a. Location: Room Nos. 112, 118/119, 209/210, 310/311 b. Quantity: 2 each 17. SCR: Contractor provided Shower Curtain Rods as indicated on the Drawings END OF SECTION TOILET ACCESSORIES APR 2011

289 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION FIREPLACE SPECIALTIES A. Section includes, but is not limited to, furnishing the following products to SECTION for installation: 1. Flue liners, stainless steel 2. Firebox and ash dump refractory surface (firebrick) 3. Flue liner insulation (foil-faced ceramic batt blanket) 4. Chimney flue and collar transition 5. Smoke chamber 6. Smoke chamber damper 7. Throat Tiles 8. Metal curtain & rod 9. Air supply 10. Custom fabricated metal gasketed bi-folding door supplied by Owner, and installed by Contractor 11. Chimney flue rodent screen 12. Ash dump access door and frame 13. Factory built gas fireplace unit B. Related Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including GENERAL and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and SECTION , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to this Section. 1. SECTION , METAL FABRICATIONS: Steel angle; Smoke chamber transition collar 2. SECTION , FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 3. SECTION , FIRESTOPPING 4. SECTION , JOINT PROTECTION 5. DIVISION 03-05/ STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS 6. DIVISION 15, MECHANICAL 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Reference Standards per SECTION , and current editions of the following: 1. ASTM. ASTM International; 2. NFPA. National Fire Protection Association; 3. UL. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination, Sequencing, and Scheduling per SECTION B. Preinstallation Meeting per SECTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Procedures: See SECTION B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer s product data, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations. FIREPLACE SPECIALTIES APR 2010

290 C. Samples: Submit three (3) representative samples of each different exposed finish items proposed for use for Architect s approval. 1. Items: Damper lever; metal screen & rod; firebrick; rodent screen; ash dump access door and frame D. Closeout Submittals per SECTION : Submit Operation and Maintenance Data, Warranty Documentation, and Record Documentation. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Approvals: 1. Fireplace Accessory Products: Tested and listed by UL standards a. UL 1777 for all fuels and at zero clearance to combustibles. b. UL 907, "Standard for Fireplace Accessories" 2. NFPA 211, Standard for Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents, & Solid Fuel Burning Appliances B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company with a minimum of ten (10) years experience specializing in manufacturing or fabricating products specified in this Section. C. Installer Qualifications: Refer to SECTION D. Prototype Samples: Provide materials and full or partial assemblies of each exposed item type, representing in all respects the minimum quality of work to be furnished by the manufacturer, for review and approval prior to fabrication production indicating each different: 1. Joint connection detail 2. Support, and exposed fastener 3. Bend, angle and corner 4. Finish 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, and SECTION A. Manufacturer / Special Warranty: Prepare and submit in accordance with 1. Product: Provide written five (5) year material warranty issued by the manufacturer upon completion of the work and beginning on the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE / DESIGN CRITERIA A. Regulatory Requirements: UL 1777; UL 907; NFPA 211 B. Design Requirements: 1. Safe fireplace drafting of flue gases to prevent backdrafting and possible carbon monoxide poisoning 2. Firebox and chimney construction to prevent smoke particulates from entering the home 3. Chimney cap construction to prevent rainwater from entering the flue 4. Chimney cap construction to prevent animals from entering the flue opening 5. Fresh make-up air supply piped into the firebox 2.2 OPERATION A. Operators: Damper controlled by rotating custom lever handle on face of fireplace as indicated on the Drawings. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Flue Liner: UL103, Class A; UL 1777 tested and listed 1. Main Fireplace Flue - Basis of Design Product: M-Flex CB18xID 316L/TI w/kit by National Chimney Supply ( or an Architect acceptable equivalent FIREPLACE SPECIALTIES APR 2010

291 meeting requirements. a. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666, Type 316L 2. Gas Fireplace Flue - Basis of Design Product: 6 inch Dia. insulated Stainless Steel Simpson Duravent System by M&G Duravent ( or an Architect acceptable equivalent meeting requirements. a. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666, Type 430; inner and outer walls b. System includes, but is not limited to, chimney cap, spark arrestor, storm collar, flashing, chimney pipe, elbow offset kits, appliance adapter. B. Firebox and Ash Dump Refractory Surface: Firebrick per ASTM C1261; 100 percent solid per ASTM C67 for MOR (500psi minimum), size, warpage and C24 for PCE (minimum of 13). 1. Refractory Mortar: Per ASTM C199; PCE 29 or above with min. Heat Schedule B (C113) 2. Firebrick: Full Black or Full Dark Red w/ lampblack by Superior Clay Corporation, ( a. Size: 9 x 4-1/2 x 2-1/2 inch 3. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Refractory Mortar and Firebrick Products by Superior Clay Corporation ( or an Architect acceptable equivalent meeting requirements. C. Flue liner insulation: Foil-faced ceramic wool blanket per ASTM C612 and UL Fire Resistance (ASTM E84): Class A D. Chimney Flue and Collar Transition: Welded stainless steel plate, see SECTION for metal requirements. 1. Thickness: 1/4 inch E. Smoke Chamber: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: 20x24 custom modified fired-clay Rumsford smoke chamber by Superior Clay Corporation ( or an Architect acceptable equivalent meeting requirements. F. Smoke Chamber Damper: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Flat cast iron damper by Superior Clay Corporation ( or an Architect acceptable equivalent meeting requirements. 2. Custom fabricated rotary control system. See Drawings, and SECTION G. Steel Angle: Stainless steel per ASTM A666, Type 316; See STRUCTURAL and SECTION for size and other requirements. H. Clay Throat Tiles: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Modular throat tiles w/ coping by Superior Clay Corporation ( or an Architect acceptable equivalent meeting requirements. I. Metal Curtain & Rod: UniFlame Custom Sized Metal Curtain & Rod by Blue Rhino ( Fireplace-Furnishing-Catalog.aspx), or an Architect acceptable equivalent meeting requirements. J. Air Supply: See SECTION , Drawings and DIVISION 15, MECHANICAL. 1. Regulator connected to 3 x 7 inch galvanized steel tube welded to galvanized steel plate. K. Custom Fabricated Metal Gasketed Bi-folding Door: Furnished by Owner, coordinated and installed by Contractor. See Drawings. 1. Hardware: Pivot hinges w/ sleeved bolts; custom cremone bolts 2. Metal fireplace mesh screen curtain L. Custom Chimney Flue Rodent Screen: FIREPLACE SPECIALTIES APR 2010

292 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Type 316L Rodent Screen by New England Chimney Supply ( or an Architect acceptable equivalent meeting requirements. M. Ash Dump Access Doors and Frames: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Cast Iron by ACHLA Designs / Minuteman International ( or an Architect acceptable equivalent meeting requirements. 2. Sizes: 12 x 12 inch; 9-1/2 x 5-1/2 inch N. Factory Built Gas Fireplace Unit: Mendota DXV-35 Direct Vent Gas Fireplace w/ Bentley Door Kit by Johnson Gas Appliance Company - Mendota Hearth Division ( or an Architect acceptable equivalent meeting requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Acceptance of Conditions. Examination per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Protect In-Place Conditions from damage during accessory installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION / APPLICATION A. General: Install according to the Drawings, manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, NFPA 211, UL 1777, AHJ, SECTION , SECTION , SECTION , and as follows: 1. Install stainless steel flue and smoke chamber lining per ASTM D4618 a. Install custom made large modified fired clay Rumsford smoke chamber wall lining. 1). Bed smoke chamber with medium duty, non- water-soluble calcium aluminate refractory cement mixture. Portland cement-bonded mixtures shall not be used. b. Install stainless steel collar plate onto smoke chamber, and wrap with flue liner insulation. c. Connect stainless steel tile flue on top of stainless steel collar plate, and wrap with flue liner insulation. d. Install rodent screen system at top of flue, and construct masonry cap. 2. Masonry Fireplaces shall be constructed from (a minimum) of low-duty fireclay brick (ASTM C27 & C1261) laid in medium-duty refractory mortar (ASTM C199). a. All joints and intersections between the hearth extension/fireplace facing and the fire chamber (firebox) shall be fully sealed with medium-duty refractory mortar (ASTM C199). b. Smoke chamber walls shall be lined with (a minimum) of low-duty fireclay brick (ASTM C27 & C1261) and laid in medium-duty refractory mortar (ASTM C199). 3. Gas Fireplace: B. Interface with Other Work: Coordinate with work of SECTION , SECTION , STRUCTURAL, DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL, and the Drawings. C. Adjusting: Adjust flue control operation until smooth and acceptable to Architect. All hinged material operation shall be smooth, balanced, and acceptable to Architect. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Correction of Non-Conforming Work per SECTION B. Field Tests and Inspections per SECTION , and AHJ. C. Manufacturer Services per SECTION , and as follows: Manufacturer s or Fabricators field representative(s) shall give product use recommendations, and perform site visits to inspect product installation in accordance with instructions and warranty requirements. FIREPLACE SPECIALTIES APR 2010

293 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with construction waste management and disposal requirements of SECTION B. Protect installed work from construction operations until date of Final Completion or Owner occupancy, whichever occurs first. END OF SECTION FIREPLACE SPECIALTIES APR 2010

294 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES A. Section includes, but is not limited to, fabricating, furnishing and installing the following work: 1. Refrigerator 2. Freezer 3. Refrigerator Drawer 4. Range 5. Wine Cooler 6. Convection Microwave Oven 7. Range hood 8. Freestanding Grill 9. Dishwasher (2) 10. Washer (2) 11. Dryer (2) 12. Accessories as needed for a complete installation B. Related Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including GENERAL and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and SECTION , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to this Section. 1. SECTION , ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK: Dishwasher face panel to match kitchen cabinets. 2. DIVISION 15, MECHANICAL: Plumbing piping connections for appliances 3. DIVISION 16, ELECTRICAL: Equipment wiring connections for appliances 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Reference Standards per SECTION , and current editions of the following: 1. EPA. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; a. Energy Star Appliance Program 2. UL. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination and Scheduling per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Coordinate with SECTION for custom cabinets; provide rough-in information to cabinet fabricators. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Procedures: See SECTION B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer s printed product literature including operating characteristics, dimensions of individual appliances, and finishes for each appliance including the following: 1. Model number and selected options for each appliance 2. Preparation instructions and recommendations 3. Rough in dimensions and utility connections 4. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES APR 2011

295 5. Installation methods 6. List of maintenance parts C. Appliance Schedule: For appliances; use same designations indicated on Drawings. D. Samples: Submit three (3) representative samples, 4 x 6 inches, of colors available on final materials for approval. E. Manufacturers' Instructions: Indicate special procedures for preparation, installation instructions. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS: A. See SECTION , for submittal procedures. 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Operating, cleaning and maintenance recommendations. 2. Warranty Documentation: Executed warranties. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Tools: Special tools not otherwise easily available. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company with a minimum of ten (10) years experience specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section. B. Installer Qualifications: Company with a minimum of three (3) years experience specializing in work of the type required by this section. C. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish appliance units and accessory materials from one manufacturer for each unit type for entire Project, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer s instructions and recommendations, and SECTION FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within manufacturer recommended limits. 1. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. B. Substrate Conditions: Area and substrate shall be clean, level or sloped as required, and with access to proper drainage and/or electrical power WARRANTY A. Manufacturer / Special Warranty: Prepare and submit in accordance with SECTION Special Appliance Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of each appliance specified agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. a. Refrigerator/Freezer: Five (5) year limited warranty for in-home service on the sealed refrigeration system. b. Gas / Electric Range: Five (5) year limited warranty for service on surface-burner elements. c. Microwave Oven: Five (5) year limited warranty for service on defects in the magnetron tube. d. Dishwasher: Ten (10) year warranty for in-home service against deterioration of tub and door liner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products by Manufacturer List: Provide products by manufacturers as scheduled under RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES below subject to compliance with requirements. 1. Substitution Limitations according to SECTION RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES APR 2011

296 2.2 PERFORMANCE / DESIGN CRITERIA A. All electrical appliances shall be UL approved, listed, and labeled. 1. Appliances shall be certified under the EPA / DOE Energy Star product labeling program. 2.3 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES A. Refrigerator (K.1): Built-in All Refrigerator 1. Capacity: 23.3 cubic ft 2. Size: 36 inch 3. Features: a. Energy Star b. Air Purification System with cartridge c. (4) Adjustable Glass Shelves d. (1) Stationary Glass Shelf e. (1) High-Humidity Drawer with Dividers f. (2) Storage Drawers with Dividers g. (3) Adjustable Door Shelves h. (2) Stationary Door Shelves i. Adjustable Dairy Compartment 4. Handle Type: Tubular 5. Finish: Brushed stainless steel 6. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer / Product: Sub-Zero BI-36R/TH; B. Freezer (K.2): Built-in All Freezer 1. Capacity: 22.8 cubic ft 2. Size: 36 inch 3. Features: a. Energy Star b. Water filtration system; Microbiological type c. Adjustable Wire Shelves d. Ice maker 4. Handle Type: Tubular 5. Finish: Brushed stainless steel 6. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer / Product: Sub-Zero BI-36F/TH; C. Refrigerator Drawer (K.3): Built-in with 27 inch Integrated All Refrigerator Drawers 1. Capacity: Total minimum storage of 10 cubic ft; minimum 15 percent freezer capacity. 2. Features: a. Energy Star b. Drawer front panels c. Dual installation kit d. Dozen egg container with lid 3. Handle Type: Tubular 4. Finish: Brushed stainless steel 5. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer / Product: Sub-Zero 700BR; D. Range (K.4): Free-standing 1. Features: a. Cooking Modes: Ten (10) b. Temperature probe c. Self-cleaning d. Interior Lighting: Halogen RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES APR 2011

297 e. Set of three (3) oven racks with full extension bottom rack 2. Exterior Finish: Brushed stainless steel 3. Interior Finish: Cobalt blue porcelain 4. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer / Product: Wolf DF 606DG-LP w/ 60 inch Dual Fuel Range; E. Wine Cooler (K.5): Undercounter wine storage unit with 46 bottle capacity 1. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer / Product: Sub-Zero 424 Wine Storage; F. Convection Microwave Oven (K.6): Built-in 1. Capacity: 1.5 cf 2. Power: 1,000 Watts 3. Power Levels: Turntable: 15 inch dia. recessed ceramic 5. Trim Kit: 30 inch 6. Finish: Stainless steel 7. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer / Product: Thermador MCES w/ MCT30ES; G. Range Hood (K.7): All-in-one design includes liner, blower, filtration, controls, lighting, and damper into custom canopy hood 1. Fan: 4 speed w/ with LinkLogic enabled technology 2. Width: 34-3/8 inch 3. Depth: 22-1/2 inch 4. Features: a. Backdraft damper b. Four-setting cooktop lighting; two (2) 50W, GU10 halogen lamps; Bulbs included c. Evolution TM baffle filters with handles d. Heat Sentry TM automatic high speed when excess cooking heat is detected 5. Finish: 430 Stainless Steel #4 Brushed 6. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer / Product: BEST CP 47E; H. Free Standing Grill (K.8): Outdoor Free Standing Grill with ProSear Burner and Rotisserie 1. Finish: Stainless steel 2. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer / Product: Lynx L42PSFR-1; I. Dishwasher (K.9): Built-in dishwasher with custom panel that matches cabinetry 1. Features: a. Stainless steel tall tub b. Wash Cycles: 6 with 5 Options c. Virtually Silent: < 40 dba d. Indicator light beams on the floor to indicate dishwasher is running e. Energy Star appliance f. Half load options for small loads g. 15 Place setting capacity h. Concealed heating element no melting of plastics i. Extra tall item sprinkler to clean Items up to 22 inch tall 2. Panel: Custom by SECTION Basis-of-Design Manufacturer / Product: Bosch 24 inch Integra 500 Series ITEM # SHV68E13UC; J. Trash Compactor (K.10): Undercounter type RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES APR 2011

298 1. Features: a. Width: 18 inch b. Drawer Size: 1.7 cu.ft. c. Motor: 1/2 hp d. Drive System: 3-point e. Activated charcoal filter and fan f. Handle: 17 inch Stainless steel; type as selected by Architect 2. Panel: Custom by SECTION Basis-of-Design Manufacturer / Product: Viking DFC180; K. Washer (L.1): Front loading Steam Washer 1. Capacity: 4.8 cf 2. Width: inch 3. Features: 4. Finish: Stainless steel 5. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer / Product: LG LSWF388HVS; L. Dryer (L.2): Front loading gas dryer 1. Capacity: 7.4 cf 2. Width: inch 3. Finish: Graphite Steel designer color 4. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer / Product: LG LSDG389VS; PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions. Examination per SECTION , and as follows: 1. Carefully examine installation areas with Installer present, for compliance with requirements affecting Work performance. a. Verify that field measurements, substrates, structural support, utility connections, tolerances, levelness, plumbness, cleanliness and other conditions are as required by the manufacturer, and ready to receive Work. 1). Verify utility rough-ins are present and correctly located. 2. Correct each detrimental condition that will adversely affect the execution, permanence or quality of the work of this Section. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION / APPLICATION A. General: Install Appliances according to the Drawings, approved submittals, manufacturer's instructions, DIVISION 15, DIVISION 16, and as follows: 1. Anchor built-in equipment in place, plumb, level, balanced, and in proper relationship to adjacent construction. 2. Connect appliances to building utility, supply and waste systems as applicable. 3. Check for and adjust any internal locking bolts to allow for free operation. 4. Test for proper operation and drainage. Adjust until proper operation is achieved. RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES APR 2011

299 5. Provide joint protection per SECTION FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Non-Conforming Work per General and Supplementary Conditions, and as follows: Remove, Repair and Reinstall or Restore in Place damaged items. 1. Finish touch-up damaged surface finishes. 2. Replace damaged materials or appliances with New if repair not acceptable to Architect. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Waste Management 3.6 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Comply with construction waste management and disposal requirements of SECTION B. Remove packing materials from equipment. C. Wash and clean equipment. D. Protect installed work from construction operations until date of Final Completion or Owner occupancy, whichever occurs first. 3.7 KITCHEN APPLIANCE SCHEDULE KITCHEN KEY ITEM IMAGE MANUFACT. # COMMENTS K.1 Refrigerator Sub-Zero BI- 36R/TH 36 Built-In All Refrigerator K.2 Freezer See Above Sub-Zero BI- 36F/TH 36 Built-In All Freezer 23.3 cubic foot capacity Air Purification System 4 Adjustable Glass Shelves 1 Stationary Glass Shelf 1 High-Humidity Drawer with Dividers 2 Storage Drawers with Dividers 3 Adjustable Door Shelves 2 Stationary Door Shelves Adjustable Dairy Compartment RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES APR 2011

300 K.3 Refrigerator Drawer Sub-Zero 700BR 27 Integrated All Refrigerator Drawers Panels by Cabinetmaker Options/Accessories: Drawer front panels with tubular or pro handles Dual installation kit Dozen egg container with lid K.4 Range Wolf DF 606DGLP 60 Dual Fuel Range Ten cooking modes, temperature probe and self-clean features. Cobalt blue porcelain oven interiors with halogen lighting. Three adjustable oven racks with fullextension bottom rack. K.5 Wine Cooler Sub-Zero 424G/S/TH Wine Storage Undercounter wine storage unit with 46 bottle capacity K.6 Convection Microwave Oven Thermador MCES w/ MCT30ES 30 trim kit 30 Stainless Steel Built-in Convection Microwave K.7 Hood Best CP 47E RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES APR 2011

301 K.8 Free Standing Grill Lynx L42PSFR-1 42 Free Standing Grill with Pro Sear Burner and Rotisserie K.9 Dishwasher x2 Bosch 24 Integra 800 Series Dishwasher Custom Panel by Cabinetmaker Item #: SHV68E13UC Stainless Steel Tall Tub 6 Wash Cycles and 5 Options Virtually Silent: 40dBA InfoLight beams on the floor to indicate dishwasher is running Energy Star Half Load Options for Small Loads 15 Place Setting Capacity Concealed Heating Element No Melting of Plastics Extra Tall Item Sprinkler Cleans Items 22 Tall K.10 Trash Compactor Viking DFC Undercounter Trash Compactor Custom Panel by Cabinetmaker x2 END OF SECTION RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES APR 2011